REV February 11, 2014

ii Anime Studio Pro 10

Users Manual

Contents Draw Shape

Delete Edge
38
41
Magnet41
Welcome1 Blob Brush 42
Eraser44
Chapter 1: Introduction 2
Point Reduction 46
Demo Limitations 2 Scatter Brush 47
New Features in Anime Studio 10 2 Perspective Points 48
System Requirements 6 Shear Points 49
Activating Anime Studio 7 Bend Points 50
Getting Started 7 Noise50
Creating a Content Folder 8
Chapter 4: Fill Tools 52
Automatic Update Checking 9
Select Shape 52
Chapter 2: License 11
Create Shape 55
End User License Agreement and Limited Warranty 11 Paint Bucket 58

Anime Studio Tools 23 Delete Shape 62

Line Width 63
Chapter 3: The Draw Tools 24 Hide Edge 64
Select Points 25 Stroke Exposure 65
Transform Points 28 Curve Profile 67
Add Point 32 Working with Fills 70
Curvature35
Chapter 5: Bone Tools 73
Freehand35

Contents
iii Anime Studio Pro 10
Users Manual

Select Bone 73 Patch Layers 118

Transform Bone 78 Chapter 7: Layer Tools 121
Add Bone 80 Transformation121
Reparent Bone 81 Set Origin 125
Bone Strength 82 Follow Path 126
Manipulate Bones 83 Rotate Layer XY 129
Bind Layer 84 Shear Layer 130
Bind Points 84 Layer Selector 131
Offset Bone 85 Inserting Text and Word Balloons 131
Bone Physics 86 Creating Word Balloons 137
Smart Bones 88 Eyedropper138
Chapter 6: Layer Types 101 Chapter 8: Special Tools 139
Layer Types 101 Poser139
Enhanced Layer Alignment Features 103 Switch Layer 141
Vector Layers 104 Particle Layer 141
Image Layers 105 Image Masking 142
Group Layers 106 Video Tracking 143
Bone Layers 107
Chapter 9: Camera and Workspace Tools 154
Switch Layers 109
Camera Tools 154
Particle Layers 113
Workspace Tools 156
Note Layers 116
Audio Layers 116 Anime Studio Windows 158
3D Layers 117
Contents
iv Anime Studio Pro 10
Users Manual

Chapter 10: Anime Studio’s Main Window 159 Image Tab 198

Overview159 Switch Tab 202

Working Area 159 Particles Tab 203

Toolbar160 3D Options 204

Status Bar 162 Note Tab 205

Playback Buttons 162 Physics Tab 206

Display Quality 162 Chapter 13: Style Window 210

Docking and Undocking Windows 164 Shapes212
Chapter 11: Layers Window 166 Fills214

Overview166 Stroke226

The Layer List 166 Applied Styles Drop-Down Menus 235

Layer Toolbar 168 Swatches236

Using Layer Comps 169 Copy, Paste, and Reset Buttons 237

Using Layer Colors 170 Advanced Window Checkbox (26) 238

Checker Selection (27) 238
Chapter 12: Layer Settings 172
Chapter 14: The Library Window 239
Editing Multiple Layers 172
General Tab 174 Displaying the Library Window 240

Shadows Tab 184 Searching the Library 245

Motion Blur Tab 188 Favorites Tab 246

Masking Tab 189 Chapter 15: The Character Wizard 248

Vectors Tab 195 Using the Character Wizard 248
Depth Sort Tab 197 Body Tab 251

Contents
v Anime Studio Pro 10
Users Manual

Face Tab 254

Anime Studio Menus 307
Movement Tab 257
Clothing Tab 259 Chapter 18: File Menu 308
Style Tab 261 New309
Designing a Character and Walk Cycle 262 New from Template 309
Making Your Character Walk 264 Open...309
Rotating Your Character 360 Degrees 266 Open Recent 310
Designing Your Own Actions 270 Close310
Creating Content for the Character Wizard 272 Save310

Chapter 16: The Timeline Window 275 Save As... 311

Revert311
Controlling Time 277
Gather Media 311
Navigating the Timeline with the Mouse 278
Project Settings... 312
Choosing an Interpolation Method 278
Import320
Choosing an Animation Interval 283
Real-Time Media Connection 323
Onion Skins 284
Poser Integration 323
Animation Channels 286
Import Notes and Tips 326
Working with Keyframes 289
Photoshop Tips 327
Sequencer293
Refresh Media 331
Motion Graph 295
Preview331
Chapter 17: Other Windows 298
Preview Animation 333
Audio Recording 298
Export Animation... 333
Actions Window 299
Export OBJ 343

Contents
vi Anime Studio Pro 10
Users Manual

Export POV 343 Smooth356

Upload to YouTube 343 Raise Shape 357
Upload to Facebook® 343 Lower Shape 357
Batch Export... (Anime Studio Pro only) 344 Raise to Front 357
Relaunch in (x)-bit Mode 346 Lower to Back 357
Quit346 Trace Image 357

Chapter 19: Edit Menu 347 Hide Selected Points 363

Show All Points 363
Undo347
Hide Shape 363
Redo347
Show All Shapes 363
Cut, Copy, Paste 347
Freeze Points 363
Clear348
Freeze Selected Points 363
Select All 348
Reset Points 363
Select None 348
Reset All Points 363
Select Inverse 348
Select Connected 348 Chapter 21: Bone Menu 364
Preferences...348 Release Points 365

Chapter 20: Draw Menu 355 Flexi-Bind Points 365

Release Layer 365
Insert Text... 356
Flexi-Bind Layer 365
Snap to Grid 356
Release Layer And Points 365
Reset Line Width 356
Use Selected Bones for Flexi-Binding 365
Random Line Width 356
Create Smooth Joint for Bone Pair 365
Peak356
Use All Bones for Flexi-Binding 367

Contents
vii Anime Studio Pro 10
Users Manual

Hide Selected Bones 368 Chapter 23: Scripts Menu 378

Hide Controlled Bones 368 3D378
Show All Bones 368 Camera379
Track Bone to Video 368 Draw380
Make Smart Bone Dial 368 Image381
Freeze Pose 370 Layer Effects 381
Reset Bone 371 Particle Effects 382
Reset All Bones 371 Script Writing 383
Chapter 22: Animation Menu 372 Sound385
Allow Frame Skipping 373 Text385
Reset All Layer Channels 373 Tiling385
Set Layer Start Time 373 Visibility385
Align Layer with Camera 373 Warp386
Rescale Keyframes... 373 Other Popular Scripts 386
Copy Current Frame... 375 Scripting Documentation 386
Add Keyframe 376 Chapter 24: View Menu 387
Clear Animation 376 Reset388
Track Layer to Video 376 Zoom In 388
Nudge Physics Object 377 Zoom Out 388
Mute Audio 377 Show Output Only 388
Restart Audio Track 377 Direction388
Audio Level 377 Enable Grid 388
Restart Movie 377 Grid Settings 388
Contents
viii Anime Studio Pro 10
Users Manual

Disable Grid Snapping 388 Tutorials395

Video Safe Zones 389 Help395
Show Output Only 389 Online Tutorials 395
Select Tracing Image 389 Welcome Screen 395
Show Tracing Image 389 Register Your Product 395
Show Curves 389 Community Forums 396
Auto Hide Curves 389 Technical Support 396
Fade Unselected Layers 390 Download Bonus Content Pack 396
Design Mode 390 Online Video Gallery 396
Stereo390 About Anime Studio Pro 396
Show Document Tabs 390 About Scripts 396

Chapter 25: Window Menu 391 Buy Content 396

Check For Updates 397
Tools391
Deactivate License 397
Layers391
Edit Keyboard Shortcuts 397
Timeline391
Set Custom Content Folder 400
Style391
Open Custom Content Folder 400
Actions391
Library392 Appendix401
Audio Recording 392
Appendix A: Product Comparison 402
Blend Morphs 392
Layer Settings 394 Window Menu 403

Poser Parameters 394 Vector Drawing Features 403

Vector Modifiers 404
Chapter 26: Help Menu 395
Contents
ix Anime Studio Pro 10
Users Manual

Fill Features 404 Anime Studio Discussion Forum 412

Fill Modifiers 404 Email Support 412
Bone Features 405 Appendix C: Acknowledgements 413
Layer Features 405
Artist Acknowledgements 413
Layer Modifiers 406
Content Acknowledgements 415
Layer Types 406
Appendix D: Anime Studio Shortcuts 417
Camera Features 406
How to Work Quickly in Anime Studio 417
Workspace Features 407
Menu Shortcuts 417
Timeline Features 407
Keyboard Shortcuts 419
Action Features 407
Mouse Shortcuts 424
Style Features 408
Multi-touch Support 425
Preferences408
Project Settings 408 Index428
Content409
Scripts409
View409
Import409
Export Formats 410
Upload Features 411
Optimization Features 411

Appendix B: Technical Support 412

User Manual 412
Anime Studio on the Web 412

Contents
1 Anime Studio Pro 10
Users Manual

Welcome
This manual includes embedded video files
that help demonstrate features that are more
easily explained in video format. If you receive a
warning about Acrobat not being able to connect
to a flashserver while trying to play the file, please
refer to “Using the Embedded Media Files” on page
1 in your Anime Studio Tutorial Manual for
instructions on how to disable the warning.


2 Anime Studio Pro 10
Users Manual

Chapter 1: Introduction Demo Limitations

If you haven’t purchased a copy of Anime Studio, then
Anime Studio is a complete animation system for creating the program will be running in demo mode. While in demo
2D anime and cartoons. This document is the user’s mode, Anime Studio still allows you access to all features
manual, containing useful information to get you started, of the program. Anything you can do in the full version
as well as a detailed reference to all of Anime Studio’s you can do in the demo. Also, any files you create with
features. the demo version of Anime Studio will still work fine if you
purchase the full version.
If you’re just getting started using Anime Studio, the best
place to begin is with the quick start tutorials, which The demo version has just three limitations: First, you can
appear in “Quick Start” on page 3 in your Anime only run the demo version of Anime Studio for 30 days.
Studio Tutorial Manual. Choose Help > Tutorials to open Second, you cannot import any external file formats
the manual in PDF format. This section will give you a quick including images and movies. Third, you cannot export
overview of how Anime Studio works, and what you can your animations to other formats (QuickTime, AVI, Flash,
do with it. Even if you’ve used Anime Studio in the past, you etc.).
might want to give the tutorials a quick read to see what’s
To purchase Anime Studio, go to http://store.smithmicro.
changed in this version.
com/.
If you’ve been using Anime Studio for a while now, and
you want more information on some specific feature or
interface element, choose the section that interests you New Features in Anime Studio 10
from the table of contents.
Finally, if you’re having a problem that just isn’t answered
Major New Features
in this document, please see “Appendix B: Technical
Support” on page 412. We want to do everything we
• New Bone Constraint Types: New bone constraint
can to make using Anime Studio a fun and productive
types make it easier to rig characters. See “Bone
experience.

Chapter 1: Introduction
3 Anime Studio Pro 10
Users Manual

Constraints” on page 75 for more information about ƒƒ Eraser Tool: Allows you to erase portions of a
Independent Angle and Squash and Stretch Scaling. selected shape. See “Eraser” on page 44 for
Also see “Tutorial 3.6: New Bone Features” on page more information.
147 in your Anime Studio Tutorial Manual.
ƒƒ Point Reduction Tool: Allows you to reduce the
• Smart Bone setup: The Bones > Make Smart Bone Dial number of points in a selected object by painting
command makes it easier to create Smart Bone dials over the areas you want to optimize. See “Point
and actions. See “Make Smart Bone Dial” on page Reduction” on page 46 for more information.
368 for more information.
• Transform Points Tool: The Translate Points, Rotate
• Transform Bones Tool: A single tool now allows you to Points, and Scale Points tools have been combined
translate, rotate, and scale bones. See “Transform into a single tool. See “Transform Points” on page 28
Bone” on page 78 for more information. for more information.

• Render in a separate process: Renders are now • Freehand Tool: Points are automatically hidden when
performed as a separate process. you use the Freehand tool so that you can get a more
accurate preview while you draw. See “Freehand” on
• Bounce, Elastic, and Stagger interpolation methods page 35 for more information.
offer more options for animation of characters and
objects. See “Choosing an Interpolation Method” on • Preview Animations: Use the File > Preview Animation
page 278 for more information. command to generate a movie while you play your
project in the document window. See “Preview
• New Drawing Tools, include: Animation” on page 333 for more information.

ƒƒ Blob Brush Tool: The new Blob Brush tool allows • Multiple Document Support: Anime Studio now allows
you to quickly and easily create vector shapes you to open more than one document at a time, and
and outlines by painting on the screen. See “Blob switch from one to another in a tabbed interface. See
Brush” on page 42 for more information. “Open...” on page 309 and “Show Document Tabs”
on page 390
Chapter 1: Introduction
4 Anime Studio Pro 10
Users Manual

• Keyboard Shortcut Editor: The Help > Edit Keyboard See “Show All Points” on page 363 for more
Shortcuts command allows you to create and save information.
your own keyboard shortcut configurations. See
ƒƒ The Bones > Hide Selected Bones command allows
“Edit Keyboard Shortcuts” on page 397 for more
you to hide selected bones to make it easier
information.
to focus on specific bones in your scene. See
• Multiple Shape Selections: The Select Shape tool now “Hide Selected Bones” on page 368 for more
allows you to select multiple shapes so that you can information.
change fill, stroke, or both simultaneously. Basic color ƒƒ The Bones > Show All Bones command unhides
controls have also been added in the options bar. See bones that have previously been hidden.
“Select Shape” on page 52 for more information. See “Show All Bones” on page 368 for more
information.
• Frame Zero and Sequencer: Each layer now has its own
“frame zero”, allowing you to perform actions normally • Paint Bucket Tool: The Paint Bucket tool now allows
confined to frame zero when the start point of a layer you to fill closed shapes that are not welded. The fill is
has been moved to a negative frame value. created as a separate object. See “Paint Bucket” on
page 58 for more information.
• Hide Points and Bones to reduce clutter in your
document window, with the following commands: • GPU Acceleration allows higher quality display of
ƒƒ The Draw > Hide Selected Points command hides strokes and transparencies in images.
selected points so that you do not accidentally
• Multiple Layer Editing: Select multiple layers, including
select them while editing other nearby points. The
layers of different types, and apply changes to multiple
objects associated with those points are still visible
layers at the same time. See “Editing Multiple Layers”
in the document window. See “Hide Selected
on page 172 for more information.
Points” on page 363 for more information.

ƒƒ The Draw > Show All Points command unhides

points that have previously been hidden.

Chapter 1: Introduction
5 Anime Studio Pro 10
Users Manual

• Variable Width Curves: Line widths are now calculated accurately between keyframes. Threshold works in
based on percentage values. See “Line Width” on conjunction with blur. Thresholds can be applied to
page 63 for more information. layers, shadows, and shading to produce smoother
transitions in corners. You’ll find new Threshold options
• Multi-Brushes: Multibrushes allow you to stroke an in Layer Shadows, Layer Shading, and in some of the
object with multiple shapes. See “Stroke Brush Selector fill effects.
(13)” on page 227 for information on how to select,
use, and create multi-brushes. Blur and threshold options are found in the
following sections: “Layer Shadow” on page
• Random Line Widths: The Random Line Width 185; “Layer Shading” on page 185; “Shaded Fill
command now features a Randomize button that Effects” on page 217; “Soft Edge Fill Effects” on
produces subtle variations between line widths along page 218; “Shaded Fill Effects” on page 217; and
a curve. See “Random Line Width” on page 356 for “Drop Shadow” on page 222
more information.

• Texture Transparencies: The Texture fill effect now • Colorization of layers: The new Colorize Layer
allows you to fill selected shapes with textures that are feature allows you to overlay a color on a layer. See
partially transparent, allowing other areas of the shape “Colorizing” on page 180.
to show through. See “Image Texture Fill Effects” on
page 221. • Depth of Field: Improvements allow you to visually
set up the areas in the camera view that will be in
• Particle Layers: Particle layers can now use arbitrary focus and where other objects will blur. “Tutorial 6:5.2:
shapes to generate particles. See “Particle Layers” on Crowds, Particles, and Depth of Field” on page 261
page 113 and “Particles Tab” on page 203. in your Anime Studio Tutorial Manual shows how to use
these enhancements.
• Blur improvements and Threshold: Any feature that
uses blur (layer blurs, shadows, shading, various fill • Media Plugins/Export Animation: More video formats
effects) now accepts floating point blur radius values. are supported in Windows and Macintosh versions.
This allows for blurs that can be animated more
Chapter 1: Introduction
6 Anime Studio Pro 10
Users Manual

See “Export Animation...” on page 333 for more • 2 GB RAM recommended

information.
• 1.6 GB (Universal) or 800 MB (32-bit) free hard disk
• Content Library Updates: The Library palette now uses space minimum
the same color scheme that you specify in Preferences.
• OpenGL enabled GPU recommended
• Preview image saved with project: When saving
documents, a preview thumbnail is saved with the • 1024x768 display (1280x800 recommended)
project. See “Save” on page 310.
• DVD-ROM drive (physical version only)
• Automatic Update checking: See “Automatic Update
• Internet connection for product activation
Checking” on page 9 for more information.
recommended
• Activation, Serial, and License Management: Anime
• Windows® Internet Explorer® 9 or newer
Studio now prompts you to activate and serialize your
software. See “Activating Anime Studio” on page 7
Macintosh:
System Requirements • Macintosh® OS X 10.8, 10.9 or newer

• 64-bit OS required
Windows:
• 1.3 GHz Intel Processor or newer
• Windows® 7, 8, 8.1 or newer
• 2 GB RAGM recommended
• 64-bit OS required for 64-bit installation
• 800 MB free hard drive space minimum
• 1.3 GHz Pentium 4 or newer, Athlon 64 or newer
• 1024x768 display (1280x800 recommended)

Chapter 1: Introduction
7 Anime Studio Pro 10
Users Manual

• DVD-ROM drive (physical version only) A product that has not been activated will run in trial
mode until the trial period expires. If the trial period has
• Internet connection for product activation expired, you must activate it in order to use the product.
recommended

During installation, the Anime Studio installer Getting Started

checks to see if a previous installation of the
same installer exists on your system. The installer will After you install Anime Studio, you might want to familiarize
prompt you to uninstall the previous version before yourself with the many features contained in the program.
continuing (recommended).
When you start Anime Studio, a splash screen presents the
following options:

Activating Anime Studio • Introductory Tutorial: Opens the Tutorial Manual, which
you can also open using the Help > Tutorial Manual
After you install Anime Studio, you will be prompted to command from the Anime Studio menu.
enter your serial number and activate your Anime Studio
license. If the product has not yet been activated, will be • Bonus Content Pack: Opens your Web browser to the
prompted to activate your Anime Studio installation at Content Paradise web site, specifically to the Anime
launch time. If you do not activate your serial number, the Studio bonus content page. A Content Paradise
product will deserialize. account and valid Anime Studio serial number are
required to add the free content to your shopping
After you enter your serial number, your cart. You can also navigate to this page by choosing
license must be activated within seven days. the Help > Download Bonus Content Pack command
from the Anime Studio menu.

Activation requires an internet connection • Register Your Product: Opens your Web browser to
the Smith Micro registration page, where you are
prompted to enter registration information for your

Chapter 1: Introduction
8 Anime Studio Pro 10
Users Manual

Smith Micro software products. You can also navigate

to this page by choosing the Help > Register Your
Product command from the Anime Studio menu.

• ContentParadise.com: Opens your Web browser to

the Content Paradise home page, where you can
order content for Anime Studio and other Smith Micro
software products. You can also navigate to this page
by choosing the Help > Buy Content command from
the Anime Studio menu.

• Don’t Show This Again: Choose this command to

prevent the splash screen from opening each time you
start Anime Studio.

Splash Screen

Creating a Content Folder

When you first start Anime Studio, you will be asked if you
want to create a folder to store your custom content.
After the content folder is created, a hierarchy of folders
appears beneath it. Any content stored in these locations
will appear in the “My ...” folders in the Librarty (such as “My

Chapter 1: Introduction
9 Anime Studio Pro 10
Users Manual

Characters” in the Characters library and so on. This allows If you choose to never show the dialog that
you to store user-created word balloons, brushes, and prompts you to create a content folder, you
other custom items that you can use in Anime Studio. In can choose the Help > Set Custom Content Folder
addition, the support files for the Tutorial manual can also command at any time to specify a content folder
be found in the Custom Content folders. location.

Automatic Update Checking

The first time you start Anime Studio, you will be asked if
you want to be notified of automatic updates. The dialog
Choosing a content folder. options are as follows:

The choices are as follows:

• Choose: Select this option to browse to the folder that

you want to use for your Anime Studio content. After
you select/create the folder, choose OK.

• Not Now: Choose this option if you want to set up the

folder at a later time. You will be prompted with this
dialog the next time you start Anime Studio. Software Update dialog

• Never: Choose this option if you do not want to set up

a folder, and no longer want to receive this prompt • Check Automatically: Anime Studio will automatically
when you start Anime Studio. check for software updates upon startup.

Chapter 1: Introduction
10 Anime Studio Pro 10
Users Manual

• Don’t Check: Select this option if you do not want to

be notified of updates. You can update Anime Studio
at any time by choosing the Help > Check for Updates
command.

You can change your update notification

preference at any time in the Options tab of
the Preferences dialog. See “Options Tab” on page
349 for more information.

Chapter 1: Introduction
11 Anime Studio Pro 10
Users Manual

Chapter 2: License 1. General

You agree to use the Software, Documentation and
Anime Studio Pro 10 Content only for lawful purposes. Any use of the Software,
Documentation or Content other than as granted in
this EULA must be by SMSI’s prior written consent. SMSI
End User License Agreement and maintains an ongoing EULA enforcement program.

Limited Warranty Violation of any provision of this EULA automatically

terminates this EULA. SMSI reserves all other rights that it
PLEASE READ THIS END USER LICENSE AGREEMENT (“EULA”) may have for violation of this EULA.
CAREFULLY BEFORE INSTALLING AND USING THE SOFTWARE.
BY CLICKING THE “AGREE” BUTTON WHEN INSTALLING THE
2. Definition
SOFTWARE, YOU ARE AGREEING TO BE BOUND BY THE
TERMS OF THIS EULA. IF YOU DO NOT AGREE TO THE TERMS “Content” means animations, characters, clothing, faces,
OF THIS EULA, CLICK ON THE “DISAGREE” BUTTON. IF YOU hair, geometries, images, documentation, materials,
DO NOT AGREE TO THE TERMS OF THIS EULA, YOU MAY NOT meshes, morphs, motion files, props, scripts, textures, bump
USE OR ACCESS THE SOFTWARE. USING OR ACCESSING maps, transparencies, and similar files and data created or
ANY PART OF THE SOFTWARE INDICATES THAT YOU AGREE modified with the intent of being used within the Software
TO THE TERMS OF THIS EULA. and/or third party applications.
This EULA is between you (both the individual installing the “Documentation” means all written material in any form
Software and any single legal entity on behalf of which for installation and use of the Software provided by or
such individual is acting) (“you” or “your”) and Smith made available by SMSI, or its authorized representatives
Micro Software, Inc. and/or its affiliates (collectively or or agents.
individually, “SMSI”).
“Legitimate Uses” means (a) creating tutorials, books, or
other educational materials using images of the Software
interface or Content for sale, distribution, public display, or

Chapter 2: License
12 Anime Studio Pro 10
Users Manual

public performance, provided such materials are intended Restricted Content may only be used exclusively on one (1)
to educate users as to use of the Software; (b) creating computer.
original Content for sale, distribution, public display, or
“Software” means the SMSI computer software and
public performance; (c) creating materials for use with
associated files (e.g. Content) delivered via the
either Restricted Content or Other Content; (d) creating
accompanying physical media or electronic media.
rendered animations or rendered still images based
“Software” means to also include any upgrades, updates,
on Restricted Content contained with the “Character
bug fixes or modified versions or backup copies of the
Wizard” feature of the Software; or (e) creating characters
Software supplied to you by SMSI or an SMSI authorized
or props based on Restricted Content in proprietary file
representative or agent (whether or not for a fee).
formats (meaning, MOHO, ANME and any subsequent/
“Software” does not include TPS (defined below).
compressed formats), where the original (or modified) art,
texture or other Restricted Content files are not distributed “Unrestricted Content” means Content included with
with such characters or props. or part of the Software that is specifically identified in
the Documentation or listed in this EULA as Unrestricted
“Other Content” means Content that is not Restricted
Content. This version of the Software contains no
Content or Unrestricted Content. Other Content may be
Unrestricted Content.
subject to license terms imposed by the Other Content’s
original creator.
“Restricted Content” means all Content included with
3. Software License
or part of the Software that is not Unrestricted content,
A) Subject to the terms and conditions of this EULA and
including without limitation mesh objects (geometry) in any
your payment of the applicable license fee, SMSI grants
format, files in proprietary file formats (meaning, MOHO,
you a limited, personal, nontransferable and non-exclusive
ANME, and any subsequent/compressed formats), images,
license (without right to sublicense): (i) to use a single
materials, texture, transparency maps, Documentation,
copy of the Software (except as expressly permitted in the
vector-based content, and SMSI’s proprietary data. Except
Documentation) solely for your own internal use on a single
as otherwise expressly permitted by this EULA, Restricted
computer (as set forth in Subsection E below of this Section
Content extracted or exported from the Software remains
3) either loaded in the temporary memory (i.e., RAM) of
Restricted Content. Except as authorized in this EULA,
Chapter 2: License
13 Anime Studio Pro 10
Users Manual

a computer, or installed on the permanent memory of made available to you by SMSI, whether distributed on
a computer (e.g., hard disk and compact disk) or, on a floppy disk, compact disk, or in an electronic format via
temporary basis, on a backup system if such equipment download, BBS, forum, FTP, e-mail, etc.
is inoperative, consistent with the limitations specified or
C) The Software (not including the media on which
referenced in this EULA and the Documentation; (ii) to use
the Software may be provided) is licensed to you,
the Documentation provided with the Software in support
not sold. You expressly acknowledge that SMSI, Lost
of your authorized use of the Software; and (iii) to copy the
Marble, Inc., and/or their respective licensor(s) have a
Software to make one (1) archival copy of the Software
valuable proprietary interest in both the Software and the
for your personal archival or backup purposes, and to
Documentation. All title, ownership, interest and rights in
make sufficient number of copies for Legitimate Uses or the
and to the patent, copyright, trademark, trade secret and
intended use described in the Documentation, provided
any other intellectual property rights in the Software (and
that all titles and trademark, copyright and restricted rights
any derivative works thereof) and the Documentation
notices are reproduced on all such copies. Any other uses
(and any derivative works thereof) not expressly granted
of the Software, including without limitation the Software
to you by this EULA remain with SMSI, Lost Marble, Inc.
interface, other than those granted in this EULA must be
and/or their respective licensor(s). You do not acquire
expressly pre-approved by SMSI in writing. The terms of
any other rights, express or implied, in the Software (and
this EULA will govern any upgrades and updates, unless
any derivative works thereof) and the Documentation
accompanied by a separate license, in which case, the
(and any derivative works thereof) other than those rights
terms of that separate license agreement will govern
expressly granted under this EULA. Without limiting the
accordingly.
generality of the foregoing, SMSI, Lost Marble, Inc. and/or
B) The Software is protected by copyright and other their respective licensor(s) retain all title, ownership, interest
intellectual property laws and international treaties. As an and rights in and to the patent, copyright, trademark,
express condition of this EULA, you must reproduce on the trade secret and any other intellectual property rights
backup copy the SMSI copyright notice in the following in the copy of the Software contained on your archival
format: “Copyright (C) 2004-2014 Smith Micro Software, media, and all of the terms of this EULA apply to such
Inc. All Rights Reserverd.” This express condition extends archival copy as if it were the original SMSI-produced copy
to any further updates, software patches, or bug fixes

Chapter 2: License
14 Anime Studio Pro 10
Users Manual

of the Software that was furnished to you when you paid 4. Restrictions
the licensing fee.
A) You will not, and will not permit any third party to,
D) Portions of the Software include third party software
use, copy, modify, derive, or transfer the Software or
and other copyrighted material (collectively, “TPS”).
Documentation, or any copy, modification, derivation,
Acknowledgements, licensing terms, restrictions and
or merged portion thereof, in whole or in part via any
disclaimers of such TPS are contained in the “About Box” of
means or for any purpose whatsoever except as expressly
the Software and your use of such TPS is governed by such
permitted in this EULA or the Documentation. You will
respective terms. Any terms of this EULA that differs from
not, and will not permit any third party to, modify, adapt,
the terms of any TPS are offered by SMSI alone, and not by
translate, rent, lease, loan, resell for profit, or create
any other licensor.
derivative works based upon the Software or any part
E) Except as otherwise expressly permitted in the thereof. The Software contains trade secrets in its human
Documentation, you will only use the Software on a single readable form and, to protect them, you will not, and will
computer at any given time, meaning that you must treat not permit any third party to, reverse engineer, decompile,
the Software “like a book.” “Like a book” means that the disassemble, or otherwise reduce the Software to any
Software may be used by any number of people and may human readable form without the express prior written
be installed and activated on up to three (3) computers consent of SMSI or except to the extent expressly permitted
so long as no possibility exists of the Software being used at by applicable law. You will not relicense, sublicense,
more than one (1) computer at any given time. More than rent, lease, or lend the Software for third-party training,
one person at a time cannot read the same copy of a commercial time-sharing or service bureau use. You will
book, and this restriction applies to the Software. not, and will not permit any third party to, debug, bypass,
F) The licenses granted in this EULA do not allow you to circumvent or defeat any security features of, or interfere
use the Software on a computer that you do not own or with the normal functionality and operation of the Software
control, and you may not distribute or make the Software for any reason whatsoever without the express prior written
available over a network where it could be used by consent of SMSI or except to the extent expressly permitted
multiple computers or devices at the same time. by applicable law. If the Software is an upgrade to a
previous version of the Software, you must possess and

Chapter 2: License
15 Anime Studio Pro 10
Users Manual

maintain a valid license to such previous version in order to which is intended to compete with the Restricted
use the upgrade. Content.
B) You, your employees, and/or authorized agents must 2) To prepare derivative works based upon the
protect the Software’s confidentiality and act to enforce Restricted Content solely for Legitimate Uses and lawful
your obligations under this EULA. You cannot distribute or uses.
otherwise make the Software or Documentation available
to any third party via any means whatsoever, public 3) To reproduce, prepare derivative works based
or private, for any purpose, commercial or not, unless upon, distribute, publicly display, and publicly perform
explicitly allowed by this EULA. content you create using Restricted Content, provided
that such use of Restricted Content shall be solely for
C) You assume full responsibility for your selection of the
Legitimate Uses and lawful uses.
Software to achieve your intended results and for the
installation, use, and results you obtain from the Software. B) Notwithstanding the foregoing, nothing shall limit SMSI’s
SMSI has no obligation to provide support, maintenance, right to independently create, develop, own, market,
upgrades, modifications or new releases under this EULA. distribute, license, sublicense, import, export, sell, or
otherwise exploit any content or materials similar to any
derivative works based upon the Content.
5. Content License
C) Other Content included with the Software and
A) Subject to the terms and conditions of this EULA and Documentation is subject to third-party rights and
your payment of the license fee, SMSI grants you a limited, is copyrighted and owned by the Other Content’s
personal, nontransferable and non-exclusive license original creator(s). You may use the Other Content in
(without the right to sublicense): accordance with all applicable license terms imposed
by the Other Content’s original creator(s). SMSI makes no
1) To reproduce, prepare derivative works based representations as to the quality, suitability, functionality,
upon, distribute, publicly display and publicly perform or legality of the Other Content and you hereby waive
the Unrestricted Content for any lawful purpose any claim you might have against SMSI with respect to the
other than to create a product which is intended to Other Content.
compete with the Software or to create new content
Chapter 2: License
16 Anime Studio Pro 10
Users Manual

D) You will not, and will not permit any third party to, use, SMSI is pleased to offer site licenses (“Site License”) for
copy, modify, derive, sell, distribute, transfer or sublicense multiple simultaneous users. Please contact SMSI at the
the Restricted Content, the Unrestricted Content, or the address below for details. If you purchased a Site License,
Other Content or any copy, modification, derivation, or you may distribute the Restricted Content between all
portion thereof, in whole or in part via any means or for any computers containing valid copies of the Software, other
purpose whatsoever, except as expressly permitted in this SMSI products, and/or other software able to process
EULA or the Documentation. Restricted Content.
E) You expressly acknowledge that SMSI, Lost Marble,
Inc. and/or their respective licensor(s) have a valuable 6. Collection and Use of Your
proprietary interest in the Restricted Content and the
Information
Unrestricted Content. All title, ownership, interest and
rights in and to the patent, copyright, trademark, trade A) Upon your first installation of the Software, you will have
secret and any other intellectual property rights in the the option to register the Software with SMSI. If you choose
Restricted Content (and any derivative works thereof) to register the Software with SMSI, you agree that SMSI and/
and the Unrestricted Content (and any derivative works or its affiliates may collect and process such information
thereof) not expressly granted to you by this EULA remain about you and the Software in order to enable SMSI to: (i)
with SMSI, Lost Marble, Inc. and their respective licensor(s). notify you of updates, bug fixes and/or modified versions
You do not acquire any other rights, express or implied, in of the Software; (ii) provide support and assistance of the
the Restricted Content (and any derivative works thereof) Software; (iii) notify you of new version offerings of the
and the Unrestricted Content (and any derivative works Software; and (iv) comply with all applicable laws and/or
thereof) other than those rights expressly granted under this regulations, or the requirements of any regulatory authority
EULA. or government agency.
F) Except as otherwise expressly permitted in the B) In addition, upon your first installation of the Software,
Documentation or unless otherwise provided for herein, you will have the option to “opt-in” to participate in SMSI’s
you will only use the Content on up to one (1) computer at efforts to improve the usability, experience, functionality
any given time (the same as the Software license allows), and performance of its products and services. Your
meaning that you must treat the Content “like a book.”
Chapter 2: License
17 Anime Studio Pro 10
Users Manual

participation to allow SMSI to collect such usage statistics SMSI’s and/or its affiliates’to the transfer of such information
is voluntary. And, you may “opt out” at any time. If you to a location outside the EEA.
choose to participate, SMSI may collect and use certain
information related to your use of the Software and
aggegrate such data that includes information about:
7. Term; Termination
(i) your computer, such as Operation System, screen
A) This EULA remains in full force and effect until
resolution, RAM capacity, CPU frequency, number of
terminated. You may terminate this EULA at any time
monitors; (ii) data about the Software, such as abnormal
by returning or destroying both the Software and
terminations, number of runs, program version; and (iii)
Documentation, together with all copies, modifications,
information about separate feature usage, such as menu
and merged portions of the Software and the
options or buttons selected. This data ((i) through (iii)
Documentation in any form. SMSI is in no way obliged to
above) is (I) collected anonymously, unless you opt to
issue refunds. SMSI may terminate this EULA at any time
provide your details (as noted above) and (II) tied up to
upon your breach of any of the provisions hereof.
your personal account through an anonymous unique
identifier (i.e., it will not include any personal identifiable B) Upon termination, you will immediately cease all use of
data (e.g., e-mail address, name, gender, age, home/ the Software, and you must return or destroy the Software,
work address, and telephone number). If you are not Documentation, and all copies, modifications, and
comfortable sharing the foregoing described information merged portions of the Software and the Documentation
in detail, please choose not to participate. in any form and certify in writing your compliance of this
paragraph to SMSI. Termination of this EULA for any reason
C) Any information collected is done and utilized in
in no way limits SMSI’s right to continue enforcing all rights
accordance with SMSI’s Privacy Policy. Your election to
provided by law and does not entitle you to a refund of
use the Software indicates your acceptance of the terms
your license fees, except as provided herein. All provisions
of the SMSI Privacy Policy, so please review the policy
of this EULA that protect SMSI’s proprietary rights continue
carefully and check our website at the following URL to
in full force and effect after termination.
review updates: http://www.smithmicro.com/. Further,
if you are located in the European Economic Area (EEA),
your use of the Software constitutes consent by you to

Chapter 2: License
18 Anime Studio Pro 10
Users Manual

8. Export Law Assurances or refund the purchase price of such Software media.
This limited warranty is offered solely by SMSI and does
Export and re-export of this Software and Documentation not apply to any third party product, software, content
is governed by the laws, restrictions and regulations of or service offerings. THE ABOVE WARRANTIES ON MEDIA
the United States and applicable export and import laws, ARE EXCLUSIVE AND IN LIEU OF ALL OTHER WARRANTIES,
restrictions and regulations of certain other countries EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, AND SMSI EXPRESSLY DISCLAIMS ALL
(collectively, “Export Laws”). You will comply with all such OTHER WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, ANY
Export Laws. Export or re-export of this Software and/or IMPLIED WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY, SATISFACTORY
Documentation (including any direct product thereof) QUALITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, OR NON-
to any entity on the Denied Parties List and other lists INFRINGEMENT.
promulgated by various agencies of the United States
B) TO THE EXTENT NOT PROHIBITED BY APPLICABLE LAW,
Federal Government is strictly prohibited. In addition, if the
THE SOFTWARE, RESTRICTED CONTENT, UNRESTRICTED
Software is identified as an export controlled item under the
CONTENT, AND DOCUMENTATION ARE LICENSED TO YOU
Export Laws, you represent and warrant that you are not
“AS IS” WITH ALL FAULTS, WITHOUT WARRANTY, CONDITION
a citizen of, or located within, an embargoed or otherwise
OR REPRESENTATION, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, OF ANY KIND,
restricted nation (e.g., Iran, Syria, Sudan, Cuba and North
INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION, MERCHANTABILITY,
Korea) and that you are not otherwise prohibited under the
PERFORMANCE, SECURITY, SATISFACTORY QUALITY, NON-
Export Laws from receiving the Software.
INFRINGEMENT OF THIRD PARTY RIGHTS, OR FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
9. Limited Warranty and Disclaimer C) YOU ACKNOWLEDGE THAT THE SOFTWARE MAY NOT
(I) SATISFY ALL YOUR REQUIREMENTS, (II) BE FREE FROM
A) SMSI warrants that any media on which the Software
DEFECTS, OR (III) OPERATE WITHOUT INTERRUPTION OR
may be provided will be free from defects in materials and
ERRORS. IN ADDITION, DUE TO CONTINUAL DEVELOPMENT
workmanship under normal use for a period of ninety (90)
OF NEW TECHNIQUES FOR INTRUDING UPON AND
days from the date of original purchase. Your exclusive
ATTACKING NETWORKS, SMSI DOES NOT WARRANT THAT THE
remedy and SMSI’s entire liability under this limited warranty
SOFTWARE WILL BE FREE OF VULNERABILITY TO INTRUSION
will be for SMSI, at its option, to replace the Software media
OR ATTACK.
Chapter 2: License
19 Anime Studio Pro 10
Users Manual

D) THE FOREGOING LIMITED WARRANTY IS NEITHER A REGARDLESS OF THE BASIS OF THE CLAIM, EVEN IF SMSI HAS
SERVICE NOR A SUPPORT CONTRACT. NO ORAL OR BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES OR
WRITTEN INFORMATION OR ADVICE GIVEN BY SMSI, ITS FOR ANY CLAIM BY ANY OTHER PARTY. IN NO EVENT WILL
EMPLOYEES, DISTRIBUTORS, DEALERS, REPRESENTATIVES SMSI’S AGGREGATE LIABILITY (OR THAT OF ITS DEVELOPERS,
OR AGENTS SHALL INCREASE THE SCOPE OF THE ABOVE SUPPLIERS, DIRECTORS, OFFICERS, EMPLOYEES, OR
WARRANTIES OR CREATE ANY NEW WARRANTIES. YOU SUBSIDIARIES OR AFFILIATES), UNDER OR IN CONNECTION
MAY HAVE ADDITIONAL WARRANTY RIGHTS UNDER LAW WITH THIS EULA, EXCEED THE AMOUNT PAID BY YOU FOR
WHICH MAY NOT BE WAIVED OR DISCLAIMED. SMSI DOES THE SOFTWARE, IF ANY. THIS LIMITATION WILL APPLY EVEN IN
NOT SEEK TO LIMIT YOUR WARRANTY RIGHTS TO ANY EXTENT THE EVENT OF A FUNDAMENTAL OR MATERIAL BREACH OR
NOT PERMITTED BY LAW. This Section 9 and Section 10, A BREACH OF THE FUNDAMENTAL OR MATERIAL TERMS OF
below, shall survive any termination of this EULA, howsoever THIS EULA.
caused, but this will not imply or create any continued right
B) The above limitations will apply even if any warranty
to use the Software after termination of this EULA.
or remedy provided under this EULA fails of its essential
purpose. The above limitations will not apply in case of
10. Disclaimer of Liabilities personal injury (including death) only where and to the
extent that applicable law requires such liability. Because
A) EXCEPT FOR THE EXCLUSIVE REMEDY OFFERED BY SMSI some jurisdictions do not allow the exclusion or limitation
ABOVE AND REMEDIES THAT CANNOT BE EXCLUDED OR of implied warranties or liabilities for consequential or
LIMITED BY APPLICABLE LAW, IN NO EVENT WILL SMSI incidental damages, the above limitations may not apply
OR ITS DEVELOPERS, SUPPLIERS, DIRECTORS, OFFICERS, to you.
EMPLOYEES, OR SUBSIDIARIES OR AFFILIATES BE LIABLE TO
YOU FOR ANY CONSEQUENTIAL, INCIDENTAL OR INDIRECT
DAMAGES (INCLUDING DAMAGES FOR LOSS OF BUSINESS
11. Indemnification
PROFIT, BUSINESS INTERRUPTION, LOSS OF DATA AND/
You will indemnify and hold harmless, and at SMSI’s request
OR BUSINESS INFORMATION, AND THE LIKE), WHETHER
defend, SMSI and its affiliates, successors and assigns
FORESEEABLE OR UNFORESEEABLE, ARISING OUT OF THE USE
from and against any and all claims, losses, liabilities,
OR INABILITY TO USE THE SOFTWARE OR DOCUMENTATION,
damages, settlements, expenses and costs (including,
Chapter 2: License
20 Anime Studio Pro 10
Users Manual

without limitation, attorneys’ fees and court costs) which Exclusive jurisdiction over and venue of any suit arising out
arise out of or relate to any third party claim or threat of or relating to this EULA will be in the state and federal
thereof that your use of the Software, Documentation or courts of Orange County, California. If for any reason
Content is unlawful or not otherwise permitted by this EULA. a court of competent jurisdiction finds any provision,
SMSI reserves the right, at its own expense, to assume the or portion thereof, to be invalid or unenforceable, the
exclusive defense and control of any matter otherwise remainder of this EULA shall continue in full force and
subject to indemnification hereunder. effect. The waiver by either party of any default or breach
of this EULA will not constitute a waiver of any other or
subsequent default or breach. You may not assign,
12. U.S. Government Restricted Rights sell, transfer, delegate or otherwise dispose of, whether
voluntarily or involuntarily, by operation of law or otherwise,
The Software and Documentation are provided with
this EULA or any rights or obligations under this EULA without
RESTRICTED RIGHTS. The use, duplication, or disclosure by
SMSI’s prior written consent. Any purported assignment,
the United States Government is subject to restrictions as
transfer or delegation by you will be null and void. This
set forth in subparagraph (c)(1)(ii) of the Rights in Technical
EULA constitutes the entire agreement between the parties
Data and Computer Software Clause at DFARS 252.227-
and supersedes all prior or contemporaneous agreements
7013 or subparagraph (c)(1) and (2) of the Commercial
or representations, written or oral, concerning the subject
Computer Software Restricted Rights at 48 CFR 52.227-19,
matter of this EULA.
as applicable. The Manufacturer is Smith Micro Software,
Inc., 51 Columbia, Aliso Viejo, CA 92656 USA.
14. Other Services and Materials
13. Applicable Law This Software may enable access to SMSI and/or third
party services and websites (individually and collectively
This EULA shall be governed by the laws of the State of
referred to as “Services”). This EULA does not apply to any
California, without giving effect to any choice of law
Services. You acknowledge and agree that nothing in this
principles. This EULA will not be governed by the United
EULA guarantees availability or continued availability or
Nations Convention on Contracts for the International Sales
uptime of any Services. SMSI has no control over any third
of Goods, the application of which is expressly excluded.
Chapter 2: License
21 Anime Studio Pro 10
Users Manual

party Services. Any terms, conditions, privacy policies, 15. Contact Information
warranties, or representations associated with any third
party Services are solely between you and such third party. If you have questions concerning this EULA or need to
SMSI makes no representations or warranties as to the contact Customer Service, please contact SMSI at this
quality, suitability, functionality, or legality of any third party address: Smith Micro Software, Inc., 185 Westridge Drive,
Services, and You hereby waive any claim you might have Watsonville, CA 95076 USA (831) 761-6200 phone, (831) 761-
against SMSI regarding any use of any third party Services. 6206 fax; Customer Service (returns, warranty): service@
smithmicro.com; and Legal (EULA questions, illegal activity
You understand that by using any of the Services, You
reporting): [email protected].
may encounter content that may be deemed offensive,
indecent, or objectionable, which content may or may
not be identified as having explicit language, and that 16. Copyright & Trademark Notice
the results of any search or entering of a particular URL
may automatically and unintentionally generate links or Smith Micro Software, Anime Studio, Anime Studio Debut
references to objectionable material. In addition, you and Anime Studio Pro are trademarks of Smith Micro
agree not to use the Software to create content that may Software, Inc. Lost Marble and Moho are trademarks of
be deemed offensive, indecent, or objectionable; hateful, Lost Marble, Inc. All other product names mentioned in
threatening, or pornographic; incites violence; or contains the Software, the Documentation, or other documentation
nudity or graphic or gratuitous violence. Nevertheless, you are used for identification purposes only and may be
agree to use the Services at your sole risk and that the SMSI trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective
shall not have any liability to you for content that may be companies. Registered and unregistered trademarks
found to be offensive, indecent, or objectionable; hateful used herein are the exclusive property of their respective
threatening or pornographic; incites violence; or contains owners. For purposes of Japan law regarding unregistered
nudity or graphic or gratuitous violence. trademarks (e.g., a pending trademark application), the
right in and to a trademark in Japan may not be exclusive
until it is validly registered. You may not remove, modify,
alter, cover or deface any trademark, trade names,
product names, logo, copyright or other proprietary

Chapter 2: License
22 Anime Studio Pro 10
Users Manual

notices, legends, symbols or labels in the Software and

Documentation. This EULA does not authorize you to use
SMSI’s or its licensors’ names or respective trademarks.
Further, any reference to any third party commercial
products, processes or services by trade name,
trademark, logo, and company and/or product/service
names mentioned or displayed in the Software (and in
any of its related Documentation and materials in any
form) does not constitute or imply SMSI’s endorsement,
recommendation or favoring by SMSI or any of its suppliers/
licensors.
Version: 20140129-AnimeStudio/AnimeStudio

Chapter 2: License
23 Anime Studio Pro 10
Users Manual

Anime Studio
Tools

Chapter 2: License
24 Anime Studio Pro 10
Users Manual

Chapter 3: The Draw Click the tool icon in the properties bar to
display a submenu. Choose Reset Tool to

Tools reset the current tool to its default settings. Choose

Reset All Tools to reset all tools to their default
settings.
Draw tools are used to draw and modify vector artwork.
The following tools are available when you’re working with
a vector layer. Most of these tools are used by selecting
them from the toolbar then clicking and dragging in the
working area of the main window - a few are used simply
by clicking on them, and this is noted below. If you hold the
mouse over a tool, a tooltip will appear with the name of
the tool if you need a quick reminder. Also, most tools have Reset tool options.
a shortcut key that can be used to activate them. If a tool
has such a shortcut, this will show up in the tooltip as well.
When drawing with the draw tools, you can manually
If a tool has the following symbol next to it: , then it can choose to use legacy curves (such as those used in Anime
be used for animation - using the tool at different frames Studio 6 and earlier) in the Layer Settings dialog. Select the
in the timeline will cause the object you adjust to change layer you want to change in the Layers window, and open
over time. the Layer Settings dialog to the Vectors tab. Check the
Legacy Curves option to use the old method of rendering
Anime Studio has a smart tool palette, which curves.
shows and hides tools based on their need.
The position of the tool shown in the screenshots may
differ, depending on the selected layer in the Layers
palette, and the current time in the timeline.

Chapter 3: The Draw Tools

25 Anime Studio Pro 10
Users Manual

Normal curves (left) vs Legacy curves (right).

Select Points
Shortcut: G

You can choose legacy curves for compatibility with older

scenes created in Anime Studio 6 and earlier.

Select Points

Chapter 3: The Draw Tools

26 Anime Studio Pro 10
Users Manual

Using the Select Points Tool

Many of the following tools work only on the currently
selected points. This is the tool you use to select/de-select
Select Points options
points. This tool can be used in a few different ways.
The most basic way to select points is to drag a rectangle
around them. Also, using this tool you can click on a single
Select Points Tool Options
point to select it. The third method of selection is to click
on a curve to select the entire curve. Finally, clicking on
• Select Group: Used to select a group that was
a filled-in area will select an entire object. Each of these
previously created with the Select Points tool.
selection methods is illustrated below:
• Text Field: Assigns a name to the currently selected
group of points.

• Create: Creates a group from the selected points.

• Delete: Deletes the currently selected group from the

selection list.

• Lasso Mode: When checked, allows you to draw a

lasso around the points you want to select. When
unchecked, selects a rectangular area.

• Flip Horizontally: Click this button to flip horizontally.

• Flip Vertically: Click this button to flip vertically.

Chapter 3: The Draw Tools

27 Anime Studio Pro 10
Users Manual

Different methods of point selection (SWF file)

Modifier keys:
Selection methods
By holding the Shift key, you can add to a selection.
Below is a short movie clip showing the different ways to Otherwise, you will always start a new selection when using
select points using the Select Points tool. this tool.

• Holding the Alt key will prevent this tool from selecting
curves or shapes when you click on them (sometimes
when things get crowded it’s hard not to click on a
shape by accident).

Chapter 3: The Draw Tools

28 Anime Studio Pro 10
Users Manual

• If you hold down the Ctrl key (Windows) or Cmd key

(Mac), this tool will work in lasso style. (You can also
activate lasso style selection by turning on Lasso mode
in the tool options area.)
The selection commands in the Edit menu are also very
useful for managing selections. These are described in
“Chapter 19: Edit Menu” on page 347.
The currently selected points may be deleted by pressing
the Delete or Backspace keys.
Transform Points

Transform Points
Shortcut: T General Options
The Transform Points tool is used to move, scale, or
The following options appear in the left portion of the
rotate a group of selected points. It operates only on
options toolbar when the Transform Points tool is selected:
the currently selected points, unless fewer than two points
are selected - then it operates on the nearest point to
where you clicked.
It’s important to note that this tool, like most of the Anime
Transform Tool general options
Studio drawing tools, modifies points, not curves. If you
select all the points in an object and use this tool, the entire
object will move, scale, or rotate. However, if you only • Select Group: Used to select a group that was
select some of the points, then you’ll end up distorting the previously created with the Select Points tool.
object (which can be very useful).

Chapter 3: The Draw Tools

29 Anime Studio Pro 10
Users Manual

• Reset: If pressed at Frame 0, resets a layer back to its

default value. If pressed at any other frame, resets the
layer to the value or values set at frame 0.
The following options appear in the right portion of the
Transform Points options for translating
options toolbar when the Transform Points tool is selected:

• Position X: Allows you to numerically enter a value for

the X coordinate.

Transform Tool general options • Position Y: Allows you to numerically enter a value for
the Y coordinate.
• Auto Weld: When checked, automatically welds a In the pictures below, the selected points are highlighted in
new point to an existing point. The existing point is red. Notice the effect of using the Transform Points tool on
highlighted when the mouse hovers over a point that these points.
can be welded.
• To constrain vertically or horizontally: Hold the Shift key
• Auto Fill: When checked, automatically fills a closed while dragging the selected points left, right, up, or
shape when you create it. down.

• Flip Horizontally: Click this button to flip horizontally. • To nudge: You can nudge the selected point(s)
by small increments by holding down the Ctrl key
• Flip Vertically: Click this button to flip vertically. (Windows) or Cmd key (Mac) and pressing the arrow
keys. Hold down Shift in addition to Ctrl/Cmd to nudge
Translating Points the point(s) by a greater increment.

The following toolbar options are associated with

translating points:

Chapter 3: The Draw Tools

30 Anime Studio Pro 10
Users Manual

Top circle fully selected. Bottom circle partially selected After translation

• To weld points: The steps differ depending on whether

the Auto Weld option in the toolbar is enabled or
disabled:

ƒƒ When Auto Weld is off: To weld two points together,

use the Transform Points tool to drag one point on
top of another (you must drag just one point to
weld, not a group of points). While dragging the
Chapter 3: The Draw Tools
31 Anime Studio Pro 10
Users Manual

first point on top of the second, press the spacebar Scaling Points
to weld them together into one point.
The Transform Points tool also allows you to scale the
ƒƒ When Auto Weld is on: Anime Studio can
currently selected group of points. Two or more points must
automatically weld points for you. Only the
be selected. The following toolbar options are associated
endpoint of a curve can be automatically welded.
with scaling points:
To automatically weld the endpoint of a curve,
just drag it on top of another point and let go of
the mouse. Below is a movie demonstrating auto-
welding. After dragging each endpoint into place,
it becomes welded to the existing point, and the
two can be moved around Transform Points options for scaling

• Scale X: Allows you to enter a numeric value for

scaling along the X axis.

• Scale Y: Allows you to enter a numeric value for scaling

along the Y axis.

• Apply: Click to apply the values entered in the Scale X

and Scale Y fields
When this tool is active, a red box will appear around the
currently selected group of points. The handles around
the edges of this box allow you to resize the points. Drag
a corner handle in and out to scale the points while
Using Transform Points and auto-weld (SWF file) maintaining their proportions. Drag one of the side handles
to change the horizontal scale, or the top or bottom
handle to change the vertical scale.
Chapter 3: The Draw Tools
32 Anime Studio Pro 10
Users Manual

If you hold the Alt key while dragging a side handle, using the Transform Points tool will constrain the rotation to
Anime Studio will resize the selected points in such a way 45 degree increments.
to maintain the overall volume of the object - this can be
useful for squash and stretch.
Add Point
Rotating Points Shortcut: A
The Add Point tool is what you use to draw most curves in
The Transform Points tool can also rotate the currently
Anime Studio. Just click and drag in the working area of
selected group of points. Two or more points must be
the main window to create a new curve segment. There
selected to use this tool. The following toolbar options are
are four variations to using the Add Point tool - they differ in
associated with rotating the selected points:
where the original click takes place.

Transform Points options for rotating.

• Rotation: Allows you to enter a numerical value for

rotation.

• Apply: Click to apply the value entered in the Rotation Add Point
field
Click near the outer boundary of the selected group The first way to use this tool is to click in empty space and
of points. Next, drag the mouse in a circle around the drag - this will start a new curve.
selection to rotate the points. Holding the Shift key while

Chapter 3: The Draw Tools

33 Anime Studio Pro 10
Users Manual

The second technique is to click on the end of an existing The Add Point tool can also be used to weld two points.
curve to add another segment to that curve. Click and drag in one of the ways described above to add
a new point.
Third, click on a curve segment to add a point there, then
drag it to the final desired position. Drag the new point on top of an existing point. If Auto
Weld is enabled the new point will weld to the existing
Finally, click on a curve midpoint to add a new branching
point. If Auto Weld is off, press the spacebar before
curve that is welded to the existing point. Each of these
releasing the mouse. An example is shown below. (This
uses of the Add Point tool is shown below.
works just like the Transform Points tool, above. Read about
that tool for more details on welding.)

Uses of the Add Point tool

Closing a curve

Chapter 3: The Draw Tools

34 Anime Studio Pro 10
Users Manual

To prevent the Add Point tool from adding on to an existing Add Point Tool Options
curve regardless of where you click, hold the Alt key to
force the tool to start a new line segment.
The movie below demonstrates the Add Point tool. Notice
how clicking on different parts of an existing curve causes
the new point to be added in different ways. Add Point Options

• Select Group: Used to select a group that was

previously created with the Select Points tool.

• Auto Weld: When checked, automatically welds a

new point to an existing point. The existing point is
highlighted when the mouse hovers over a point that
can be welded.

• Auto Fill: When checked, automatically fills a closed

shape when you create it.

• Sharp corners: When checked, creates sharp corners

Using the Add Point tool (SWF file) when changing the angle of a line. When unchecked,
creates smooth transitions when changing the angle

• If you hold down the Command key (Mac) or

Ctrl key (Windows) while you add a new point, it
will reverse the Sharp Corners option that you have
selected in the Options toolbar. This allows you to

Chapter 3: The Draw Tools

35 Anime Studio Pro 10
Users Manual

change between peaked and smoothed points Curvature Tool Options

without interrupting your workflow.

Curvature
Shortcut: C Curvature Options

This tool works on the currently selected points, or on

the nearest point if less than two points are selected. • Select Group: Used to select a group that was
It adjusts the level of smoothness of the curves passing previously created with the Select Points tool.
through the selected points. Drag to the left to make the
curves less smooth, and drag to the right to make the • Peak: Creates a peaked (or hard) transition between
curves rounder. the curves at the point that you click.

• Smooth: Smooths the transition between the curves at

the point that you click.

Freehand
Shortcut: F
The Freehand tool lets you draw complex shapes by just
dragging the mouse around. After using the Freehand
Curvature
tool, you will often want to go back and use the Delete
Edge tool to delete unwanted lines. You can also use
the Transform Points tool to modify the result, delete
unnecessary points, and weld points together. If you have
a drawing tablet, the Freehand tool can also use the pen
Chapter 3: The Draw Tools
36 Anime Studio Pro 10
Users Manual

pressure from your tablet to control the thickness of the

lines you draw.
The Freehand tool has been enhanced, such that you
don’t have to draw shapes precisely while using the tool.
If you cross a line, the new line automatically welds to the
line that is crossed if the Auto Weld option is selected. This
allows you to quickly sketch out shapes without worrying
about stopping your stroke at precise locations. Later,
you can use the Delete Edge tool to remove the hanging
edges. For more information about the Delete Edge tool,
Freehand
see “Delete Edge” on page 41.
When you’re using the Freehand tool, you are primarily
interested in seeing an accurate display of what you are
drawing. For this reason, control points are automatically
Freehand Tool Options
hidden when Freehand tool is selected so that you can
focus on your drawing. You’ll also see a more accurate
preview of the strokes that you draw, especially when
drawing wider strokes. When you release the mouse,
Freehand Options
you’ll notice the strokes change slightly due to automatic
smoothing.
The Freehand tool has been improved to give
To display the control points, select one of the much smoother looking curves. As you draw
other tools, such as the Transform Points tool, with the Freehand tool it looks like you are creating a
lot of points, but as you let go it only keeps the points
that are necessary to represent the curve smoothly.

Chapter 3: The Draw Tools

37 Anime Studio Pro 10
Users Manual

You don’t have to be concerned with ƒƒ Taper Start: When checked, tapers the start of
ending a line exactly on a point, or using the the line. Enter the starting width of the line in the
Transform Points tool to weld points together. field provided. The taper will be applied after you
Instead, sketch as you normally would sketch with a release the mouse.
pencil. Any lines that cross will automatically weld
ƒƒ Taper End: When checked, tapers the end of
together, easily allowing you to create closed
the line. Enter the ending width of the line in the
shapes. You can then use the Delete Edge tool to
field provided. The taper will be applied after you
delete the unwanted straggling ends that cross the
release the mouse.
lines you want to weld. This allows you to create
closed shapes quite easily that you can fill later. ƒƒ Reset: If pressed at Frame 0, resets a layer back
to its default value. If pressed at any other frame,
Click the Freehand Options button in the Options toolbar resets the layer to the value or values set at frame
to display the Freehand Tool options dialog. The options 0.
are as follows:

• Freehand Options: Click this button to display the

following options

ƒƒ Variable line width: When set to None, does not

vary line width between the start and end of the
line. You can also vary line width based on pen
pressure when using a pen tablet, or randomly.
The line width will vary between the minimum and
maximum width settings that you specify.

ƒƒ Width Variation: Controls the amount of difference

between the narrowest part of the stroke and the
widest part of the stroke.

Chapter 3: The Draw Tools

38 Anime Studio Pro 10
Users Manual

• Auto Fill: When checked, automatically fills a closed

shape when you create it.

• Auto-stroke: When checked, automatically creates a

stroke around the shape that you create. Uncheck this
option to create a shape that has no outline.

• Auto close: When unchecked, closes a shape when

the cursor is released over the beginning of the shape.
When checked, connects the shape from the current
position to the start point when you release the mouse
button.

Draw Shape
Shortcut: E
The Draw Shape Tool provides a way to quickly draw
Freehand options commonly used shapes: squares, ovals/circles, triangles,
stars, arrows, and spirals. Each of the shape options are
• Auto Weld: When checked, automatically welds a shown later in this section.
new point to an existing point. The existing point is
highlighted when the mouse hovers over a point that
can be welded. When you draw two lines that cross,
the point at which they cross will automatically be
welded together when this option is on.

Chapter 3: The Draw Tools

39 Anime Studio Pro 10
Users Manual

Rectangle

Rectangle

The Rectangle tool is a shortcut for creating a rectangular

shape. Just click and drag to draw a rectangle. Hold the
Draw Shape Shift key to constrain the shape to a square. Hold the Alt
key to make the click point the center of the rectangle,
instead of one of its corners. There’s nothing special about
rectangles created with this tool - they’re just four points
Draw Shape Tool Options and four curve segments and can be manipulated just
like anything else. You could create the same shape with
the Add Point tool, but for a simple rectangle, this tool is
quicker.

Draw Shape Options

Oval
• Auto Fill: When checked, automatically fills a closed
shape when you create it.

• Auto-stroke: When checked, automatically creates a

stroke around the shape that you create. Uncheck this Oval
option to create a shape that has no outline.

Chapter 3: The Draw Tools

40 Anime Studio Pro 10
Users Manual

The Oval tool is a shortcut for creating an oval shape. The Stars tool is a shortcut for creating a star shape. Just
Just click and drag to draw an oval. Hold the Shift key to click and drag to draw a star. The star will be drawn from
constrain the shape to a circle. Hold the Alt key to make the upper point of the star, and all five points of the star will
the click point the center of the circle. There’s nothing be equal in size.
special about ovals created with this tool - they’re just four
points and four curve segments and can be manipulated
just like anything else. You could create the same shape
Arrow
with the Add Point tool, but for a simple oval, this tool is
quicker.

Triangles
Arrow

Click and drag to draw an arrow shape. Press the Shift key
to constrain the arrow to a horizontal or vertical line.

Triangles
Spirals
The Triangle tool is a shortcut for creating a triangle shape.
Just click and drag to draw a triangle. Hold the Shift key to
constrain the shape to an equilateral triangle.
Stars
Spirals

Click and drag to draw a spiral shape. The number of

windings increase as you drag outward. By default the
Stars
Chapter 3: The Draw Tools
41 Anime Studio Pro 10
Users Manual

spiral radiates in a clockwise direction from the center. The Delete Edge tool is also useful when used
Press the Alt key to create a counter-clockwise spiral. in conjunction with the Freehand tool. Due to
the improved welding capabilities of the Freehand
tool, you can freely sketch a character without
Delete Edge having to worry about exact placement of lines.
Any lines that cross will be welded together. You
Shortcut: D can then use the Delete Edge tool to remove
It’s easy to delete points - just select them and press unwanted straggling ends, simply by clicking on
backspace or delete. However, sometimes you may want them with the Delete Edge tool.
keep two points, but break the curve connecting them. To
do this, use the Delete Edge tool. Just use it to click on the
curve segment you want to delete and it will disappear.
You can use the Delete Edge tool to delete unwanted
lines. For example, you can use the Freehand tool to
quickly sketch out shapes, and the Freehand tool will
automatically weld crossed lines together as you draw.
You can then later clean up the shapes by deleting
unwanted hanging lines with the Delete Edge tool.

If the edge you delete makes up part of the Delete Edge

outline of a fill shape, that shape will also be
deleted.

Magnet
Shortcut: X

Chapter 3: The Draw Tools

42 Anime Studio Pro 10
Users Manual

The Magnet tool is similar to the Transform Points tool

- it is used to move points around. However, instead
of moving the selected points, it moves points based on
the strength of the magnet. When you click with this tool,
the region of strength is displayed. Any points within this Magnet Options
region will move with your mouse, but the points closer to
the center of the mouse click will move the most. (The
radius of the magnet’s strength region can be adjusted in
the tool options area.)
Magnet Tool Options
This tool is most useful for artwork that has lots of points. For • Magnet Radius: Sets the radius of the magnet.
example, the Freehand tool can create curves with many
points - the Magnet tool can then move them around
smoothly. Imported Adobe Illustrator files and text objects Blob Brush
can also be sources of many control points.
The Blob Brush tool allows you to block shapes out very
quickly. For example, you can start by blocking in part of
the character as shown below.

Magnet

Chapter 3: The Draw Tools

43 Anime Studio Pro 10
Users Manual

The first pass of the Blob Brush Tool Additional passes of the Blob Brush Tool add to the previous
shape.
You can add additional strokes to refine or add to the
shape. In the following example, additional strokes with You’ll get an accurate preview of the shape as you draw.
different brush sizes add legs and arms to the previous When you release the mouse, a vector outline will be
shape. generated for the shape. When you choose this tool, a red
circle gives you a preview of the brush size.
The following keyboard shortcuts can be used with the
Blob Brush tool:

• You can adjust the size of the brush by using the Brush
Radius setting in the tool options area, or by pressing
the Alt key and dragging to resize the brush.

Chapter 3: The Draw Tools

44 Anime Studio Pro 10
Users Manual

• If you hold down the Command/Ctrl key you can erase Blob Brush Tool Options
from the shape, or use the Eraser tool. See “Eraser” on
page 44 for more information.
• Brush Radius: Sets the radius of the brush. A red circle
gives you a preview of the brush size. You can also
• The brush tool can create a lot of extra points.
adjust the radius by pressing the Alt key and moving
You can use the new Point Reduction Tool to
your mouse left or right.
reduce the number of points. See “Point Reduction”
on page 46 for more information.
• Use Pen Pressure: Check this option if you are using the
brush with a pressure-sensitive stylus and tablet.
You might notice the viewport jump at times
when using the Blob Brush tool. This happens
when you extend your drawing outside the
boundary of the work area. The viewport resizes to
bring that additional area into view to ensure that Brush Options
the object that you drew will fit on the screen.

Eraser
The Eraser tool allows you to cut holes in any shape. Simply
select the shape that you want to modify with the Select
Shape tool (described in “Select Shape” on page 52).
Then, switch to the Eraser tool to erase portions of the
selected shape.
In the following example, the Eraser Tool is used to modify
the shape of an animal’s tail.
Blob Brush

Chapter 3: The Draw Tools

45 Anime Studio Pro 10
Users Manual

Delete Edge

Eraser Tool Options

• Eraser Radius: Sets the radius of the eraser. You can

also adjust the radius of the brush by pressing the Alt
key and moving your mouse left or right.
The Eraser Tool is used to modify the shape of an animal’s tail.
Before (top) and after (bottom) • Use Pen Pressure: Check this option if you are using the
eraser with a pressure-sensitive stylus and tablet.
You might notice the viewport jump at times
when using the Eraser tool. This happens
when you extend your drawing outside the
boundary of the work area. The viewport resizes to Eraser Options
bring that additional area into view to ensure that
the object that you drew will fit on the screen.
Chapter 3: The Draw Tools
46 Anime Studio Pro 10
Users Manual

Point Reduction
The Blob Brush, Eraser, and Paint Bucket tools can
generate a lot of extra and unnecessary points. The Point
Reduction tool helps you reduce the point count in any
vector object so that the shapes are easier to animate.

Delete Edge

When the Point Reduction tool is selected, the red circle

gives you a preview of the brush size. You can set the
Before (top) and after (bottom) Point Reduction
radius in the options toolbar, or press the Alt key while
dragging to resize the brush.
To use the tool, simply paint along the area where you
want to reduce the number of points. As you paint, the
Point Reduction Tool Options
brush will leave a trail behind where you have painted. The
areas that you paint over will be simplified. • Brush Radius: Sets the radius of the brush.

Chapter 3: The Draw Tools

47 Anime Studio Pro 10
Users Manual

• Tolerance Angle: If you want to reduce the number 3. Set other options in the Scatter Brush Options panel
of points but not change the shape so much, reduce if you want to increase or decrease variation in
the tolerance angle. Lowering the tolerance angle will the angle, spacing, or color of the objects you are
not remove as many points, but it will keep the shape spraying.
closer to what you originally drew.

Point Reduction Options

Scatter Brush
Scatter Brush
The Scatter Brush allows you to spray shapes into your
scene. There are a number of preset shapes, or you can
also copy any shape to your clipboard and spray multiple
copies of that shape into your scene. Scatter Brush Tool Options
To use the Scatter Brush tool, try the following:
Copy a vector object into your clipboard, or select one of
the preset options from the Preset menu.
Scatter Brush Options
1. Choose the vector layer that you want to paint into.

2. Set the Min and Max Width settings appropriately for • Scatter Brush Options: Click this button to display the
the scale of the objects. following options

Chapter 3: The Draw Tools

48 Anime Studio Pro 10
Users Manual

ƒƒ Angle Jitter: Specifies the maximum amount of

angle variation in the objects that you spray.
Perspective Points
ƒƒ Spacing: Specifies the minimum amount of space Click and drag side-to-side to add horizontal
between the objects that you spray. perspective to the selected group of points. Click
and drag up and down to add vertical perspective to the
ƒƒ Color Jitter: Specifies the maximum amount of selected group of points.
color variation for the objects that you spray.
Although Anime Studio is not a 3D program, the effect of
ƒƒ Flip X: Check this option to flip the objects being this tool is similar to rotating the points around a vertical
sprayed along the X axis. pivot, so that one half of the group rotates into the screen
and the other half out of the screen. If you want to do a
ƒƒ Flip Y: Check this option to flip the objects being
true 3D rotation, you should use the Rotate Layer Y tool to
sprayed along the Y axis.
apply true 3D perspective to a layer.
• Preset Menu: Click the Preset menu to choose from
a number of different presets that you can spray into
your scene. If you choose Use Clipboard, the Scatter
Brush tool sprays the contents of your clipboard into the
scene.

• Min Width and Max Width: Sets the minimum and

maximum width of the objects that you spray. If you
want all of the objects to be the same size, set both
values the same. Higher values create larger objects.
Perspective Points

Chapter 3: The Draw Tools

49 Anime Studio Pro 10
Users Manual

Perspective Points Tool Options

Perspective Points Options

• Select Group: Used to select a group that was

previously created with the Select Points tool.
Shear Points
• Reset: If pressed at Frame 0, resets a layer back to its
default value. If pressed at any other frame, resets the
layer to the value or values set at frame 0. Shear Points Tool Options

Shear Points
This tool works on a group of two or more selected
points. Click and drag left, right, up, or down to
Shear Points Options
shear, or slant the group of points.

• Select Group: Used to select a group that was

previously created with the Select Points tool.

• Reset: If pressed at Frame 0, resets a layer back to its

default value. If pressed at any other frame, resets the
layer to the value or values set at frame 0.
Chapter 3: The Draw Tools
50 Anime Studio Pro 10
Users Manual

Bend Points Tool Options

To use the Bend Points tool, drag your mouse up and
down to bend the selected group of points up and
down. For best results, the selected group of points should
be wider than it is tall.
Bend Points Options
Drag your mouse side to side to bend the selected group
of points side to side. For best results, the selected group of
points should be taller than it is wide. • Select Group: Used to select a group that was
previously created with the Select Points tool.

• Reset: If pressed at Frame 0, resets a layer back to its

default value. If pressed at any other frame, resets the
layer to the value or values set at frame 0:

Noise
Shortcut: N

Bend Points The Noise tool works on a group of selected points. Click
and drag to move the points around in random directions.
This tool can be used for example when you want to
duplicate an object using Copy and Paste, but you don’t
want the new object to look exactly like the original. Just
use this tool to distort it a little bit.

Chapter 3: The Draw Tools

51 Anime Studio Pro 10
Users Manual

Noise

Tool Options

Noise Options

• Select Group: Used to select a group that was

previously created with the Select Points tool.

• Reset: If pressed at Frame 0, resets a layer back to its

default value. If pressed at any other frame, resets the
layer to the value or values set at frame 0.

Chapter 3: The Draw Tools

52 Anime Studio Pro 10
Users Manual

Chapter 4: Fill Tools

Using the Fill tools for vector layers, you take the drawings
you created with the Draw tools, and you tell Anime Studio
which areas should be filled with color, where outlines
should be placed, and what fill and line styles to use.
Reset tool options.
The drawings created with Draw tools are only guides. As
far as Anime Studio is concerned, they’re invisible and they
won’t show up in the final rendered output. That’s where Fill
tools come in. Draw tools define the shape of objects, while Select Shape
Fill tools define the appearance of those objects. Of course,
you’re always free to switch back and forth between any Shortcut: Q
of Anime Studio’s editing tools at any time. This tool is used to select one or more existing shapes (fills or
outlines).
Anime Studio has a smart tool palette, which
shows and hides tools based on their need. To select a shape, just click on the desired shape and it will
The position of the tool shown in the screenshots may be selected.
differ, depending on the selected layer in the Layers
• To select additional shapes, press the Shift key while
palette, and the current time in the timeline.
you click and drag the mouse over each additional
shape to add to the selection.
Click the tool icon in the properties bar to
display a submenu. Choose Reset Tool to • To deselect a shape, press the Alt key while you click
reset the current tool to its default settings. Choose the shape(s) you want to remove from the selection.
Reset All Tools to reset all tools to their default After your shape or shapes are selected, you can press the
settings. Delete or Backspace keys to delete the shapes, or adjust

Chapter 4: Fill Tools

53 Anime Studio Pro 10
Users Manual

their properties in the Style Window (see “Chapter 13:

Style Window” on page 210). Options also appear in the
properties bar to change the color of the fill or stroke in the
selected shapes.
After clicking on a shape to select it, you then have the
option to select shapes lower in the stacking order. Just
hold down the Ctrl key (Windows) or Cmd key (Mac) and
press the down arrow key to select the next shape lower
down at the point you clicked the mouse. Hold Ctrl/Cmd
and press the up arrow key to select the next shape higher
in the stacking order at that same point.
When you change the properties of multiple selected
shapes, the changes that you make will be applied to all
Four different layers, each with objects that have different
selected shapes. For example, you can select shapes that
shape properties.
have different color fills, and then change the fill color in
the style window so that all of the shapes are filled with the
If you click on one of the shapes with the Select Shape
same color.
tool, the Style window updates to display the fill and stroke
To illustrate, the following figure shows four different shapes, properties of the shape that you clicked (color, stroke
each with different fill and stroke properties. width, brush settings and effects, and so on).
If you hold down the Shift key while using the Select Shape
tool, you can select multiple shapes. Pressing the Alt key
will remove a shape from the selection.

Chapter 4: Fill Tools

54 Anime Studio Pro 10
Users Manual

Multiple shapes selected with the Select Shape tool.

The preview updates as you make changes in the Style
The properties of the first shape that you selected will window.
appear in the Style window. Any changes that you make
in the Style window will be applied to all of the selected
shapes. The preview window will update as you make your
style selections.

Select Shape Tool

Chapter 4: Fill Tools

55 Anime Studio Pro 10
Users Manual

Tool Options The Create Shape tool is used to select a region to be filled
with color, or a set of edges to be drawn as an outline. It
operates exactly like the Select Points tool described in
“Select Points” on page 25.

Create Shape Options

• Fill: Check this option to change the fill of the selected

shape(s).
Create Shape Tool
• Fill Color: Click the color square to select a fill color for
the selected shape(s).
Using the Create Shape tool, select all the points that form
• Stroke: Check this option to change the stroke of the the outer border of the shape you wish to create. If you
selected shape(s). select a set of edges that completes an enclosed shape,
a highlighted checkerboard will show you the extent of
• Stroke Color: Click the color square to select a stroke the region you are creating. Otherwise, you will just see a
color for the selected shape(s). highlighted outline on the selected edges.
When you have the desired region selected, press the
• Width: Allows you to set a numerical value for the width
spacebar or press the Create Shape button in the status
of the stroke. Fractional values are allowed.
bar to actually create a shape from the selected edges.
The Style Window (see “Chapter 13: Style Window” on
Create Shape page 210) can now be used to choose the shape’s color,
line width, style, etc. This is a very important step - until you
Shortcut: U press the spacebar or use the Create Shape button, you

Chapter 4: Fill Tools

56 Anime Studio Pro 10
Users Manual

are only preparing the selection. A shape is only created

when the spacebar or button is pressed.
The picture below shows a selection in progress using the
Create Shape tool. Note that the figure on the left is not
filled with a checkerboard because its border points are
not all selected. The checkerboard area indicates the
region that would be filled if the user hit the spacebar at
this particular moment. The left figure would only receive a
partial outline and no fill, since then entire border has not
been selected.

Selecting the curves to make up a shape

The next figure shows the result of pressing the spacebar to

actually create the two shapes that were being prepared
in the figure above.

Chapter 4: Fill Tools

57 Anime Studio Pro 10
Users Manual

Tool Options

Create Shape Options

• Select Group: Used to select a group that was

previously created with the Select Points tool.

• Create Shape: Press the Create Shape button to

complete the shape. This is the same as pressing the
Spacebar after your selection is made.

• Lasso Mode: The Create Shape tool selects a

rectangular area by default. Check this option to
select points by drawing a lasso around the desired
area.
The two resulting shapes

• Fill: Select this option if you only want to change the fill
After creating a shape, if you decide that you only want a of the selected object(s).
fill, and not an outline, you can uncheck the Stroke box in
the Style window. Similarly, uncheck the Fill box in the Style • Stroke: Select this option if you only want to change
window to make your shape have only an outline, and no the stroke of the selected objects(s).
fill color.
• Both: Select this option if you want to change both the
fill and stroke of the selected object(s).

Chapter 4: Fill Tools

58 Anime Studio Pro 10
Users Manual

Paint Bucket Below are some examples of sets of curves in Anime Studio,
where the user might click with the Paint Bucket tool, and
Shortcut: P the resulting fills. In each case, the shape on the left is the
starting shape, the red X indicates the point where the
The Paint Bucket tool is used to fill a closed area with color.
user clicked with the Paint Bucket tool, and the result is the
Just click inside a closed shape to fill it with the current
shape on the right:
combination of colors and styles. This can make it much
easier and quicker to fill shapes than with the Create
Shape tool, but keep in mind you’re still working with the
same requirements - a shape must be completely closed in
order to be filled.

Paint Bucket

In Anime Studio 10 and later, the lines that

create the closed shape do not have to be
welded. For example, you can draw four
overlapping lines with the Freehand tool with Auto Filling a basic closed outline
Weld off, and then fill the inside of the lines with the
Paint Bucket tool.

Chapter 4: Fill Tools

59 Anime Studio Pro 10
Users Manual

Clicking outside a closed outline (nothing happens - no fill). A more complex shape. There are some dead-end curves, but
the overall shape is still closed.

Chapter 4: Fill Tools

60 Anime Studio Pro 10
Users Manual

A shape with a hole in it. Clicking inside the hole fills just the hole

Chapter 4: Fill Tools

61 Anime Studio Pro 10
Users Manual

The shape is not closed (close, but not good enough) - no fill The viewport adjusts to display the entire filled shape after
is created using the Paint Bucket.

If part of the shape is cut off on the edge of the editing You can also draw shapes that overlap, and use the Paint
window, the viewport will change to display the entire filled Bucket tool to fill within areas that overlap. This allows you
shape after you fill it with the Paint Bucket. to quickly create complex boolean shapes.

Chapter 4: Fill Tools

62 Anime Studio Pro 10
Users Manual

Tool Options

Paint Bucket Options

• Fill: Select this option to affect fill only.

• Stroke: Select this option to affect stroke only.

• Both: Select this option to affect both fill and stroke.

Delete Shape
To use the Delete Shape tool, click on a fill or outline to
delete it from the project. Remember, in Anime Studio, the
shape of an object is separate from its appearance. If you
use this tool to delete a fill, the underlying points and curves
will remain. If you want to delete those as well, go back to
the Draw tools to work with the points and curves.

Two overlapping shapes are filled with the Paint Bucket to

create a boolean shape.

Chapter 4: Fill Tools

63 Anime Studio Pro 10
Users Manual

You can superimpose two strokes, each with

a different line width, to create parts for
characters that are made of very few points,
making them much easier to animate. For more
information refer to “Tutorial 2.4: Varying Line
Widths” on page 70 in your Anime Studio Tutorial
Manual.
Delete Shape Tool

Line Width
Shortcut: W
The Line Width tool is used to adjust the width of a line as
Line Width Tool
it passes through a particular point. Using this tool, you
can create lines that taper at the ends, get thinner in the
To use it, just click on the point you want to adjust, and
middle, or change width several times along their length.
drag the mouse left and right to adjust line thickness. (Be
Line widths are stored internally in Anime sure you first either set up an outline through the point, or
Studio as percentage values. For example, a a fill shape with a non-zero line width - otherwise this tool
value of 100% represents the original line width, and won’t do you much good.)
a value of 200% represents double line width. The You can adjust more than one point at a time by selecting
width of the line smoothly varies from the 100% (no multiple points with the Select Points tool from the Draw
custom width) value. tool group.

Chapter 4: Fill Tools

64 Anime Studio Pro 10
Users Manual

Tool Options • Magnet Radius: The points that appear within the red
circle area will be affected when you use the Line
Width tool. Use the Magnet Radius setting to increase
or decrease the affected area.

Line Width Options

• Select Group: Used to select a group that was

previously created with the Select Points tool.

• Width: Allows you to enter a numerical value for the line

width.
You can also enable the Magnet Mode option and enter a
radius that determines the area that the magnet will affect.

You can set a magnet radius to affect all vertices beneath the
Line Width Magnet Mode Options magnet.

• Magnet Mode: Check this option to display the cursor

as a red semi-transparent circle. Hide Edge
Shortcut: H

Chapter 4: Fill Tools

65 Anime Studio Pro 10
Users Manual

Sometimes, you will have the need to create a fill shape

with only a partial outline. The Hide Edge tool makes it easy
to accomplish this. After creating the fill shape and setting
the desired line width, simply click on the edge(s) that you
want to hide - those edges will simply disappear from the
outline, without affecting the fill. Below is a before and
after example:

Hide Edge Tool

The Hide Edge tool in action

Stroke Exposure
The Stroke Exposure tool is located in the Fill section of the
tool box. Normally, when you apply a stroke to a curve,
you see the stroke along the entire curve. With the Stroke
Exposure tool, you can click and drag on a curve that has
a stroke and control where the curve starts and ends.

Chapter 4: Fill Tools

66 Anime Studio Pro 10
Users Manual

Stroke Exposure Tool

• Click and drag back and forth to set the end point
of the stroke on the curve. Dragging toward the left
exposes less of the curve’s end, while dragging toward
the right exposes more of the curve’s end

• Alt-Click and drag back and forth to set the start point
of the stroke on the curve. Drag toward the right to
expose less of the curve’s end, and drag toward the
left to expose more of the curve’s end. Exposing less of the curve’s end

This parameter can be animated so that you can expose

the curve over time, making this feature a good option for
creating things like handwriting or water flowing through
a pipe. Rounded end caps are also supported with the
Stroke Exposure tool.

Chapter 4: Fill Tools

67 Anime Studio Pro 10
Users Manual

Tool Options

• Select Group: Used to select a group that was

previously created with the Select Points tool.

• Start Percentage: Allows you to enter a numerical

value for the start of the curve, based on its distance
Curve Profile Tool
from the start point

• End Percentage: Allows you to enter a numerical value Curve profiles can be of any shape, but the start and end
for the end of the curve, based on its distance from of the profile should be along the same horizontal line.
the end point While you can create profile curves with or without a stroke
applied to them, it makes sense to draw them with Auto
Stroke off, since you will be applying a different pattern to
Curve Profile the circle based on the style of the curve.

Curve profiles provide a way to add interesting detail

to a shape. You use the Curve Profile tool to create
these details on a shape. You select a shape on a layer.
Additional curves that define the profile can appear on
the same layer.

Chapter 4: Fill Tools

68 Anime Studio Pro 10
Users Manual

Shapes and curves are drawn on a single layer

A shape with a profile curve applied.

After you select the shape you want to apply the profile to
Even though the resulting shape appears to have more
(a circle in this case, select the Curve Profile tool from the
detail, it still has the same number of control points as the
Fill section of the tool box. Then click on the curve that you
original shape. For example, if you applied the curve profile
want to use as the profile.
to a circle, the resulting shape still has only the four original
control points, even though it appears to have more. You
can edit the shape by repositioning one or more of the
original control points, and the curve profile will still be
applied.

Chapter 4: Fill Tools

69 Anime Studio Pro 10
Users Manual

If you want to animate a shape that uses Curve

Profiles you will need to animate the shape used for
the profile. You cannot assign one profile shape on one
frame in a timeline, and then reassign another profile
shape on another point in the timeline. In addition, if you
delete the curve that was originally used as a profile
shape, the curve profile also gets deleted.

The Repeat Count setting in the options toolbar

controls the number of times that the curve profile
repeats along the path. You can increase or
decrease this setting to add more or less detail to
the shape.

The Repeat Count controls the number of times that the profile
curve repeats along the path

To remove the curve profile from the shape, select the

Curve Profile tool from the Fill section of the tool box and
click on an empty background area.
Tool Options

• Repeat Count: Used to control the number of times

that the profile shape repeats along the path.

Chapter 4: Fill Tools

70 Anime Studio Pro 10
Users Manual

Working with Fills • Use the Create Shape tool to fill closed outlines that do
not have any fill. You will need to select the points in
To define a region to be filled, you must first select all the the outlines before you use the Create Shape tool.
points along its boundary. That’s what defines a fill region
• You can also use the Paint Bucket to fill shapes that do
- the set of points along its outer edge. We’ll take a look at
not yet have a fill. For example, you can use the Add
some examples later. You can also create outlines using
Point or Freehand tool to create a shape that has a
these tools. Outlines are less restrictive than fills - an outline
stroke only, and then later use the Paint Bucket tool to
is not a set of points along an outer boundary. Instead, an
add a fill.
outline can be any set of points you choose. The curve
segments between these selected points will form the
• You can also change colors with the Eyedropper.
outline.
Use the Eyedropper to select a color from any of the
Fills and outlines are stacked on top of each other in the shapes that use the color you want to apply. Then press
order you create them. This determines which fill or outline the Alt key and click other objects with the Eyedropper
will be visible when two or more overlap. There are tools to push the selected color to other shapes.
that allow you to change the stacking order of fills and
outlines, but you’ll learn that you can save yourself a lot
of time by planning ahead and creating fills in the proper
Color Picking
order to begin with. If the Select Shape or Create Shape tools are active and a
There are a number of different ways to fill shapes in Anime shape is selected, you can quickly set the shape’s color by
Studio: picking it from another shape in the current layer. Just hold
down the Alt key and click on the shape you want to copy
• Use the Select Shape tool to select the shape you want the color from. The color (and style) will instantly be applied
to change. The color and fill properties will be “picked to the currently selected shape.
up” in the Style window. You can then change the fill
You can also push a shape’s color and style onto other
colors in the Style window.
shapes. If you hold down Alt + Ctrl (Windows) or Alt + Cmd
(Mac) and click on a second shape, the selected shape’s

Chapter 4: Fill Tools

71 Anime Studio Pro 10
Users Manual

color will be pushed onto the shape you click on. This is an
easy way to propagate one shape’s color and style onto
several other shapes in the same layer.
There’s no limit to the kinds of shapes you can create this
way. By adding more boundary curves, you can create
more and more complex fills - feel free to experiment.

A Trick: Using Two Fills Instead of One

Sometimes you may want to create an object with parts
that overlap in complex ways. Consider the image below:

Two interlocking rings

The red ring is in fact two objects - one behind the blue
ring, and one in front of it. The next image shows the same
object, but colored differently so that the two parts of the
red ring stand out.

Chapter 4: Fill Tools

72 Anime Studio Pro 10
Users Manual

The coloring shows three different shapes

Point and curve arrangement.
It takes a little more work to set up an object when you
have to split it into two (or more) parts, but sometimes it’s This technique is also useful in animation, for when you
the only way to achieve a certain effect. The picture below want an object to bend backwards and overlap itself.
shows the project in an Anime Studio window, so that you Normally, this would cause the fill that defined the object
can see the arrangement of points and curves. Note how to get seriously distorted, or even to break holes in itself.
the ring on the right has some extra curves set up so that it However, by building the object out of two or more parts
can be split into two fills. and stacking them properly, you can achieve this type of
effect with no problem.

Chapter 4: Fill Tools

73 Anime Studio Pro 10
Users Manual

Chapter 5: Bone Tools

The following tools are available when working with Bone
or Switch layers.
If a tool has the following symbol next to it: , then it can
be used for animation as well. In general, tools that are
Reset tool options.
used for bone setup can only be used when the time is set
to frame 0 - others can be used at any time.

Anime Studio has a smart tool palette, which Select Bone

shows and hides tools based on their need.
The position of the tool shown in the screenshots Using this tool, you can click a bone to select it. You can
may differ, depending on the selected layer in the also draw a marquee or a lasso around multiple bones to
Layers palette, and the current time in the timeline. select more than one bone with the Select Bone tool.
You might want to select a bone in order to delete it
Click the tool icon in the properties bar to (press the Delete or Backspace keys - all of its children will
display a submenu. Choose Reset Tool to be deleted too). You also might want to select a bone in
reset the current tool to its default settings. Choose order to add new child bones to it. Click anywhere besides
Reset All Tools to reset all tools to their default a bone to de-select all bones.
settings.

Chapter 5: Bone Tools

74 Anime Studio Pro 10
Users Manual

• Bone Constraints: Opens the Bone Constraints dialog,

described in “Bone Constraints” on page 75.

Select Bone Options (Part 2)

Select Bone Tool
• Lock Bone: When checked, prevents accidental
changes to the current bone.
Tool Options
• Lasso Mode: When checked, allows you to select
The following options appear in the Options toolbar when multiple bones by drawing a lasso around them. When
the Select Bone tool is active: unchecked, you can select multiple bones by drawing
a rectangular selection around them.

• Color: Click the Color selector to choose a

representative color for the bones: Plain, Purple, Blue,
Select Bone Options (Part 1) Green, Yellow, Orange, or Red. These colors can be
representative of any category you choose and are
provided for project organization. The keyframes for
• Select Bone: Use the Select Bone dropdown list to
colored bones will show up in the timeline in specially
select a bone by name.
colored channels that match the colors you assign.
• Bone Name field: Displays the name of the selected
bone. You can edit the bone name in this field.

Chapter 5: Bone Tools

75 Anime Studio Pro 10
Users Manual

For detailed instructions and examples of the options

in this dialog, refer to the Angle Constraints section in
“Tutorial 3.2: Bone Constraints” on page 92 in your Anime
Studio Tutorial Manual.

Color options

• Show Label: Check the Show Label option to display

the name of the bone in the project window.
The names displayed are those which are either
automatically or manually assigned in the Select Bone
list. User-assigned labels help you remember what
a particular smart bone controls (eye blinks, mouth
shapes, etc.) To change the name of the bone, enter
a new name for the selected bone in the text field
immediately to the right of the list.

Bone Constraints
With the Select Bone tool selected, click the Bone
Constraints button in the options bar to open the Bone
Constraint options dialog shown below.

Chapter 5: Bone Tools

76 Anime Studio Pro 10
Users Manual

• Angle constraints: Check this option if you want to limit

the movement of the bone within certain angles.

• Min/max degrees: Enter the maximum and minimum

angle range that you want the bone to rotate. For
example, if you only want the bone to rotate 10
degrees in either direction, enter -10 in the Min field,
and 10 in the Max field.

• Independent angle: Normally, if you move or rotate

a parent bone, the child bone moves or rotates with
it. If you check the Independent Angle option on a
child bone, the child will keep the original angle. This
is extremely helpful when rigging a character, as it
can be used to keep the feet parallel to the ground
as the legs move and rotate during a walk cycle. For
more information about using independent angles, see
“Tutorial 3.6: New Bone Features” on page 163 in your
Anime Studio Tutorial Manual.

Bone Constraints Options

Chapter 5: Bone Tools

77 Anime Studio Pro 10
Users Manual

In the default position, the last bone is parallel to the ground. If you set Independent Angle on the child bone, it will rotate
independently of its parent.

• Squash and stretch scaling: When this option is

checked, the objects that are controlled by the bone
will maintain their volume when they are scaled. The
height of the object will decrease as the length of
the bone is increased, and the height of the object
will increase as the length of the object is decreased.
Enter the desired scaling factor in the field provided.
For more information, see “Tutorial 3.6: New Bone
Features” on page 163 in your Anime Studio Tutorial
Manual.
If you rotate its parent bone, the child also rotates.

Chapter 5: Bone Tools

78 Anime Studio Pro 10
Users Manual

• Angle/Position/Scale control bone: Allows one bone to

control the motion of another. Click to select the bone
that you want to be affected, and then use the drop-
down menu to select the bone that you want to use as
the controller. Enter the desired control angle (positive
and negative values are accepted) in the Angle field,
the X and Y coordinates in the Position fields, or the
desired scale factor in the Scale field.

• Bone dynamics: Tells Anime Studio to move the

selected bone automatically, based on values entered
in the Torque Force, Spring Force, and Damping Force
values entered. See “Tutorial 3.3: Bone Dynamics” on
Squash and stretch scaling helps maintain the volume of an page 102 in your Anime Studio Tutorial Manual.
object as the bone is scaled.
• Close: Closes the Bone Dynamics palette.

• Maximum IK stretching: Enter the maximum amount

that you want to allow a bone to stretch with Squash Transform Bone
and Stretch scaling.
The Transform Bone tool allows you to translate, rotate, or
• Target: Allows you to assign another bone as a target. scale a selected bone.
The most common use for this is to set up Inverse
Kinematics for a character so that you can more easily When the Transform Bone tool is selected, two dots appear
animate walk cycles. For more information about using at the ends of each bone. In addition, the cursor will
target bones, see “Tutorial 3.6: New Bone Features” on change to display the type of transformation that will be
page 163 in your Anime Studio Tutorial Manual. applied:

Chapter 5: Bone Tools

79 Anime Studio Pro 10
Users Manual

Transform Bone Tool

The following key combinations work while the Transform

Bones tool is selected:

Transform Bone tool indications • Holding the Shift key will cause the bone to only
translate horizontally or vertically relative to its parent (if
you click near the base)
• To rotate a bone: Click near the bone, but outside
of the handles. A rotate cursor will provide indication • Holding the Shift key while rotating will constrain the
when the mouse is placed correctly. Then drag the rotation to 45 degree increments.
mouse to rotate the bone.
• You can nudge the selected bone by small increments
• To translate a bone: Click and drag the dot at the by holding down the Ctrl key (Windows) or Cmd key
base of the bone. (Mac) and pressing the arrow keys. Hold down Shift in
addition to Ctrl/Cmd to nudge the bone by a greater
• To scale a bone: Click and drag the dot at the end of
increment.
the bone.
• If any objects in other layers have been bound to the
bone, they will not move if the current frame is 0. At
frame 0, you are modifying the bone layout - at later

Chapter 5: Bone Tools

80 Anime Studio Pro 10
Users Manual

frames you are animating with this tool, and bound • Reset: If pressed at Frame 0, resets a layer back to its
objects will move with the bone. default length. If pressed at any other frame, resets the
layer to the value or values set at frame 0.

Tool Options • Scale: Allows you to view or enter a numerical value for
the scale of the bone.

• Reset: If pressed at Frame 0, resets a layer back to its

default scale. If pressed at any other frame, resets the
Transform Bone Options (part 1) layer to the value or values set at frame 0.

• Angle: Allows you to view or enter a numerical value

• Select Bone: Click this menu button to select a bone for the angle of the bone.
by name.
• Reset: If pressed at Frame 0, resets a layer back to its
• Position X: Allows you to numerically enter a value for default angle. If pressed at any other frame, resets the
the X coordinate. layer to the value or values set at frame 0.

• Position Y: Allows you to numerically enter a value for

the Y coordinate. Add Bone
Use the Add Bone tool to add new bones to a skeleton.
The location you click will be the base of the bone (the
point it rotates about), and where you drag to will be the
Transform Bone Options (part 2)
endpoint.
When you add a new bone, Anime Studio automatically
• Length: Allows you to view or enter a numerical value assigns a name to it. By default, the first bone you add is
for the length of the bone. named B1, the second B2, and so on.

Chapter 5: Bone Tools

81 Anime Studio Pro 10
Users Manual

If another bone is selected before you click and drag, it will Tool Options
be the parent of the new bone you create. Otherwise, the
new bone will be parentless, a root bone.

Add Bone Options

• Select Bone: Click this menu button to select a bone

Add Bone Tool by name.

• Text Field: Allows you to assign a name to the currently

Hold the Shift key to constrain the new bone to point in a
selected bone, or to edit the name of the bone as
direction that is a multiple of 45 degrees.
automatically assigned by Anime Studio.
Note that bones don’t have to be touching to have a
parent-child relationship. In the example shown in “Tutorial
3.4: Character Setup” on page 109 in your Anime Studio Reparent Bone
Tutorial Manual, the upper arm bones are children of the
Sometimes when building a skeleton, you may
spine, even though they are separated from it by a small
accidentally add bones to the wrong parent. Later, when
distance. This will often be the case - arms should rotate
you discover the error, deleting bones and adding new
about the shoulders, not the neck, even though they move
ones is just too much work. Instead, use the Change Parent
when the spine moves.
tool to change a bone’s parent. First, select the bone
whose parent you want to change (using the Select Bone
tool). Then, using this tool, click on the new parent bone.
(The new parent will become highlighted in blue.) If you
want to turn the selected bone into a root bone (one that
has no parent), just click on the background.
Chapter 5: Bone Tools
82 Anime Studio Pro 10
Users Manual

Bone Strength
When using bones to control the points in a vector layer or
to warp an image layer, by default every bone has some
degree of influence over every point in the vector layer (or
image). The Bone Strength tool lets you adjust how much
influence each bone has. When this tool is activated, a
Reparent Bone Tool semi-transparent region appears around each bone - this
region indicates the strength of the bone. If you drag side
to side on a bone with the Bone Strength tool, you cause
Tool Options the region of influence to shrink or grow. Points that are
closer to the center of this region move more when the
bone itself is moved.

Reparent Bone Tool

Bone Strength Tool

• Select Bone: Click this menu button to select a bone

by name. Although by default, all bones have some influence over
some points, you can change this behavior. In the Layer
Settings dialog, under the Bones tab, there are two options,
Flexible binding and Region binding. Flexible binding
means that every bone will influence every point. Region

Chapter 5: Bone Tools

83 Anime Studio Pro 10
Users Manual

binding, on the other hand, means that a point will only • Bone Strength: Allows you to view or enter a numerical
move under the influence of the bone(s) in whose region value for bone strength.
of influence it lies. If that point only lies in one bone’s
region, it will only move with that bone - if the point is
overlapped by the regions of two bones, it will move with Manipulate Bones
both of those bones.
The Manipulate Bones tool has two purposes. First,
Flexible binding is the default setting for new bone layers when the current frame is set to 0, it is used to test
because it works reasonably well almost automatically. whether a skeleton is set up and working properly.
The downside is that it leads to rubbery movement of the Although it moves bones and points around, the changes
attached vector artwork. Region binding will give you it makes are only temporary. When you switch to another
cleaner movement, but takes a little more work to set up. tool, the skeleton is reverted back to its original shape.
”Tutorial 3.4: Character Setup” on page 109 in your Anime
Studio Tutorial Manual shows you how to use the Bone When working inside a Smart Bone action,
Strength tool together with both types of binding to quickly the Manipulate Bones tool can introduce
set up a character’s skeleton. extra unwanted bone motion in the Smart Bone
action. For this reason, the Manipulate Bones tool will
be disabled.
Tool Options

Bone Strength Options

Manipulate Bones Tool

• Select Bone: Click this menu button to select a bone
by name.

Chapter 5: Bone Tools

84 Anime Studio Pro 10
Users Manual

The second use of this tool is at frames greater than 0. If the Use this tool to bind an entire layer to a single bone. If you
current frame is greater than 0, then this tool will move the would rather bind certain points in a vector layer to certain
skeleton in the same way, but the move will introduce a bones, then you should use the Bind Points tool instead.
keyframe for animation.
For more information on how to use the Bind Layer tool, see
To manipulate a skeleton, just click and drag the various the Layer Binding section of “Tutorial 3.1: Bone Binding” on
bones that make it up. If points or other layers have been page 83 in your Anime Studio Tutorial Manual.
bound to the bones, they will move as well. The way the
skeleton and the bound points move with this tool is exactly
the same whether at frame 0 or a later frame. If some part
of the skeleton doesn’t move correctly, you can find out
with this tool and fix it before you start animating.
Note: If you only want to rotate a single bone, it’s better to Bind Layer Tool
use the Rotate Bone tool. The Manipulate Bones tool will
move a whole chain of bones, which is definitely not what
you want if you plan to rotate a single bone.
Bind Points
Bind Layer The Bind Points tool operates exactly like the Select Points
tool described in “Select Points” on page 25. Use it to
Other layers can be contained within a bone layer. For select a group of points to bind to a bone. In order to use
example, you could create a hand layer and place that this tool, you must be on Frame 0, and a bone must first
within an arm layer. To bind the hand to the arm, use this be selected. When a bone is selected, the points that are
tool. Just click on the bone in the parent layer that you currently bound to it are automatically selected as well.
want to connect to, and the entire layer will move with that Use this tool to add or remove points from that selected
bone. In the arm/hand example, you would click on the group. When the correct group of points is selected that
bone nearest the wrist to bind the hand to the end of the you want to bind to the bone, press the spacebar - this
arm. tells Anime Studio to perform the binding. This technique is

Chapter 5: Bone Tools

85 Anime Studio Pro 10
Users Manual

demonstrated in “Tutorial 3.1: Bone Binding” on page 83 It’s difficult to describe the usefulness of this tool without a
in your Anime Studio Tutorial Manual hands-on example, so look in “Tutorial 3.1: Bone Binding”
on page 83 in your Anime Studio Tutorial Manual.

Bind Points Tool

We don’t usually recommend using the Bind Offset Bone Tool

Points tool. Instead, the best way to attach
points to bones is to use automatic bone binding,
together with the Bone Strength tool. Tool Options

Offset Bone
The Offset Bone tool lets you add an extra amount of Offset Bone Options
bone movement starting at frame 1 of your animation. The
reason you might want to do this is to simplify the setup of
• Select Bone: Click this menu button to select a bone
a complex character. Often, parts of a character such as
by name.
arms and legs overlap, making it difficult to set up bones
and attach the proper parts of the character’s body to • Animation Offset X: Allows you to numerically enter a
them. The Offset Bone tool lets you draw the parts of a value for the amount of offset on the X axis.
character in disconnected positions, set up bones, and
then move them all back into position.

Chapter 5: Bone Tools

86 Anime Studio Pro 10
Users Manual

• Animation Offset Y: Allows you to numerically enter a

value for the amount of offset on the Y axis.

• Reset: If pressed at Frame 0, resets a layer back to its

default value. If pressed at any other frame, resets the
layer to the value or values set at frame 0.

Bone Physics
When objects that have bones are added to a Group layer
that has physics applied to it (as mentioned in “Tutorial 5.9:
Basic Physics” on page 232 in your Anime Studio Tutorial
Manual), the bones will respond to the physics properties
that you have set for the object. Physics are applied to
each bone based upon the bone’s area of influence, as
set by the Bone Strength tool.

A boned character placed into a physics group

The Bone Physics tool is a setup tool and will only be

available at Frame 0, and once a boned object is placed
inside a Group layer that has physics enabled. The options
Bone Physics Tool mentioned in the following section become available in
the Options bar. You can assign different physics properties
to the bones by clicking each bone with the Bone Physics
tool.

Chapter 5: Bone Tools

87 Anime Studio Pro 10
Users Manual

For additional information on configuring Tool Options

groups and objects for physics, see “Tutorial
5.9: Basic Physics” on page 232 in your Anime
• Select Bone: Click this menu button to select a bone
Studio Tutorial Manual.
by name.

After you set up the objects in your scene, and the • Bone Physics Region: With physics, bones are
bones in your character, you can press the play represented internally with a kind of pill-shaped region
button to see how the character responds to the around them, the physics region. You can enter a
physics as it comes into contact with the other number numerically, but generally you would just
stationary and physics-enabled objects in the use this tool to click and drag on individual bones
scene. to control the size of the physics region, trying to get
it to match the underlaying character as closely as
possible. When you play back the animation, the bone
physics regions are what is used in collisions, not the
character artwork. (This is because the bending of the
character is not directly physics related. The physics
pushes the bones around according to the physics
regions, and the bones then move the character just
like they would if you were hand-animating.)

• Motor Speed: . The motor speed is the number of

degrees per second the object will rotate (it can
be negative to rotate backwards). Depending if
the object bumps into obstacles or there are other
influences, it may not actually rotate at that speed,
but in a zero gravity setup with no collisions, that will be
The boned character responding to other objects in the scene the speed of rotation.

Chapter 5: Bone Tools

88 Anime Studio Pro 10
Users Manual

• Motor Torque: Motor torque controls the strength of • In any layer type that is a child of a bone layer: Layer
the motor. With low torque, when a motorized object translation, Layer scale, Layer Rotation (X, Y, and Z),
bumps into other objects it may come to a stop, Layer Shear, Layer Opacity, Layer Blur
depending on the size and density of the obstacles.
In the same layer as the Smart Bone itself:
With a high torque, it will tend to push obstacles out of
its way. Even with no obstacles, if a motorized object • Bone translation
is unbalanced (off center of its origin), a low torque
setting may mean that it can even lift itself up. • Bone scale

• Return to Neutral: Check this option to return the bone • Bone rotation
to neutral position.
Smart Bones can be used to control the following
additional elements:
• Lock Tip: When physics are in affect, if a bone has its tip
locked it acts as though the endpoint of the bone has
• Stroke exposure: Use Smart Bones to expose more of a
been nailed to a stationary point.
stroke along a path as you rotate the bone.

• 3D Thicknesses: Increase or decrease the thickness of

Smart Bones vector shapes that have been converted to 3D shapes
with Extrude or Inflate.
The Smart Bones feature in Anime Studio Pro allows you to
have more control over shapes when you bend them with • Shape and Fill effects: Change the colors and positions
bones. You can use Smart Bones to control the following in a gradient fill.
types of scene elements.
• Switch layers
• In vector layers that are a child of a bone layer: Point
motion, Curvature, Line Width, Fill Color, and Stroke • Layer order
Color.
• Layer visibility

Chapter 5: Bone Tools

89 Anime Studio Pro 10
Users Manual

• Follow path

• Flip layer horizontally/vertically

• Shape effect positioning

How Smart Bones Work

To illustrate how Smart Bones work, create a vector layer
and add a rectangle to it.
You will eventually add two bones to this rectangle, so
you’ll also want to make sure that there are some points in
the center of the rectangle where the two bones will meet
(as a joint). Create a rectangle with points at the center; add a bone
group, and create two bones.
In the Layers window, create a bone layer and drag the
rectangle vector layer into it. With the Bone layer selected,
use the Add Bone tool to create two bones to the bone Use the Bone Strength tool to adjust the bone weights so
layer. that the rectangle bends in the center as shown below.

Chapter 5: Bone Tools

90 Anime Studio Pro 10
Users Manual

The steps that follow describe how to create smart bone

actions manually. You can use the Bone > Make Smart
Bone Dial command to set up the smart bone dials more
quickly. See “Make Smart Bone Dial” on page 368.

Creating a Smart Bone Action

In order to use this feature, you need to assign a name to
each bone that needs correction. In the following figure
the bones are named B1 (for the bone on the left) and
B2 (for the bone on the right). You can name the bones
whatever you want to name them.

Every bone automatically gets named when

Adjust bone strengths to get a nice bend in the center.
you create it. By default, the bone is assigned
a name such as B1 (for the first bone), B2 (for the
You’ll notice that if you bend the bone too far that the
second bone) and so on.
area around the bend doesn’t look good because the
rectangle gets squeezed in the middle.
You’ll notice when you rotate bone B2 it causes the
In previous versions of Anime Studio, the way around this rectangle to distort when it is bent. You can correct this
distortion was to add points in the center of the rectangle distortion by creating an action that is associated with that
that would reshape the center appropriately. However, bone.
this method resulted in a lot of corrections that had to be
made whenever that bone was animated.
Smart Bones use a different approach, by linking a bone
rotation to an action, and a resulting correction.

Chapter 5: Bone Tools

91 Anime Studio Pro 10
Users Manual

Each bone is assigned a name.

Choose Window > Actions to bring up the Actions window.

Create a new action with the same name as the bone (B2
in this case). Create a new action, named the same as the bone you want
to correct.

At that point you are editing the action. Choose the

Rotate Bone tool in the Tools panel, and rotate the bone
as far as you expect it to move (or, to the limit that is set on
the bone in that direction).

Chapter 5: Bone Tools

92 Anime Studio Pro 10
Users Manual

When working inside a Smart Bone action, the

Manipulate Bones tool can introduce extra
unwanted bone motion in the Smart Bone action.
For this reason, the Manipulate Bones tool will be
disabled.

Rotate the bone to the limit at which you expect it to rotate

(upward in this case).

Now switch to the vector layer and use any of the

available editing tools to adjust the shape of the rectangle
so that it looks good. The joint correction feature can track
Select the vector layer for the rectangle, and create the target
point movement and curvature changes. This shape will be
shape for that rotation angle
the target shape for when bone B2 is rotated to that angle.

Chapter 5: Bone Tools

93 Anime Studio Pro 10
Users Manual

In the Actions window, switch back to the main timeline by

clicking Mainline. Now when you rotate bone B2 toward
that angle, it will automatically pick up the action that you
just created.
Now the distortion around the joint works much better. You
can now go to frames other than zero to add keyframes
that animate the bones. The actions will automatically be
added when the bone is rotated, and the action will be
removed when the bone is straightened.

Creating a Second Smart Bone Action

You’ve just created an action for the bone when it moves
in one direction. However, you also need to create an
adjustment for the other direction
A second action must be created for when B2 is rotated
downward.

To create another action that corrects the second

direction, go back to the Actions window and create
another new action. Name this bone with the name of
the bone, followed by a space, and the number 2 (B2 2).
The B2 prefix associates the action with Bone B2, and the
number 2 is a number designation to differentiate it from
the first action.

Chapter 5: Bone Tools

94 Anime Studio Pro 10
Users Manual

Make sure the new action incorporates the name of the bone
you want to correct. Bend the bone in the other direction to see if adjustments are
needed.

As you did in the first case, select the vector layer for
the rectangle, and adjust the shape for when B2 is bent
downward. An example is shown in the following figure. Editing a Bone Action
You can also go back to a previous bone action and
make corrections to it. For example, when you created the
first bone action, it simply improved the shape of the bend.
Suppose you want to go back and create something like

Chapter 5: Bone Tools

95 Anime Studio Pro 10
Users Manual

a muscle bulge for when an arm is bent upward. Bone • Go back to the main timeline and play the animation.
actions make this process easy to do: The keyframes that you originally added will now also
include the new muscle bulge when the rectangle
• To begin, go back to frame 0 and add a point to the is bent in the appropriate dimension. When the arm
rectangle, located in the area where you want the bends downward, the muscle bulge will not be
muscle bulge to happen. included because it was not added to the B2 2 action
that bends the arm downward.
• Select the first correction action (B2).

• Move the new point like a bulging muscle. Fixing Bad Transitions
You might discover after creating your bone actions
that the object doesn’t look quite right when it’s bent
in intermediate positions. For example, objects might
bend unpredictably if their point count is too high, or
unoptimized. The following solution can help improve the
appearance of intermediate frames.

You can also use Blob Brush to fix a transition

between two bones (such as an elbow or
knee bend). This type of bone binding can be
applied to vector and image layers. For more
information about this feature, see “Create Smooth
Joint for Bone Pair” on page 365.

The processes discussed in “Creating a Smart Bone

Action” on page 90 and “Creating a Second Smart
Add a new point and position it to make a bulging muscle.
Bone Action” on page 93 are still used to create your

Chapter 5: Bone Tools

96 Anime Studio Pro 10
Users Manual

bone action in this case. But in this example you see a

rectangle that has many more points along its length (to
simulate an object that is not optimized). Most of the points
in the rectangle aren’t really necessary for it to maintain its
shape when it’s bent.

Bone B2 bend end result

However, you might notice problems in intermediate

positions, such as shown in the following figure. If you only
have an action that defines the start and end shapes, you
don’t have any way to fix interpolation problems that might
occur in intermediate frames in your actual animation.
A rectangle with many points along its length

Bones are added to the rectangle, and the second bone

(Bone B2) is posed as described earlier in “Creating a
Smart Bone Action” on page 90. The end result looks
similar to the previous example when Bone B2 is rotated to
its extreme position.

Chapter 5: Bone Tools

97 Anime Studio Pro 10
Users Manual

Anime Studio doesn’t care how many frames

you need to complete the bone action. But
because of the nature of the program it interpolates
in steps. If an action is too short (3 frames), you only
have three steps in between to make the animation
smooth. Spreading it out smoother gives you room
to correct for a more smooth transition.

Select all of the point positions that you changed

for the original bone action and move them out
to 120 as well. Now the action takes 120 frames to
complete the bend.

An intermediate frame shows some shaping problems.

• Move to an intermediate frame in that bone action
(not in the main timeline) until you locate an area
If your bone action works fine in the intermediate frames,
that looks objectionable. Now you can adjust the in
using just a single frame action, leave it as is.
between positions of the points. Make sure when you
If the in-between frames are objectionable, you can do edit the points that they are the only keyframes that
the following to correct it: are selected.

• Go back to the B2 action.

• Instead of creating the angle at frame 1, you can

move it somewhere later in time, like frame 120. Move
the keyframe for the bone angle out to 120.

Chapter 5: Bone Tools

98 Anime Studio Pro 10
Users Manual

Frame 60 of the bone action before adjustment. Frame 60 of the bone action after adjustment

After you make your adjustments, scrub through to make

sure that there are no other areas that need adjustment.
If you find others, just move the points in that frame of the
bone action (not in the main timeline) to make additional
corrections as needed.
After your edits are complete go back to the main timeline.
Test out bending the bone on frame 0.

Chapter 5: Bone Tools

99 Anime Studio Pro 10
Users Manual

Other Uses for Bone Actions go to the actions window, you can create actions that
match each one of the control levers.
Here are some eyes in which bones have been set up to
For example, if you are working on the Blink action you
make the eyes do a variety of movements such as blink,
rotate the bone to the other extreme, and then adjust
dilation, sideways, and up-down. Tags have been put on
the points in the Lids layer to close the eyelids. When you
the bones to show what the bones are used for, but this
go back to the timeline and move the bone, it closes the
is not necessary. The bones aren’t really being used as
eyelid.
bones, but they are being used as control levers.

A bone used as a control lever to make an eye blink.

Bones used as control levers.

The bones were initially created with the bone strength Smart Bones and Binding
set to zero. Each of the bones was assigned a name (the
name isn’t really important but helps you keep track of the The original type of binding used in Moho 1.0 was a direct
actions that the bones are intended to control). When you binding method. With direct binding, each point can
Chapter 5: Bone Tools
100 Anime Studio Pro 10
Users Manual

be bound directly to one particular bone. When that need to delete and recreate the smart bone actions, or at
bone moves, the point tracks that bone exactly, without least review them carefully and tweak them to make sure
influence from any other bones. they still look good with the new point binding. As a general
rule of thumb, we recommend that you get the rig to work
Flexible binding was introduced in later releases of Anime
as well as you can first. Adjust bone position, strength and
Studio, and is now the default behavior. The benefit of this
point binding first, and commit to them before you set up
type of point binding is that it’s relatively easy to make
any smart bone actions.
points bend smoothly around joints in a bone structure.
With this method, every bone has some kind of influence
on every point. Points that are closer to a given bone are
more influenced by that bone; but bones that are far away
from certain points can also move those points a small
amount. Bone strength also plays a part in how much each
bone controls each point.
Here’s where the type of binding matters: When bones
move points, that movement is going to be different
depending on the type of binding. When you set up a
bone rig with smart bones, the smart bone actions get set
up as movement relative to the bone rotation.
If you set up smart bones, but then later change the type
of binding on the points, the smart bone actions will no
longer be meaningful. Because the basic point motion
changes when you change binding, you’ll get unexpected
results when you apply an action that was designed for a
different point motion on top of that.
If you need to change the type of point binding for vector
layers when working with smart bones, you will generally
Chapter 5: Bone Tools
101 Anime Studio Pro 10
Users Manual

Chapter 6: Layer Types Of course, most standard image and movie formats
are not vector-based, so when you’re done working on
a Anime Studio project, it must be rendered to create
Drawings in Anime Studio are vector-based. Vector a traditional pixel-based image. During the rendering
drawings are different from pixel-based images (like a process, Anime Studio can apply various effects to the
photograph) in that they use lines and curves to represent objects, such as shading and blurring.
a picture, rather than a grid of colored pixels. This Anime Studio is designed in such a way that projects
difference makes a lot of things easy in Anime Studio that are split into layers. You can have many, many layers in
would be difficult or impossible to do with a pixel-based a Anime Studio project, each representing a different
image. element in a scene or animation, such as background
First of all, since an Anime Studio drawing is represented scenery, a character, or a title. Some layers can even
as a bunch of curves, you can reshape the curves at any contain other layers, so a more complex object, such as
time, without ever losing precision. Also, Anime Studio a character, might contain separate layers for each arm
projects are relatively small, even for complex animations and leg.
- this means Anime Studio doesn’t require much memory
even when working on a long movie. Vectors also have
benefits when it comes to animation. By moving just a few Layer Types
points, you can totally change the shape of an object
Anime Studio currently supports the following types of
over time.
layers:
You’re not restricted to vector artwork, though - Anime
Studio also has Image Layers. Using this type of layer, you • Vector Layers are used to hold vector-based artwork.
can work with regular images within an Anime Studio These are the main type of layer you will use to create
project. So, Anime Studio is not strictly vector-based, but drawings. See “Vector Layers” on page 104 for more
you will probably still use mostly vector layers, as image information.
layers are not as flexible when it comes to animation.

Chapter 6: Layer Types

102 Anime Studio Pro 10
Users Manual

You can use the Scripts > Draw > Simplify Bone Layers contain skeletons that are used to
Curve menu command to reduce the control the artwork in your vector and image layers.
number of points in a complex Vector layer. You manipulate skeletons as if they were “puppets”
by bending arms and legs to make a character
move. See “Bone Layers” on page 107 for more
Image Layers can be used to bring in images
information.
from other applications. Image files created in 3D
programs or photo editing applications can be used
in Anime Studio with Image Layers. See “Image Right-click a Bone layer in the Layers window
Layers” on page 105 for more information. to quickly convert it into a Switch layer.

• Group Layers (Anime Studio Pro only) are used to Switch Layers are just like Bone layers, except they
group together multiple layers. If you created 20 will only display one of their sub-layers at a time.
layers with trees for example, you could put them all Switch layers are an excellent way to perform lip-
in a Group Layer and call it a forest. Group layers are sync animation. Which sub-layer gets displayed is
a useful tool for organizing a complex project. See controlled by a switch data file. You can create this
“Group Layers” on page 106 for more information. data file by hand, or better yet, use a lip-syncing
program like Papagayo. See “Switch Layers” on
Right-click a Group Layer in the Layers page 109 for more information.
window to quickly convert the Group layer
into a Bone or Switch layer.
• Particle Layers (Anime Studio Pro only) are used as a
way to simulate water, sparks, smoke, crowds, or any
number of effects that can be made up of many small
objects. A Particle layer behaves somewhat like a
Group layer, but instead of displaying each of its sub-
layers, it can display many, many copies of each sub-
layer arranged in sort of a “spray” formation. The sub-
Chapter 6: Layer Types
103 Anime Studio Pro 10
Users Manual

layers appear to be moving outward from the origin of etc. created with Anime Studio’s vector layers. See
the Particle layer. For more information, see “Particle “3D Layers” on page 117 for more information.
Layers” on page 113

• Note Layers (Anime Studio Pro only) are like sticky Enhanced Layer Alignment
notes in Anime Studio. You might use a note layer
when you want to leave a note for yourself or another
Features
animator. For example, you might create a note layer The Layer Alignment features in Anime Studio assist in
at a particular frame that needs some work, or to alignment when using 2D to 3D conversions. New layers
describe why a character is set up in a particular way. align to face with the current camera view. This allows you
See “Note Layers” on page 116 for more information. to create more complex 3D objects in your Anime Studio
scenes.
• Audio Layers allow you to add a sound file to your
project. When adding an audio layer you will be To demonstrate, try this:
prompted to select an audio file.
1. Create a new Anime Studio scene.
• Patch Layers allow you to arrange layers so that part of
2. Use the Draw Shape tool to draw a box in the scene.
a layer can appear behind a layer, and another part
of the same layer can appear in front of a layer. They 3. Use the 2D to 3D conversion features to extrude the
are used in conjunction with the Character Wizard, but 2D box into a 3D box. To convert a 2D vector layer to
can also be used in other ways. 3D, double click on the layer in the Layers Window and
click on the 3D Options tab. Then select ‘Extrude’ from
• 3D Layers (Anime Studio Pro only) can be used to
the 3D Conversion drop down menu.
import 3D objects that were created in a 3D modeling
program. Use the File > Import > 3D command to 4. Use the Orbit Workspace tool to rotate the camera
create a 3D Layer. 3D models can be a good source so that you are looking at the 2D box from a different
of background scenery. Or, use a 3D model for a angle.
character’s head, and decorate it with eyes, mouth,

Chapter 6: Layer Types

104 Anime Studio Pro 10
Users Manual

5. Create a new layer, and add another extruded box on

that layer. The new box faces the current angle of the
Vector Layers
camera. Vector layers are the most common layer in Anime Studio
projects. Artwork that you create in Anime Studio is always
6. Rotate the camera so that you can see how the two
contained in a vector layer. Tools are available for drawing
boxes relate to each other.
and editing curves, setting up fills and outlines, and
connecting your drawings to bones.

Vector Layers

The tools available for working with vector layers essentially

New layer alignment features
make up a 2D drawing program. You can draw lines and
curves, re-shape existing curves, and manipulate objects in
various ways. There are a couple ways that Anime Studio
differs from other drawing programs. First, everything you
draw in Anime Studio is a set of points and curves. In many
Chapter 6: Layer Types
105 Anime Studio Pro 10
Users Manual

programs, when you draw a circle, you get a circle object,

or you may type some text to create a text object. In
Image Layers
Anime Studio, once you’ve created the circle or the text, Image layers are a way of importing artwork into Anime
there’s no difference between them whatsoever - they’re Studio that was created in other programs. Any program
both collections of curves. One happens to be in the that can produce image files can be used together with
shape of a circle, and the other in the shape of some text. Anime Studio this way. For example, a painting program,
There are advantages in treating all objects the same: photo editor, or 3D modeling program can produce
first, you never have to worry about what type of object images that can be used in an Anime Studio image layer.
you’re working with - the answer is always the same: a You can’t edit the pixels of one of these images in Anime
set of points and curves. The other advantage is that any Studio, but you can move, resize and rotate image layers,
operation you can perform on hand-drawn curves can be and attach them to skeletons for more complex animation.
performed on text, or a circle, or whatever.
When an image layer is first selected, the
The other feature of Anime Studio’s drawing mode that
default tool is set to the Transform Layer tool.
is different from many other drawing programs is the
concept of welding. In Anime Studio, two points can be
welded together into a single point. In fact, any number of
points can be welded together. When points are welded
together, moving one of them moves them all, along with
any curves that pass through that point. This is particularly
useful when you start to animate objects. For example, if
you want to move a character’s nose, then welding it to
the face might not be a bad idea. That way, however you
distort the nose or the face, they’ll always stay connected.

Chapter 6: Layer Types

106 Anime Studio Pro 10
Users Manual

movie file, Anime Studio will use the movie’s alpha channel
(if present) to composite the movie with other elements in
the scene.

Group Layers
Group layers are used to group together multiple sub-layers
so that they can be manipulated as one. They’re also very
useful for organizing complex projects. You can think of a
group layer as a folder that can contain files (layers) and
other folders (more group layers). When you move a group
layer, turn it invisible, or apply an effect (such as a layer
shadow), these are all applied to every layer contained
within the group.
Image Layers

The best image format to use with Anime Studio is PNG.

PNG files have high quality, good compression, and
support full alpha channels for transparency effects.
Although PNG is the preferred format for use with Anime
Studio, you can also use JPEG, BMP, Targa, or GIF images.
Image layers can also be used to bring external movies into
Anime Studio. Instead of selecting a still image, select a
movie file when creating a new image layer. Anime Studio
can import QuickTime (Windows and Mac OS) or AVI
(Windows only) movies as image layers. When importing a

Chapter 6: Layer Types

107 Anime Studio Pro 10
Users Manual

Group Layers
Bone Layers

Setting up bones is sort of a pre-animation phase. You

Bone Layers don’t draw shapes in Bone layers, you set up controls that
will help you animate later on. The purpose of setting up
Bone layers are similar to Group layers - they can both bones is exactly what you might think: creating a rigid
group together multiple sub-layers that can then be skeleton inside your drawing. Later on, during animation,
manipulated as a single object. However, bone layers when you want to move an object, bones make the job
have an additional feature: In a bone layer, you can easy. By moving a single bone in the arm of a character,
set up a skeleton that can be used to manipulate your for example, the whole arm will move with it. Around the
artwork. A skeleton is exactly what it sounds like - an elbow, the drawing of the arm will bend and stay smooth
internal structure that can move the outer, visible portion of (as long as the bones were set up well with the Bone
your artwork. editing tools).

Chapter 6: Layer Types

108 Anime Studio Pro 10
Users Manual

Bones by themselves don’t really do much of anything: you

can move them around, but they’re invisible in the final
Anime Studio output. To really make use of bones, they
need to be attached to objects in other layers. This process
is covered in “Bones” on page 83 in your Anime Studio
Tutorial Manual, and also “Chapter 5: Bone Tools” on page
73.
When you create a skeleton out of a group of bones, the
bones have a hierarchical relationship. Each bone has a
single parent (or maybe no parent at all, in which case it’s
called a root bone), and each bone may have multiple
children. The relationship between parent and children is
that when a parent bone is moved, all of its children move
with it. When a child bone is moved however, it’s parent
remains unchanged.
Below is a picture of a skeleton created in Anime Studio.
Red arrows have been added that point from each bone
to its parent (the spine has no parent and is referred to as A skeleton hierarchy
the root of the skeleton). Note that the currently selected
bone is highlighted in red, and its parent (if it has one) is When you use bones with a vector layer, you need to
highlighted in blue, as shown below. consider how the bones and curve control points will
interact. When a bone moves, it moves the points around
it as well. Each bone has a region of influence (which
you can adjust). Points move mostly with the bone whose
region of influence they fall within, although other bones
can still have an effect on them. Below is a picture of some
points and bones. Notice the region of influence around
Chapter 6: Layer Types
109 Anime Studio Pro 10
Users Manual

each bone. The second picture shows the same object

after the bones have been moved. Notice how the points
follow the bones according to regions of influence (and
how the curves pass smoothly through the points, wherever
they move to).

Moving bones moves the curve control points

Switch Layers
A bone and vector setup
Switch layers are used to group together multiple layers,
much like Group layers. However, switch layers have
an interesting twist: only one of their sub-layers can be
displayed at a time.

Chapter 6: Layer Types

110 Anime Studio Pro 10
Users Manual

• Anime Studio Debut uses the volume of the audio

track to determine which mouth shape to use. When
the audio is quiet, the mouth is more closed. When the
audio is louder, the mouth is more open.

• Anime Studio Pro uses a production sync library that

analyzes the audio track to determine the phonemes
(the basic components of speech) that are being
used. Results are improved when you enter the spoken
words into Anime Studio. After the production sync
analysis is done, Anime Studio Pro applies the matching
mouth shape.
The mouth shapes supported by the Anime Studio lip
Switch Layers syncing features follow standards developed by Preston
Blair, an animator from the early days of Disney.
One reason you might want to do this is for lip-sync
To set up a mouth that can lip sync, you will
animation. In this case, each of the sub-layers would
need to create a switch layer that contains at
correspond to a mouth shape for a particular sound.
least ten sub-layers with different mouth shapes.
Many of the characters in the Library provide switch layers Shapes should be created for the appearance of
for the visemes that Anime Studio supports. For example, the mouth when at rest, and when speaking each of
if you load Jace from the Version 6 character library and the 9 before-mentioned phonemes. The Preston Blair
expand the Mouth layer, you’ll see support for the following mouth shapes are discussed in more detail at http://
visemes and mouth positions: Rest, Etc, FV, L, MBP, O, E, AI, minyos.its.rmit.edu.au/aim/a_notes/mouth_
U, and WQ. shapes_01.html.
Anime Studio includes powerful automatic lip-syncing
which is a big time saver .

Chapter 6: Layer Types

111 Anime Studio Pro 10
Users Manual

For examples of how lip syncing is used, see 10 B

“Tutorial 5.1: Automatic Lip-Sync” on page 22 A
140 in your Anime Studio Tutorial Manual and 37 C
“Tutorial 5.2: Phoneme Lip-Sync” on page 142 in 40 C
your Anime Studio Tutorial Manual.
• The first line is a header that just tells Anime Studio that
the file is a switch data file.
If you prefer more control over lip-syncing than what the
automatic built-in lip-syncing offers, you can take full • The following lines contain two items each:
manual control over the process using a separate, and
free, tool called Papagayo (see http://www.lostmarble. • The first item is a keyframe.
com/papagayo/). In Papagayo, you type in the words
ƒƒ The second item is the name of one of the switch
that are being spoken. Papagayo then uses a phoneme
group’s sub-layers. (In this example, the switch
dictionary to break down the words into spoken phoneme
layer should have three sub-layers, named “A”,
components. These are lined up on a timeline, along with
“B”, and “C”.)
the audio waveform.
If you make changes to the switch data file outside
Initially, the lineup on the timeline in Papagayo is rough
of Anime Studio, and you want to incorporate those
and the phonemes are spaced evenly. You then shift
changes, you will need to re-load the data file. To do this,
words and phonemes along the timeline so that they line
double-click the Switch layer in the Layers window, and
up better with the actual sounds you hear. The final result is
in the dialog that opens up, go to the Switch tab, press
saved out as a “switch data file” that can be imported into
Source Data and re-select the data file.
Anime Studio.
You don’t have to use a data file to work with Switch layers
You can also create a switch data file by hand. To do this,
- you can also control them manually from within Anime
the data file should look like this:
Studio. To control which sub-layer is displayed at any frame
MohoSwitch1 in your animation, just right-click on the Switch layer in the
1 A Layers window. A pop-up menu will appear that lets you
2 A choose which sub-layer to display.
Chapter 6: Layer Types
112 Anime Studio Pro 10
Users Manual

Anime Studio includes several sample mouth sets for doing • You no longer need to select a switch layer’s
lip-sync with Papagayo - take a look at those files to see active child in the Layers palette. You can now
how a switch layer should be set up. Also, check out the lip- simply ALT+COMMAND/CTRL+Right-click on it in the
sync tutorials included in this manual. workspace.
Switch layers have a feature that allows for smooth
• When a layer is added to an empty switch group, it
switching. To use this feature, all the sub-layers need to be
becomes the active child at frame 0.
Vector layers, and they need to have the same number
of control points. Then, when switching, Anime Studio • When a new layer is created inside a switch group,
can smoothly transition between sub-layers. To enable Anime Studio will assign a unique name (which is
this feature, turn on Interpolate sub-layers in the Switch necessary for proper switch group functionality).
layer’s properties dialog. An example of using this feature is
included in one of the mouth sets mentioned above. • When a layer inside a switch group is renamed, the
switch animation channel is updated to use the new
Switch layers can be set up with skeletons, just like bone
name to preserve existing switch animation.
layers. More accurately, a switch layer is a bone layer, just
a specialized one. If you add bones to a switch layer, you • When a new layer is created inside a switch group at
can use them (for example) to change the shape of a a frame other than zero, that new layer is not marked
mouth as it speaks, bending it into a smile or a frown. invisible prior to that time. (The switch layer takes care
Don’t feel restricted to lip-sync animation with switch layers. of its visibility, so setting it separately is redundant and
They have a lot of potential uses (controlling eyes, syncing makes it difficult to re-time the frame-by-frame effect.)
to music & sound effects, switching between different
hand gestures, etc.). • When a new shape is drawn in a vector layer inside a
switch group at a frame other than zero, that shape will
Improvements to switch layers now include behaviors that not be set invisible prior to that time. (Same reasoning
will make them work better for frame-by-frame animation. as for new layers.)
These improvements include the following changes and
enhancements:

Chapter 6: Layer Types

113 Anime Studio Pro 10
Users Manual

If the children of a switch layer have layer

colors assigned to them (as described in
“Using Layer Colors” on page 170), the
corresponding keys in the timeline will have the
same color when those children are active. This
makes it easier to see at a quick glance what switch
layer is active at what time.

Particle Layers
Particle layers are a way to simulate such effects as flowing
water, fire, bubbles, or other effects that you can imagine
Particle Layers
are made up of many small objects. A particle layer is like
a group layer in that it can contain sub-layers. However,
instead of just displaying its sub-layers as they are, a The direction that a particle layer sprays its particles is
particle layer will automatically animate its sub-layers so illustrated below.
that they appear to be flowing outward from the particle
layer’s origin.

Chapter 6: Layer Types

114 Anime Studio Pro 10
Users Manual

The complete list of settings for a particle layer is as follows.

These settings are accessible in the Layer Properties dialog,
under the Particles tab:

Particle spray direction

During an animation, a particle layer can be turned on or

off. When it is turned off, no more particles will be created,
but those that already exist will continue to the end of their
lifetime. To turn a particle layer on or off, right-click its entry
in the Layers window. A popup menu will appear to let you
turn the particle layer on or off. Particles Layer Settings

Chapter 6: Layer Types

115 Anime Studio Pro 10
Users Manual

• Particle Count: The total number of particles visible at • On at start: Whether the particle layer should be on at
any one time the start of the animation

• Preview particles: The number of particles displayed in • Full speed start: If the layer is on, this checkbox
the working view (a smaller number than Particle count indicates if it should be running at full speed, or just
keeps the working view from slowing down too much) starting

• Lifetime (frames): The number of frames before a • Orient particles: If checked, then the particles will
particle is recycled and sent back to the source. If set rotate to face the direction they’re moving in
to zero, the particles will keep going for the duration of
the animation. • Free-floating: If unchecked, then the particles will be
tied to the particle layer if it is moved
• Source width: The width of the spray source
• Evenly spaced: if checked, then the particles will be
• Source height: The height of the spray source released in even time increments

• Source depth: The depth of the spray source. If set to • Randomize playback: Normally, particles will start
a number greater than zero, then some particles will their animation from the beginning when they are
appear closer to the camera than others. first created. If this box is checked, then particles will
start playback at a random time. This is useful when
• Velocity: The speed that particles start at (a value of 2 simulating things like crowds of people when you use
will cause a particle to cross the entire screen vertically effects (see “Effects” on page 149 in your Anime
in one second) Studio Tutorial Manual).

• Velocity spread: The amount of random variation in • Use Base Layer as Source: Check this option if you
the particles’ velocity want to use the bottommost layer as a shape that
generates your particles. For more information on
• Damping: This acts kind of like air resistance, or
this feature, see “Tutorial 6.4.2: Custom Particle
backwards acceleration

Chapter 6: Layer Types

116 Anime Studio Pro 10
Users Manual

Generators” on page 253 in your Anime Studio Tutorial

Manual.

• Direction: An angle indicating direction to spray

particles in (see above figure)

• Spread: How wide the spray should be (see above

figure) (a value of 360 will cause particles to spray in all
directions)

• Acceleration: The direction of acceleration (straight

down simulates gravity)

• Rate: The rate of acceleration

Note Layers

Note Layers
By default, Note layers do not appear in final rendered
Anime Studio’s Note layers work kind of like sticky notes. output, so your audience doesn’t need to see your
You can add a note layer to remind yourself of something comments to yourself. However, if for some reason you
you need to work on, or to explain to other animators some do want a note to appear in the final product, you can
important aspect of your project file. If you add a note do that by unchecking Don’t render this layer in the Layer
layer at a frame other than zero, the note will only appear Settings dialog.
starting at that frame. That way, you can add notes that
refer to specific parts of your animation (ex. “Use more
exaggeration here!”). Audio Layers
Audio layers allow you to add an audio file to your project.
You will be prompted to select a file after choosing this

Chapter 6: Layer Types

117 Anime Studio Pro 10
Users Manual

layer type. A graphic representation of the audio file When importing OBJ files, Anime Studio will also load any
appears in the timeline after the file is selected. associated material file, importing the objects’ colors and
texture maps.
3D layers can also be used with skeletons. Using a bone
layer, you can warp a 3D model by moving bones
around. Keep in mind that while 3D layers are truly three-
dimensional, bone layers are only 2D. So, any manipulation
you do with bones is going to be limited to some degree.
Because Anime Studio is not a true 3D program, not all
3D features are supported. In particular, lighting. Any 3D
model you import will be flat shaded. However, because
Anime Studio does support texture maps, you can simulate
lighting if a texture map has lighting effects baked into it.
There are lots of quality 3D programs we recommend for
Audio Layers use with Anime Studio Pro. The following are products that
will work well with Anime Studio Pro:

• Poser
3D Layers
• Amapi
3D layers are a way for you to import true 3D models into
Anime Studio. When a 3D layer is rotated in space (or the For further information on importing 3D objects within
camera moves around it), you actually see that backside Anime Studio Pro please see the Anime Studio Tutorials
of the model. Anime Studio supports importing OBJ files section at http://my.smithmicro.com/tutorials/.
into 3D layers - OBJ is a common 3D file format that most
3D programs can read and write.

Chapter 6: Layer Types

118 Anime Studio Pro 10
Users Manual

When preparing a 3D model for use with Patch layers are intended for use when you are
Anime Studio, it’s usually a good idea to constructing a character such as a humanoid figure. For
triangulate the model before exporting it as an OBJ example, let’s say you are drawing different body parts on
file. This will eliminate any problems with concave or different layers in a bone group. The head is on one layer,
complex faces. the torso on another, upper left and right arms on their own
layers, and so on. Each layer has its own outline and fill.
However, when one joint meets another joint, there are
Patch Layers outlines that overlap with other body parts. This is where
patch layers come in, because you can blend the two
Patch layers are used in the Character Wizard to create layers together and “hide” the line where they connect.
objects that appear both in front of and behind objects on
Look at the following example, which shows a number of
another layer. You can also create patch layers manually.
body parts that are placed inside a Bone layer named
Skeleton.

Patch Layers

Chapter 6: Layer Types

119 Anime Studio Pro 10
Users Manual

3. A dialog asks you to select a target, and you can

select the target layer from the Target drop-Down
menu. Choose the Torso layer and click OK.

4. You’ll see a new circle in the project window. The

circle is the patch. The patch will be named according
to the target layer that you selected in the Patch Layer
dialog. In the case of our example, the patch layer is
named Torso-Patch.

5. Use the Transform Layer tool to position and scale

the patch so that the lines are covered. It should be
positioned at the point where the shoulder will rotate.

Determine the areas that you want to blend with underlying

layers.

Let’s say you want to blend the area between the torso
and the right upper arm (Upper Arm R), which appears
directly above the torso in the Layers window. To do this,
you would follow these steps:
1. Select the Upper Arm R layer, so that the new Patch
layer will appear above it.

2. Create a new Patch layer in the Layers window.

Chapter 6: Layer Types

120 Anime Studio Pro 10
Users Manual

Double-click the Patch layer to change the target

if necessary.

The new Patch Layer in place.

6. Use the Manipulate Bones tool to test the positioning of

your patch.

If you need to change the target at any time,

you can double-click the Patch layer and
choose a new target from the Patch tab in the Layer
Settings dialog.

Chapter 6: Layer Types

121 Anime Studio Pro 10
Users Manual

Chapter 7: Layer Tools

The following tools are available to be used with any type
of layer. Their purpose is to modify an entire layer, not just
an individual object in that layer.
If a tool has the following symbol next to it: , then it can
Reset tool options.
be used for animation - using the tool at different frames
in the timeline will cause the object you adjust to change
over time.
Transformation
Anime Studio has a smart tool palette, which
shows and hides tools based on their need. Use this tool to translate, rotate, or scale the entire
The position of the tool shown in the screenshots layer. It doesn’t matter what objects are selected -
may differ, depending on the selected layer in the everything in the layer will move when you use this tool.
Layers palette, and the current time in the timeline.
When the contents of the layer are selected, a pair of
rectangles will surround the items in the layer.
Click the tool icon in the properties bar to
display a submenu. Choose Reset Tool to
reset the current tool to its default settings. Choose
Reset All Tools to reset all tools to their default
settings.

Chapter 7: Layer Tools

122 Anime Studio Pro 10
Users Manual

When you move an object forward or

backward in Z, it appears to move toward
the center of the camera. What you are seeing is a
perspective effect. If you want to move an object
backward but keep the visual size the same, press
the SHIFT and ALT keys together while you transform
the layer. You will see the object move backward or
forward, but it will also be transformed along the X
and Y axes as well. This will make the layer appear as
though it is moving forward or backward from its
center.

Transformation rectangle When you release the mouse after

transforming the layer with the SHIFT+ALT keys,
it will appear as though the layer pops back to its
• To translate a layer: Click anywhere inside the inner
original size. If you rotate the camera you’ll see that
rectangle to move the layer to a new location.
the object has become larger. This helps you
• Hold the Shift key while translating to constrain the maintain the same composition from the view of the
movement to straight horizontal or vertical movement. camera, allowing you to compose your scene in 2D
but then add depth to it in Anime Studio. As you
ƒƒ Hold the Alt key while translating to move the layer move the object forward or backward the change
on the Z (depth) axis. in scale reflects the amount that the object is
moved. After you release the mouse, the object
changes scale to retain the original composition of
the scene.

Chapter 7: Layer Tools

123 Anime Studio Pro 10
Users Manual

• To rotate a layer: Click in the area between the inner When you are working with a 3D camera, the
and outer rectangles, and drag up, down, left, or right original plane of the object might not be the
to rotate the layer around its origin point. best place to move the object. You can use the
Pan and Tilt camera tools to position the camera
• Hold the Shift key while rotating to snap the rotation to along the plane in which you want to move the
45 degree angles. object, and then use the Transform Layer tool to
move the object along the plane of the camera’s
• To scale a layer: Click one of the corner handles to
current view.
scale the layer uniformly. Drag a handle on the top,
bottom, right, or left edge of the rectangle to scale the
If the Show Path box in the tool options area is checked,
object horizontally or vertically.
then the motion path for the current layer will be displayed
• Press the Alt key while scaling to maintain the volume in the working area when this tool is active. This makes it
of the object while you scale ... in other words, if easier to visualize and plan out the motion of a layer.
you increase the height of an object, the width will Direct Path Editing: To edit the motion path directly, hold
decrease; or if you increase the width of an object, the down the Ctrl key (Windows) or Cmd key (Mac) , then
height will decrease. click and drag anywhere on the motion path to adjust the
curve that the layer will follow through space.
Nudging: When this tool is active, you can nudge a
layer by small increments by holding down the Ctrl key
(Windows) or Cmd key (Mac) and pressing the arrow keys.
Hold down Shift in addition to Ctrl/Cmd to nudge the layer
by a greater increment.
Transformation

Chapter 7: Layer Tools

124 Anime Studio Pro 10
Users Manual

Tool Options (for Translating) • Scale Y: Allows you to enter a numeric value for scaling
along the Y axis.

• Scale Z: Allows you to enter a numeric value for scaling

along the Z axis.

Transformation Options for Translating

Tool Options (for Rotating)
• Position X: Allows you to numerically enter a value for
the X coordinate.

• Position Y: Allows you to numerically enter a value for

the Y coordinate. Transformation Options for Rotating

• Position Z: Allows you to numerically enter a value for

the Z coordinate. • Angle: Allows you to enter a numerical value for
rotation along the Z axis.

Tool Options (for Scaling)

Tool Options (Other)

Transformation Options for Scaling

Other Transformation Options
• Scale X: Allows you to enter a numeric value for scaling
along the X axis.
Chapter 7: Layer Tools
125 Anime Studio Pro 10
Users Manual

• Reset: If pressed at Frame 0, resets a layer back to its

default value. If pressed at any other frame, resets the
layer to the value or values set at frame 0.

• Show Path: Check this option to display the motion

path on the layer. Uncheck the option to turn the
motion path display off.
Set Origin
• Flip Layer Horizontally: Click this button to flip
horizontally.
Although you can change the origin at any time,
the position of a layer’s origin is not animated. We
• Flip Layer Vertically: Click this button to flip vertically.
recommend setting the layer’s origin just once, and then
leaving it alone for the rest of the animation - otherwise
Set Origin unpredictable movement can occur. In most cases, you
will never need to change the origin of a layer at all.
With the Set Origin tool selected, click anywhere in
the layer to set the origin to that point. The origin of
a layer is indicated by the crosshair displayed when editing
Tool Options
that layer. The origin is the point that the layer rotates
around when using the Rotate Layer tool, and the point
that the layer resizes around when using the Transform
Layer tool. The location of the origin can also define how a
layer will move when it is attached to a group of bones. Set Origin Options

• Origin X: Allows you to view or enter a numerical value

for the X origin

Chapter 7: Layer Tools

126 Anime Studio Pro 10
Users Manual

• Origin Y: Allows you to view or enter a numerical value

for the Y origin

• Reset: If pressed at Frame 0, resets a layer back to its

default value. If pressed at any other frame, resets the
layer to the value or values set at frame 0.

• Flip Layer Horizontally: Click this button to flip Follow Path

horizontally.

• Flip Layer Vertically: Click this button to flip vertically. If a layer follows a path, an extra squiggly line
will appear on top of their icon in the Layers
palette.
Follow Path
This tool allows you to assign any layer to follow a path in
your scene. You will need two layers, one with the path,
and the other with the object that will follow the path.

Previously, there was no indication that a

layer was set to follow a path. This could
make it very confusing when opening a file you
weren’t familiar with (or hadn’t used in a while).
Certain layers might move in unexpected ways.
Now, layers that follow a path get a little extra
squiggly line (indicating path following) on top of
their icon in the Layers palette.

Chapter 7: Layer Tools

127 Anime Studio Pro 10
Users Manual

You can click and drag left or right with the Follow Path
tool to position the object along the curve at any point.
You can then move to a later frame in your animation and
set the object to a new position. This allows you to animate
the object travelling along the path.

Two layers, one with a path, and another with a character or

object

To use the tool, select the layer that contains object

that you want to follow the path. Then select the Follow
Path tool from the Layer section of the toolbox. The path
appears in the scene after you select the Follow Path tool.
Click the path in the scene to reposition the object to the The fish before and after it is placed on the path with the
beginning of the curve. Follow Path tool

Chapter 7: Layer Tools

128 Anime Studio Pro 10
Users Manual

You can set the object to rotate so that it follows the path. You can also combine path following with
Double-click the object’s layer in the Layers window, which the Stroke Exposure tool, and expose the
opens to the General tab. Check the Rotate to follow path stroke of the curve while the object moves along the
option in the Options section of the Layer Settings dialog path.
and click OK. This causes the object to automatically orient
itself to follow the path to which it is assigned.
If you hold down the Alt key while clicking on
a curve, the object will now bend along the
curve. This allows for text bending, characters that
warp along a path (like a snake), and so on. You
can animate this effect. For example if you go to
another point in the timeline, you can Alt-click
somewhere else on the curve.

Check the Rotate to Follow Path option in the Layer Settings

dialog to orient the object to the path

Chapter 7: Layer Tools

129 Anime Studio Pro 10
Users Manual

• Percentage: Allows you to enter a numerical value for

the position of the object on the path. A value of 0
places the object at the beginning of the path, while a
value of 100 places the object at the end.

Rotate Layer XY
Click and drag up and down to rotate the layer around
the X (horizontal) axis. This is a true 3D rotation, so that one
half of the layer rotates into the screen and the other half
out of the screen.
Click and drag side-to-side to rotate the layer around
Press the Alt key while using the Follow Path tool to bend the
the Y (vertical) axis. This is a true 3D rotation, so that one
object along the path
half of the layer rotates into the screen and the other half
out of the screen. You can verify this by using the Orbit
Workspace tool to change your view of the scene.

Tool Options

Follow Path Options Rotate Layer XY

Chapter 7: Layer Tools

130 Anime Studio Pro 10
Users Manual

Tool Options

Rotate Layer XY Options

Shear Layer

• X Rotation: Allows you to enter a numerical value for

rotation along the X axis.
Tool Options
• Y Rotation: Allows you to enter a numerical value for
rotation along the Y axis.

• Reset: If pressed at Frame 0, resets a layer back to its

default value. If pressed at any other frame, resets the
layer to the value or values set at frame 0. Shear Layer Options

Shear Layer • Shear X: Allows you to view or enter a numerical value

for shear along the X axis.
Use this tool to shear the current layer horizontally or
• Shear Y: Allows you to view or enter a numerical value
vertically. Click and drag to shear, or slant the
for shear along the Y axis.
current layer to the left, right, up, or down.
• Shear Z: Allows you to view or enter a numerical value
for shear along the Z axis.

Chapter 7: Layer Tools

131 Anime Studio Pro 10
Users Manual

• Reset: If pressed at Frame 0, resets a layer back to its

default value. If pressed at any other frame, resets the
layer to the value or values set at frame 0.

Layer Selector
The Layer Selector helps you quickly find and edit the Layer Selector
vector, image, and 3D content in your layers. It is very
helpful, especially when you have dozens or hundreds of
layers in your project and can’t remember which layer a
specific shape appears on.
Inserting Text and Word Balloons
Anime Studio allows you to enter text in your projects. While
This tool can be also be used by Alt+Right-
doing so, you have the option to automatically create a
clicking on the object that you want to
word balloon that encloses the text.
select.
The following example explains how you can add text and
You can Alt+Right click any layer type that has visible a word balloon inside a project:
contents. If you click a shape that appears in a Bone 1. Choose one of the following to open the Insert Text
group, for example, it will select the vector layer that dialog:
appears within that Bone group.
There are no options for this tool. Simply click on the object ƒƒ Click the Insert Text Tool, located in the Layer Tools
you want to select, and its layer is automatically selected section.
for editing. If there are multiple objects in the layer, the
object that you click on is the selected object.

Chapter 7: Layer Tools

132 Anime Studio Pro 10
Users Manual

Insert Text

ƒƒ Choose Draw > Insert Text

ƒƒ Use the keyboard shortcut COMMAND/CTRL+T. The

Insert Text dialog appears.

Insert Text Options

Chapter 7: Layer Tools

133 Anime Studio Pro 10
Users Manual

2. The Select Font list displays all of the fonts on your

system. Select the font that you want to use from the
list.

Enter your text in the text field.

4. Use the remaining settings to set additional text

properties as follows:

Select Font list

3. Enter the text in the Text field. The project window will
update as you type.

Word balloons will automatically resize to

accommodate the text. If you want to break
the text into multiple lines, you will need to press the
Enter key where you want a line break to occur.
Chapter 7: Layer Tools
134 Anime Studio Pro 10
Users Manual

ƒƒ Stroke: Check this option if you want your text to

have an outline. Click the Color swatch to select
the outline color.

ƒƒ Width: Enter the desired pixel width for the outline

stroke in the Width field.

ƒƒ Justification: Click the justification type that you

want to apply to the text. Choices are Left, Center
(the default), or Right.

ƒƒ Create One Shape: With this option checked, your

text object will be added to the currently selected
layer. This text will be added as a vector object
and will not be editable.

ƒƒ If you leave the Create Text Layer option

unchecked, your text object can be
manipulated just like anything else. This includes
using any of the drawing tools to distort its shape,
Select fill, stroke, and other font options.
or to add new points in the middle of a character.
This also means that in order to move or rotate a
ƒƒ Style 1 or Style 2: Select a saved style to assign to text object, you need to select all the points in the
the text. object. This is easy to do using the Select Points tool
ƒƒ Fill: Check this option if you want your text to be - just click on the filled in area of the text to select
filled with a solid color. Uncheck the option if all of it.
you want your text to only use an outline stroke
(described next). For filled text, click the color
swatch to select the fill color.

Chapter 7: Layer Tools

135 Anime Studio Pro 10
Users Manual

If your text is added as a vector object, you ƒƒ Create Text Layer: With this option checked. a
can use the Freehand tool and Delete Edge new text layer will be created, and you can easily
tool to create uniquely colored text. First, create edit the text afterward. To do so, open the Layer
your text as normal, making sure that there is a Settings dialog and click the Text tab to make your
stroke on the text. Then use the Freehand tool (with changes.
its Auto Weld option on) to slice the text or letter up
ƒƒ Scale: Use the Scale slider to increase or decrease
into shapes that you can color differently. Finally, use
the text size, or enter a scale value in the Scale
the Delete Edge tool to remove the lines that hang
field.
out from the edges of the text. See “Freehand” on
page 35 and “Delete Edge” on page 41 for ƒƒ Leading: Use the Leading slider to adjust the
more information on how to use those tools. spacing that appears between multiple lines of
text. Move toward the left to decrease space,
and toward the right to increase space. Negative
values are also valid.

ƒƒ Kerning: Use the Kerning slider to adjust the

amount of space between letters. Move toward
the left to decrease space, and toward the right to
increase space. Negative values are also valid.
5. If you want to use a word balloon to enclose your text,
select one of the word balloons from the Select word
balloon type list. Otherwise, choose <none> if you do
not want to use a word balloon.

Create colorful text using the Freehand and Delete Edge tools 6. Additional word balloon options (custom for each
with the Insert Text tool. word balloon type) appear beneath the selection.
These options allow you to change the appearance
of the word balloon. For example, you might find
Chapter 7: Layer Tools
136 Anime Studio Pro 10
Users Manual

options that affect the appearance and placement 7. Use the following settings to determine the color and
of the balloon tail, or whether the outer edges of the size of the word balloon:
balloon are smooth or cloud-like. Each of these balloon
morphs are set to zero, initially. You can move the dials
in any combination to change the appearance of the
balloon. The preview window updates as you make
your changes. The text will appear in your document,
pre-filled with the current fill color and style, and it can
be resized and positioned just like any other object.

Choose a word balloon type, if desired, and use the balloon

morphs to customize its appearance.

ƒƒ Custom Fill: Check this option if you want to select

a fill color for the word balloon. Click the color
swatch to choose the desired fill color.

Choose a word balloon type, if desired, and use the balloon ƒƒ Custom Stroke: Check this option if you want to
morphs to customize its appearance. select a stroke (outline) color for the balloon. Click

Chapter 7: Layer Tools

137 Anime Studio Pro 10
Users Manual

the color swatch to choose the desired stroke

color.

ƒƒ Stroke Width: Enter the width of the stroke used for

the word balloon in pixels.

ƒƒ Size Relative to Text: Use this slider to increase

or decrease the amount of white space that
appears between the text and the outer edges
of the balloon. Move the slider toward the left to
decrease the amount of space, and toward the
right to increase the amount of space.

ƒƒ Flip Vertical: Check this option to flip the object

vertically. For example, if the tail is on the bottom
of the balloon by default, it will place the tail on
the top.
Text added as a text layer.
ƒƒ Flip Horizontal: Check this option to flip the object
horizontally. For example, if the tail is on the left
side of the balloon by default, it will flip the balloon
so that the tail is on the right side. Creating Word Balloons
ƒƒ Constrain Proportions: Check this option if you
You can use Anime Studio Pro to create word balloons for
want to keep an equal amount of white space
your own use. Briefly, the following conditions should be
around the width and height of the balloon. When
met when creating word balloons:
unchecked, the height of the balloon will be closer
to the text, and the width of the balloon will have • The Anime Studio files must contain a rectangular point
more white space. group named Text Region. If this point group is missing,
8. Press OK to add the text to your project. the balloon will be considered invalid.
Chapter 7: Layer Tools
138 Anime Studio Pro 10
Users Manual

• If you want to add morph targets to your word balloon, gradient shape will be copied to the clipboard in a
you will need to use the Window > Actions command Web color format. You will then be able to paste that
to open the Actions window. Use the New Action property into the Color Picker to assign that color to a
button in the Actions toolbar to design single-frame fill, stroke, or project background color.
animations that you can use for your morph targets.
For further information on this process, see “Creating
Morphs” on page 303.

• Default word balloons for Anime Studio appear in

the Resources > Support > Word Balloons installation
folder. It is not recommended to put your custom word
balloons in this same folder. Instead, create a content Eyedropper Tool
folder as recommended in “Creating a Content
Folder” on page 8, and place your custom word
balloons in its Word Balloons subfolder.

Eyedropper
To use the Eyedropper, click on a shape to copy its
parameters.
Hold the ALT key to push the current color.

• Press the COMMAND/CTRL key down while you click

to pick up the properties of the underlying object. This
is not limited to vector layers. For example, if you have
a Bone Layer active in the Layers palette but click over
a gradient shape on the stage, the properties of the
Chapter 7: Layer Tools
139 Anime Studio Pro 10
Users Manual

Chapter 8: Special
Tools
Anime Studio includes a number of special tools that are
available in specific circumstances. These tools appear in
the Special section of the tool palette when the conditions Reset tool options.
are met. The sections that follow describe how these
special tools are uses.

Anime Studio has a smart tool palette, which

Poser
shows and hides tools based on their need.
Poser 7 or later must be installed on your system in
The position of the tool shown in the screenshots
order for this feature to work. In addition, the scene
may differ, depending on the selected layer in the
that you import into Anime Studio must contain objects
Layers palette, and the current time in the timeline.
that are contained within your Poser library folders. Refer to
your Poser documentation on how to use, add, and
Click the tool icon in the properties bar to maintain content in your Poser library folders.
display a submenu. Choose Reset Tool to
reset the current tool to its default settings. Choose
Reset All Tools to reset all tools to their default
settings.

Poser

After you create your scene in Poser, save it to a folder

on your hard disk. The file will be saved with a .PZ3 or .PZZ

Chapter 8: Special Tools

140 Anime Studio Pro 10
Users Manual

extension, depending on whether you use compressed files After the Poser scene has been imported, the Poser tool
or not. In Anime Studio, choose the File > Import > Poser is enabled in the Special section of the tool box. You can
Scene command, and select the scene that you saved click one of the body parts to rotate it with the Poser tool,
from Poser. or you can use the Poser Parameters dialog (Window >
Poser Parameters) to rotate or scale the selected body part
Poser scenes that use dynamic hair are very through the use of sliders.
resource intensive. If your Poser scene uses
dynamic hair or other resource-intensive features, be
careful not to use extreme settings.

Rotate or scale Poser actors with dials in the Poser Parameters

dialog

Miki, imported into an Anime Studio scene

Chapter 8: Special Tools
141 Anime Studio Pro 10
Users Manual

To select the character’s root actor (usually Tool Options

the BODY), hold down the ALT key while
clicking the figure with the Poser tool.

The parameters for each body part can be animated. For

example, you can pose the figure on one frame in your
Switch Layer Options
timeline, and then move to a frame that appears later in
the timeline and reposition the body part. Anime Studio will
then animate the in-between frames by interpolating the • Active Child: Use this menu to select the active layer
motion between the keyframes that you set. for the switch function

Switch Layer Particle Layer

This is a specialized tool for use with Switch layers This is a specialized tool for use with Particle layers
only. This tool has no effect if you click and drag in only. This tool has no effect if you click and drag in
the workspace. What it does is supply a popup menu in the workspace. What it does is supply a checkbox in the
the tool options area that lists all the sub-layers of a switch tool options area that lets you control whether the particle
group. You can change the active layer by selecting it layer is turned on or not (emitting particles or not).
from the menu.

Particle Layer
Switch Layer

Chapter 8: Special Tools

142 Anime Studio Pro 10
Users Manual

Options that appear in the Particle Options dialog are

discussed in detail in “Particle Layers” on page 113.
Image Masking
Many Anime Studio users do not use Photoshop or other
similar programs, making it difficult to create images with
transparent backgrounds. The Image Masking tool assists
with this task. This tool helps you clear out and remove
Particle Layer Options background areas from images that you import into Anime
Studio.

Image Masking tool

Tool Options

Image Masking tool

• Clear Mask: Click the Clear Mask button to remove

all areas from the mask and restore the image to its
Particle Options unmasked state.
Chapter 8: Special Tools
143 Anime Studio Pro 10
Users Manual

Click with the Image Masking tool to mask out areas of the
Import an image into your Anime Studio scene
image that you want to hide

After you import an image, select the Image Masking tool

from the Layers section of the tool box. Click on an area
that you want to remove from the background. Click and Video Tracking
drag left or right to control the sensitivity of the tool. Drag
toward the left to decrease the sensitivity, and toward the To use the video tracking feature, you need to have a
right to increase it. Release the mouse button when you movie file in your project. Either import a movie into an
have masked out the desired area. existing project or open a movie file from scratch. The
following sections describe the process of how the video
tracking feature works
Chapter 8: Special Tools
144 Anime Studio Pro 10
Users Manual

Adding Tracking Points

Assume that you have imported a video, and you want to
eventually add an object that will follow the position and
rotation of a person’s thumb and wrist. The first step of the
process is to add tracking points that identify the two points
you want to follow. The Primary tracking point controls
the position of the object’s origin. The Secondary tracking
point controls the angle or scale of the object. To add the
tracking points, select the Video Tracking tool from the
Layer panel.

Video Tracking tool

The first tracking point is added to the thumb
Click on the first point you want to track. You can click, and
then drag to position the point exactly where you want to Now we add the second tracking point for the wrist, and
place it. It is optional, but recommended, that you name name it (appropriately) Wrist.
the tracked point in the Tracker Name field of the status
bar. For example, since we are tracking a thumb here, we
name the tracking point Thumb.

Chapter 8: Special Tools

145 Anime Studio Pro 10
Users Manual

points follow the items you want to track. When you see a
problem, don’t worry ... there are ways to fix them!

After the tracking points are added, keyframes are generated

in the timeline

Fine-tuning Marker Positions

You might notice some places where the tracking points
seem to drift away from the marker, or stop following it
entirely. If this happens, stop the video playback. Go back
The second tracking point is added to the wrist to the beginning of the movie. Zoom in more closely to the
video and use the Video Tracking tool to reposition the
After you place your tracking points, make sure the Video markers that need to be adjusted.
Tracking Tool is still selected. Play the video back and
Choose View > Reset to reset the zoom level of the video
watch the tracking points follow the points you selected.
back to the default. Play the video again and watch for
Playback runs a little slower during video tracking.
any other problems. Keep making adjustments until you
As you play the video back, you’ll notice keyframes are happy with the results. The following movie shows our
being added to the timeline. While the video is playing, markers after they have been adjusted.
watch for any problem spots in the way that the tracking

Chapter 8: Special Tools

146 Anime Studio Pro 10
Users Manual

Markers after they are adjusted (SWF file) The tracking point loses focus after reaching the paper on the
wall (SWF file)

Re-syncing Tracking Points To fix this type of problem, you scrub through the timeline
until you find the point where it loses track. In the next figure
You may also find instances where the tracking points go you see the spot where the thumb appears to blend in with
out of sync with the tracked object. The most likely cause the paper. This is the area that causes the tracking point to
for this is when the tracked area touches or passes over lose sync with the thumb.
another area in the video that is very close in color. For
example, when the tip of the thumb goes in front of the
paper on the wall, there are similar colors in the paper that
cause the tracking point to go out of sync with the thumb.
Fortunately, there is a way to fix that. The next movie shows
one of those problem areas.

Chapter 8: Special Tools

147 Anime Studio Pro 10
Users Manual

Find the point where the point loses focus Advance the video to a clear spot and adjust the tracking
point
After you find the problem frame, advance ahead a
couple of frames until you reach a point where there is Sometimes color similarities occur for a period that is longer
more contrast. Then drag the tracking point to position it than a couple of frames. For example, in our video there is
where it should be. When you press Play, the tracking point a segment where the thumb passes across the face. This is
will continue tracking from there. a much larger area where there is very little color contrast
between the tracked object and the area it passes over.
The solution here is slightly different. You can use
interpolation to calculate the path between two good

Chapter 8: Special Tools

148 Anime Studio Pro 10
Users Manual

points. First, move back to find the last good point before
the thumb crosses the face. Delete the keyframes from that
point until the thumb passes across the face and reaches
the other side.

You can use the Animation > Clear Animation

> From Layer After Current Frame or
Animation > Clear Animation > From Document After
Current Frame commands to delete keyframes from
the current frame to the end of the project.

Here we move to the point just before the thumb passes over
the face ..

Chapter 8: Special Tools

149 Anime Studio Pro 10
Users Manual

... and we delete the keyframes that occur until the thumb
reaches the other side of the face

Jump ahead in the video to a point after the thumb passes

over the face and reposition the tracking point. When
you play the video back, Anime Studio will interpolate the
motion between the keyframes that are missing.

On the other side of the face, we reposition the tracking point

to a good spot

Chapter 8: Special Tools

150 Anime Studio Pro 10
Users Manual

Adjusting Tracking Point Sensitivity

When you add tracking points, you can change the sizes of
the inner and outer rings to adjust the falloff. Click and drag
on the edge of the rings to change the size. The inner ring
defines the region that you are trying to track. For example,
if you are trying to track an eye, adjust the inner ring so that
it surrounds the eye.
The outer ring represents how fast the object can move.
From one frame to the next, the outer ring represents the
maximum distance that you want the object to move. If
you have a fast-moving object you may need to increase
the size of the outer circle for tracking. Expanding the
search area too much can lead to further errors, so you
want to keep it as narrow as possible. The default settings
are generally sufficient for most cases.

Two rings control the sensitivity of the tracking point

Assigning the Tracked Layer

After you set the two points on the object you want to
track, you can then assign the layer that will track those
points. In our example, we returned to Frame 0 and added

Chapter 8: Special Tools

151 Anime Studio Pro 10
Users Manual

an exclamation point to a new layer. Now we want the want the origin of the exclamation point to track the Wrist
exclamation point to follow the hand in the video. point. So, we select Wrist here and choose OK. When
we play the result, the origin of the exclamation point
To assign the layer that will track the points, choose
(represented by the crosshairs) tracks the wrist.
Animation > Track Layer to Video. The Motion Tracking
dialog lists the videos in your scene (in this case, there is
only one).

The crosshairs of the exclamation point, representing the origin,

Select the movie to track, then choose the primary and now follow the primary tracking point
secondary tracking points
The secondary tracking point is optional. You can use it
First we’ll assign the Primary Tracking Point, which is to control either the angle or scale of the tracked layer.
associated with the origin point of the tracked layer. We In our case, we want the thumb to control the direction
of the exclamation point, so we select the thumb as the
Chapter 8: Special Tools
152 Anime Studio Pro 10
Users Manual

secondary tracking point. Then we check the option to

control Angle.

The exclamation point now follows the wrist, and points in the
same direction as the thumb (SWF file)

The secondary tracking point can control the angle or scale of Offsetting the Origin
the tracked layer. We want the thumb to control the angle of
the exclamation point You can use the Transform Points tool in the Draw panel to
move the tracked object away from the origin. The origin
The following movie shows the results of our selections. Now still tracks to the two tracking points, but the object that
when you play the movie, the origin of the exclamation you are tracking can be offset.
point follows the wrist, and the angle of the exclamation
point is follows the angle line from the wrist (primary
tracking point) to the thumb (secondary tracking point).

Chapter 8: Special Tools

153 Anime Studio Pro 10
Users Manual

motion. This allows you to use a video file as a reference

whether or not you want to see the video in your final
project.

You can offset the object from its origin with the Transform
Points tool

Once you have applied video tracking points to another

layer, the two layers are totally independent. The tracking
feature creates standard keyframes. You can edit, add
or remove keyframes to the tracked object. You can also
hide or delete the video layer that was used to initially
create the tracking points and keyframes. The layer that
was tracked to the video will still continue to follow the

Chapter 8: Special Tools

154 Anime Studio Pro 10
Users Manual

Chapter 9: Camera
and Workspace Tools

Camera Tools Reset tool options.

The following tools let you move a virtual camera around in

a scene. Although layers in Anime Studio are primarily 2D,
Anime Studio’s camera can be moved around in true 3D Track Camera
space. The camera tools affect all layers in the document,
not just the currently active layer. This tool moves the camera up and down, and
side-to-side. By giving the project’s layers different
If a tool has the following symbol next to it: , then it can depth values, you can create parallax (depth) effects.
be used for animation - using the tool at different frames Holding the Shift key while using the Track Camera tool will
in the timeline will cause the object you adjust to change constrain the camera to only move vertically or
over time. horizontally. Holding the Alt key will move the camera
forward and back.
Click the tool icon in the properties bar to
display a submenu. Choose Reset Tool to If the Show Path box in the tool options area is checked,
reset the current tool to its default settings. Choose then the motion path for the camera will be displayed
Reset All Tools to reset all tools to their default in the working area when this tool is active. This makes it
settings. easier to visualize and plan out the motion of the camera.
(The camera’s motion path is only visible when the Orbit
Workspace tool has been used to view the scene from
outside the camera.)

Chapter 9: Camera and Workspace Tools

155 Anime Studio Pro 10
Users Manual

Track Camera Tool Roll Camera Tool

Zoom Camera Pan/Tilt Camera

This tool zooms the camera in and out on the scene, This tool changes the viewing angle of the camera.
just like the zoom control on a real camera. Drag the tool up and down to change the tilt angle
Technically, the Zoom Camera tool is changing the field of of the camera, and drag side to side to change the pan
view angle (or focal length) of the virtual camera. angle. Hold the Shift key while using this tool to constrain
the camera to only one direction of rotation.
This tool is most useful when you’ve set up a scene in 3D
(different layers at different depths), and have placed the
camera so that it is sitting somewhere among the layers,
not viewing them from a distance.
Zoom Camera Tool
In order to be consistent with multi-touch
features, the Pan/Tilt Camera tool has had its
mouse direction reversed.
Roll Camera
This tool rolls the camera side to side. Try tilting your
head side to side, and you’ll understand this tool
immediately.
Chapter 9: Camera and Workspace Tools
156 Anime Studio Pro 10
Users Manual

quick way to pan, regardless of what tool is selected in the

toolbar.

Pan/Tilt Camera Tool

Pan Workspace Tool

Workspace Tools
Change your view of the workspace Zoom Workspace
The last group of tools in the toolbar is always available, The Zoom Workspace tool is similar to the Pan Workspace
regardless of the current layer type or the current selected tool: it moves your view of the project, without modifying
object. These are the Workspace tools, and are used to the objects themselves. With this tool, dragging the mouse
control your view of the project, but don’t actually modify left or right zooms your view of the project in and out.
the project itself.
A shortcut for the zoom tool is to click and drag left or
right in the working area using the right mouse button
Pan Workspace while holding down the shift key - it’s a quick way to zoom,
regardless of what tool is selected in the toolbar.
When the Pan Workspace tool is selected, you can click
and drag in the working area to move the project side
to side and up and down. Note that this isn’t the same as
moving the objects in your project - only your view of them
is changing, not where they appear in the final image. A
shortcut for the Pan Workspace tool is to click and drag Zoom Workspace Tool
in the working area using the right mouse button - it’s a
Chapter 9: Camera and Workspace Tools
157 Anime Studio Pro 10
Users Manual

Rotate Workspace Orbit Workspace

The Rotate Workspace tool is used to temporarily rotate The Orbit Workspace tool allows you to view your scene
the workspace. Think of drawing on paper - sometimes you from outside the camera. It’s like holding the scene in your
might rotate the physical paper to draw from a different handing and turning it around to look at it from different
angle. The Rotate Workspace tool works in a similar way angles. This tool is mainly useful when you’re working on
- sometimes (especially with the Freehand drawing tool) a scene with 3D elements (layers with different depths,
it may be helpful to orient the workspace in a different complex camera moves, etc.). Hold the Alt key while using
direction. A shortcut for the Rotate Workspace tool is to this tool to move your view forward and back.
click and drag in the working area using the right mouse
button or the touchwheel on a Wacom tablet, while
holding down the control key - it’s a quick way to rotate,
regardless of what tool is selected in the toolbar.
To get back to the normal view of the scene, you can
Orbit Workspace Tool
select Reset from the View menu, click the Reset View
button in the tool options area of the Anime Studio
window, or press the Home key to reset the view. After using this tool to change your view of the scene, a
blue wedge will be visible in the scene, representing the
location of the camera. To get back to the normal view
of the scene, you can select Reset from the View menu,
click the Reset View button in the tool options area of the
Anime Studio window, or press the Home key to reset the
Rotate Workspace Tool view.

Chapter 9: Camera and Workspace Tools

158 Anime Studio Pro 10
Users Manual

Anime Studio
Windows

Chapter 9: Camera and Workspace Tools

159 Anime Studio Pro 10
Users Manual

Chapter 10: Anime

Studio’s Main Window

Overview
The Anime Studio interface has various windows that are
used for controlling different aspects of a Anime Studio
project. In this chapter we’ll briefly describe some general
components of the Anime Studio project window.
The more complex parts of the Anime Studio interface, Anime Studio Pro interface
such as the Layers window, have their own chapters that
follow this one. Although this chapter will describe how the
main window works, it won’t go into detail about creating
a drawing or animation. Working Area
Most of the Anime Studio project window is taken up by
the working area. This is the region where you will create
and view your drawings and animations. In every project,
even an empty one, two items will be displayed in this
area. The first is a cross marking the center of the currently
active layer. The second is a blue rectangle that indicates
the visible region of the project. Only objects that are
within this rectangle will appear in your final animation.

Chapter 10: Anime Studio’s Main Window

160 Anime Studio Pro 10
Users Manual

keys, or choose Reset from the View menu (see “Chapter

24: View Menu” on page 387).
The background of the working area is usually just a blank
color, but if you drag an image file into the working area, it
will appear in the visibility rectangle. This is a helpful feature
meant to allow you to trace the image with the drawing
tools.
The real work that happens in the working area is not
covered here, but is described in the sections “Anime
Studio Tools” on page 23, and“Anime Studio Windows”
on page 158.

Working Area
Toolbar
Although every project has a fixed image size (for example The toolbar to the left of the main Anime Studio window
640x480 pixels), the working area is basically an endless is where you select which tool you want to work with. The
flat space on which you can draw and animate. The blue available tools will change depending on whether you’re
visibility rectangle mentioned above indicates the actual currently animating, which objects are selected, and what
image area for the project. While working, you may want type of layer is currently active. The purpose and use of
to zoom in or out to see more or less detail in your project. A each tool is described in the following chapters:
quick way to do this is by using your right mouse button. By
dragging the right mouse button in the working area, you • Draw Tools: See “Chapter 3: The Draw Tools” on page
can move around from side to side. If you hold down the 24
shift key while right-clicking and then drag left or right, you
can zoom in and out. If you want to restore a reasonable • Fill Tools: See “Chapter 4: Fill Tools” on page 52
overall view in the working area, press the Escape or Home
• Bone Tools: See “Chapter 5: Bone Tools” on page 73
Chapter 10: Anime Studio’s Main Window
161 Anime Studio Pro 10
Users Manual

• Layer Tools: See “Chapter 7: Layer Tools” on page

121

• Camera Tools: See “Chapter 9: Camera and

Workspace Tools” on page 154

• Workspace Tools: See “Chapter 9: Camera and

Workspace Tools” on page 154

Anime Studio Pro Tools (some tools not shown)

Chapter 10: Anime Studio’s Main Window

162 Anime Studio Pro 10
Users Manual

Status Bar
The status bar along the top of the Anime Studio window
displays a short description of the currently active tool in
the toolbar. If you don’t know what a tool does, the best
thing is to read this manual. However, if you just need a
quick reminder, the status bar can be helpful.

Status Bar
Playback controls

Playback Buttons Display Quality

Near the bottom-left of the main Anime Studio window
Near the bottom-right of the main Anime Studio window
are a set of playback buttons that allow you to play/stop/
is a popup box that lets you customize the level of display
rewind/etc. your animation.
quality in the editing area. The Display Quality popup lets
you control the following options.

Chapter 10: Anime Studio’s Main Window

163 Anime Studio Pro 10
Users Manual

• Shape Effects: Displays shape effects

• Images: Display images in image layers.

• Smooth images: Display images with higher quality

alpha blending.

• Masking: Display masking effects.

• Transparency: Display shape transparency.

• Brushes: Display brush effects applied to shape

outlines.

• Labels: Displays bone labels on the workspace so you

can easily identify what the bones control.

• Fade unselected layers: Fades the content of

unselected layers so that you can more easily see
Display Quality options
and work on the content in layers that are currently
selected.
Note that this only applies to the editing view - when
rendering your final project, everything will be drawn in full • Antialiasing: Draw shapes with smooth edges.
quality, regardless of the following settings.
• GPU Acceleration: Check this option to enable GPU
• Paths: Display points and curves for vector layers. acceleration; uncheck to disable it. GPU Acceleration
improves the display of image and vector layers. An
• Fills: Display the fill colors of vector shapes. OpenGL-compatible graphics card is required.

• Strokes: Display the outlines of vector shapes.

Chapter 10: Anime Studio’s Main Window
164 Anime Studio Pro 10
Users Manual

layers except one, you would leave Fills turned on in the

Display Quality popup, but turn it off in the Current Layer
popup for the layer in question.

Docking and Undocking Windows

You can dock and undock the windows that appear
at the sides and bottom of the Anime Studio interface
to maximize the area that the document window uses.
The windows that you can dock and undock appear in
the upper portion of the Windows menu as shown in the
following figure:

GPU Acceleration on (top) and off (bottom)

A little way to the left of the Display Quality popup is

another popup box labeled Current Layer. This popup Window commands
contains similar options to those found in Display Quality.
The options in Current Layer apply only to the current layer,
Windows that are normally docked (the Tools, Layers,
while Display Quality’s options apply to the entire project.
Timeline and Style windows) will become undocked if you
So, for example, if you wanted to display fill shapes for all
Chapter 10: Anime Studio’s Main Window
165 Anime Studio Pro 10
Users Manual

choose the Window menu command associated with

that window. Choose the command again to redock the
windows in their default space.
Windows that are normally hidden (Actions, Library, Audio
Recording, and Poser Parameters) will open undocked
when choosing the command. Choose the respective
command again to close the window.

Chapter 10: Anime Studio’s Main Window

166 Anime Studio Pro 10
Users Manual

Chapter 11: Layers

Window
An Anime Studio document is composed of layers, each of
which can be independently edited and animated. Layers
can be thought of as transparent sheets of plastic. You
can draw separately on each of these sheets, and the final
picture is the composition of all the sheets stacked on top
of one another.
Layers can be added, removed, copied, and re-ordered.
The Layers window is where all these operations take place
in Anime Studio, and is the topic of this section.

Overview The Layers window

The Layers window has two sections of interest. As seen

below, these consist of the toolbar and the layer list.
The Layer List
Most of the Layers window is taken up with the layer list. This
is a vertical scrolling list of all the layers in the document.
The layers are stacked in order from bottom to top. That is,
when the project is displayed, the lowest layer in the list is
drawn first, followed by the second from the bottom, and

Chapter 11: Layers Window

167 Anime Studio Pro 10
Users Manual

so on up to the top. When two layers contain objects that At the left side of a layer’s entry in the list is a visibility
overlap, this ordering determines which object is in front control, which controls whether a layer is visible or not. If
and which is behind. a pair of eyes is visible in this box, any objects drawn in
the layer will appear in the main Anime Studio window,
Each layer is represented in the list with an entry that looks
as well as in any rendering of the project. If you click this
something like this:
box, the layer will turn invisible and will not appear in the
main Anime Studio window. This can be a convenient
way to remove clutter in the main window when you
don’t need to see all the layers at once. Also, only visible
layers will appear when you render a view of the project
or export an animation - you can generate test movies
much quicker if you turn some layers invisible that don’t
involve what you’re currently working on. Note: the visibility
box of the currently active layer behaves differently. The
currently active layer is always visible (how could you edit it
if it wasn’t?), and clicking its visibility box (while holding the
Alt key) will turn all the other layers at the same level visible
or invisible.
A single layer in Anime Studio To the right of the visibility control is an icon that indicates
what type of layer each entry in the layer list is. The
Only one layer can be edited at a time in the Anime Studio different types of layers include vector, image, group,
working area. The layer currently selected for editing (the bone, switch, particle, 3D, and note layers.
active layer) is displayed in a highlighted color. To select a Certain types of layers act as groups, and can contain
different active layer, just click on its entry in the layer list. A other layers within them. (You can think of them like folders
layer’s entry provides you with three pieces of information: on your hard drive.) These layers have a triangle on their
what type of layer it is, its name, and whether the layer is left side. Clicking this triangle opens and closes these group
visible.
Chapter 11: Layers Window
168 Anime Studio Pro 10
Users Manual

layers, allowing you to access or hide the sub-layers they

contain.
Layers can be re-ordered simply by dragging one layer
above or below another layer. Just click and drag the layer
you want to move - you will see a red insertion bar indicate
where the layer will be placed when you drop it. When the
insertion bar appears at the location you choose, just drop
the layer and you’re done. You can also use this method to
drag sub-layers into or out of group layers.
The last thing you can control in the layer list is the property Layer Toolbar
set of any layer. By double-clicking a layer in the list, a
dialog will appear with various options controlling the
appearance and behavior of the layer. This dialog is • New Layer: Adds a new, empty layer to the project. A
described in the Layer Settings section below. popup menu allows you to choose the type of layer
you want to add. The new layer is placed directly
above the current active layer.
Layer Toolbar
• Duplicate Layer: Makes a copy of the current active
At the top of the Layer panel is a toolbar that provides layer and adds it to the project. This new copy is
several layer operations. The buttons in the toolbar are placed directly above the current active layer. If you
described below: duplicate a group layer, all of the sub-layers inside it will
be duplicated also.

• Delete Layer: Deletes the current active layer. This

operation cannot be undone, so you will be asked to
verify if this is really what you want to do.

Chapter 11: Layers Window

169 Anime Studio Pro 10
Users Manual

• Layer Settings: This command brings up a dialog with

various controls to modify the layer’s appearance and
behavior. The next section, Layer Settings, goes into
detail about these options. The Layer Settings dialog
can also be invoked by double-clicking the current
active layer in the layer list.

• Layer Comps: Click to display a menu of Layer Comp

commands. These commands are discussed in the
following section.

Using Layer Comps

Layer Toolbar
Layer comps are useful if you want to export only selected
items in your scene so that you can composite them
• New Layer Comp: In the Layers window, hide the layers
externally in third party software. For example, you can
and objects that you do not want included in the layer
create a layer comp that relates to background elements,
comp, and make sure that all items that you do want
another that relates to characters, and another that
to include are visible. Then choose New Layer Comp.
relates to foreground elements or titles.
Enter a name for the layer comp in the dialog that
Turn groups on and off until you get elements that logically appears.
belong together. Then create a new layer comp from that
group. At render time, you can then choose to render
specific layer comps as a movie file.
The Layer Comp tool appears in the toolbar in the Layers
window. Click the Layer Comps tool to display a menu that
includes the following commands:

Chapter 11: Layers Window

170 Anime Studio Pro 10
Users Manual

• Show Layer Comp: Allows you to show a single layer

comp by name. Select the layer comp that you want
to show from the list of layer comps.

• Hide Layer Comp: Allows you to hide a single layer

comp by name. Select the layer comp that you want
to hide from the list of layer comps.

• Show All Layers: Shows all previously hidden layer

comps.

• Hide All Layers: Hides all layer comps.

• Delete Layer Comp: Allows you to delete a layer comp

Creating a new layer comp from the list. Deleting a layer comp does not delete
the content contained within it, it only removes the
references to the deleted layer comp.
• Update Layer Comp: Choose this option if you need to
make changes to an existing layer comp. Make sure
that all items that you want to include are visible on Using Layer Colors
the stage. Choose Update Layer Comp and select the
layer comp that you want to change. If you have many different layers in your Layers window,
you can assign colors to them to help find specific content
• Expose Layer Comp: Allows you to “solo” the items in more easily. To do so, double-click the layer in the Layers
a selected layer comp. All other items will be set to window to open the Layer Settings dialog. In the General
invisible. Select the layer that you want to expose from tab, choose a color for the layer from the Layer Color drop-
the list of layer comps. down selector. The layer will then be displayed in the Layers
window in the color that you choose.

Chapter 11: Layers Window

171 Anime Studio Pro 10
Users Manual

Choosing a layer color

Chapter 11: Layers Window

172 Anime Studio Pro 10
Users Manual

Chapter 12: Layer

Settings
The Layer Settings dialog can be invoked either by double-
clicking a layer in the layer list, or by selecting a layer, then
clicking the Layer Settings button in the layer toolbar. The
various controls are grouped into tabs that we’ll describe
in order. Use the Shift or Command/Ctrl keys to select multiple layers in
the Layers palette.
Click the Apply button to apply changes in settings. The
Layer Settings window will remain open so that you can
When multiple layers are selected, the last layer that you
make additional changes.
select becomes the primary layer. The primary layer is
displayed in a slightly darker shade in the layers palette.
Editing Multiple Layers Secondary layers are displayed with a slightly lighter
colored highlight. In addition, a message appears at
When you select a layer in the Layers palette, you can the bottom of the Layer Settings dialog to indicate that
view the settings for that layer in the Layer Settings dialog. multiple layers are selected.
In Anime Studio 10, you can use the Shift or Command/Ctrl
keys to make multiple selections in the Layers palette. The
layers that you select don’t have to be the same type of
layer. For example, you can select an image layer and a
vector layer as shown in the following figure:

Chapter 12: Layer Settings

173 Anime Studio Pro 10
Users Manual

• When you change a setting that is common to all

selected layer types, those common changes will be
applied to all of the selected layers when you click
the Apply or OK button in the Layer Settings dialog.
In other words, you can change the Blur or Opacity
setting in the Vectors tab, and then apply that change
to all of the layers in the selection, whether they are
vector or image layers.

• If you make settings that are specific to the primary

layer type, they will not be applied to sublayers of a
different type. For example, if your primary layer is an
Image layer and you make changes in the Images
The Layer Settings window displays a message when multiple
tab, those changes will not be applied to the vector
layers are selected.
layers in your selection.

The following rules apply when you are making changes to • Where settings are grouped, any change to one of
multiple selected layers: those grouped settings will cause all settings within
that group to change on all of the selected layers.
• If different layer types are selected, the Layer Settings For example, the Outline section of the General tab
window will only display the tabs that apply to the groups three settings together: Outline On, Width, and
primary layer. For example, if your primary layer is a Color. If you change the outline color, Anime Studio
vector layer but you have image layers as secondary will also update the outline state (on or off) and outline
layers, the Image tab will not be displayed. However, width to all of the layers when you click Apply or OK.
you will be able to edit settings that are common to Settings are grouped as follows:
image and vector layers in the Vectors tab.
ƒƒ Outline (“General Tab” on page 174): Outline
On, Width, and Color.

Chapter 12: Layer Settings

174 Anime Studio Pro 10
Users Manual

ƒƒ Colorizing (“General Tab” on page 174): Colorize If you make any settings in the Image tab that
Layer, and Color. apply to videos, they will only be modified in
secondary image layers that have video files as their
ƒƒ Layer Shadow (“Shadows Tab” on page 184):
sources.
Shadow On, Offset, Blur, Shadow color, Shadow
threshold, Expansion, and Shadow direction.
ƒƒ All Settings in the 3D Options tab (“3D Options”
ƒƒ Layer Shading (“Shadows Tab” on page 184): on page 204): Any changes that you make in
Shading On, Offset, Blur, Shading threshold, the 3D Options tab will be applied only to other
Shading color, Contraction, Inverted, and Shading layers if they are the same type as the primary
direction. layer. For example, if the primary layer is a 2D
ƒƒ 3D Shadow (“Shadows Tab” on page 184): vector layer, the changes that you make in the 3D
Perspective shadow on, Blur, Shadow threshold, options tab will only be applied to 2D vector layers.
Scale, Shear, and Color. If the primary layer is a true 3D layer (such as an
imported Poser scene), the changes will only be
ƒƒ Motion Blur (“Motion Blur Tab” on page 188): applied to other true 3D layers.
Motion blur on, Frame count, Frame skip, Start
opacity, End opacity, and Blur radius. ƒƒ Physics Settings (“Physics Tab” on page 206):
Enable physics, Gravity direction, Gravity
ƒƒ Depth Sorting (“Depth Sort Tab” on page 197): magnitude, Use baked physics.
Sort layers by depth, Sort by true distance, Enable
animated layer order.

ƒƒ Toon Settings (“Image Tab” on page 198):

General Tab
Toon effect, Edge level, Gray level, Black level, This tab is available for all layer types, and controls general
Saturation, Lightness, Quantization. layer properties.

Chapter 12: Layer Settings

175 Anime Studio Pro 10
Users Manual

here, and the name will appear in the layer list after
you click the OK button. Good names make working
with large projects much easier. Examples of layer
names might be Background, Body, or Head.

• Hide in editing view: Turn on this checkbox to hide

the layer while editing. The layer will still appear in
rendered output, but will be invisible in Anime Studio’s
edit view. This can be useful to reduce clutter and
improve performance. Things you might consider
hiding in the editing view are background details,
texture and detail layers, or special effects like particle
layers. Note that if a hidden layer is the currently active
layer, it will temporarily un-hide itself so that you can
edit whatever it contains.

• Don’t render this layer: If this box is turned on, then the
layer will not appear in any rendered/exported movies.
This option is usually used for some kind of helper layer.
For example, you might draw a layer with some guide
lines to help you draw and animate a scene, but you
don’t want those guides to appear in the final output.
Note layers have this option turned on by default.

General Layer Settings • Allow animated layer effects: When checked allows
you to animate layer effects by varying settings
• Name: This field allows you to change the name of the through the timeline. When unchecked, layer effects
layer. You can type in any name for the layer you want do not animate.

Chapter 12: Layer Settings

176 Anime Studio Pro 10
Users Manual

• Layer Color: Layer colors are used to help you

categorize the content in your project using colors of
your choosing. Use the Layer Color selector to choose
a color for the current layer. Plain will display the layer
in the normal Anime Studio interface color. Other
choices for categorizing your layers are Purple, Blue,
Green, Yellow, Orange, and Red.

Compositing Effects
This group of controls allow you to change certain layer
properties over time. When you modify any of these at
a frame greater than 0, you will add a keyframe to the
corresponding layer effects channel. For example, if you Compositing Effects
go to frame 1 and uncheck Visible, then go to frame 20
and re-check Visible, that layer will not appear in the final
animation until frame 20. • Visible: Controls whether a layer is visible in the final
output. It is important to note that this checkbox is
totally independent of the visibility box displayed in the
layer list: these are two separate notions of visibility,
and don’t affect each other at all. The visibility control
in the layer list is meant for your editing convenience:
you can turn one layer off while you work on another.
The visibility checkbox in this dialog is meant to allow
certain effects during an animation. For example, if you
had a layer with a drawing of a glowing lightbulb, you
could uncheck the visibility of this layer at frame 1, then

Chapter 12: Layer Settings

177 Anime Studio Pro 10
Users Manual

turn it on at frame 10, off at frame 20, on at frame 30,

etc. to create the effect of a blinking light.

• Blur radius: Lets you apply a blur (in pixels) to an entire

layer to simulate such effects as camera focus. The
blur can be animated over time to make a layer look
like its coming in and out of focus. Decimal values
are allowed to provide smoother transitions during
animation.

• Opacity: Allows you to modify the transparency of

an entire layer. An opacity value of 100 will not affect
the layer at all, while a value of 0 will make it totally
transparent. By changing the value from 0 at frame
1 to 100 at frame 10, the layer will seem to gradually
appear out of nowhere, which in some cases is more
desirable than the type of on/off visibility provided by
the Visible checkbox. Without Auto Shading

• Auto shading radius: Allows you to simulate 2D

ambient occlusion effects. Double-click the desired
layer, or highlight a layer in the layers panel. Turn the
Auto Shading option on and set the radius to a value
other than zero. A good starting point is somewhere
between 8 and 16 pixels.

Chapter 12: Layer Settings

178 Anime Studio Pro 10
Users Manual

The threshold is applied to the RGB values at

whatever you add in the threshold field. A
value of 128 is a midpoint value. If you end up with
unusual colors after applying the threshold, you can
use Colorizing to overlay a color on the layer. For
more information about colorizing, see “Colorizing”
on page 180.

• Flip horizontally and Flip vertically: Clicking these boxes

flips the entire layer in the direction specified. (If the
layer is a group layer, then the sub-layers inside it get
flipped as well.) This can be convenient in the case
where you want to duplicate a layer and have the
second copy face the first one as a mirror image.

Outline
With Auto Shading
The General Tab of the Layer Settings dialog displays the
following options for outlines:
• Threshold: Works in conjunction with blur, and can be
used to produce smoother transitions in corners. The
more an object is blurred, the more the threshold will
have an effect. The blur is computed first, and then
the threshold is added on top of it to smooth out the
overall shape.

Chapter 12: Layer Settings

179 Anime Studio Pro 10
Users Manual

and width on a bone group, but not on each layer of a

bone group, the layer outline will only be applied to the
outline of the character (and not each individual part).
After you specify your outline parameters, you will need to
preview your drawing with the File > Preview command, or
use the shortcut Cmd+R (Mac) or Ctrl+R (Windows).

Outline Options

• Outline on: Check this option to create an outline

around the objects on the layer.

• Width: Set the desired width of the outline, in pixels.

• Color: Click to set the color of the outline.

You can add an outline to a layer by enabling the option
in this section and specifying the width and color of the With 10 pixel blue outline around the bone group
outline.
You can set separate colors and widths for each layer to
add nice effects to your drawings. If you set just one color
Chapter 12: Layer Settings
180 Anime Studio Pro 10
Users Manual

Colorizing settings). The figure shown below shows several objects

on a layer which have a blur setting applied (top).
The Colorizing section allows you to overlay a color on the Thresholding is added to soften the shapes between
selected layer. The options are as follows: the objects. After rendering, you may see unusual colors
(middle) because the threshold is applied to the R, G, and
B values in the original object color. To fix this, choose the
Colorize layer option and select your overlay color. Render
again to see the final result (bottom).

Colorizing Options

• Colorize layer: Check this option to apply a color

overlay to the selected layer.

• Color: Click to set the overlay color and properties.

You can use the Colorizing feature to eliminate unwanted
or objectionable colors that occur after you apply
thresholding to objects on a layer (see “Compositing Original objects (top); threshold applied (middle); with color
Effects” on page 176 for information about the Threshold overlay (bottom)

Chapter 12: Layer Settings

181 Anime Studio Pro 10
Users Manual

Options effects like blurs and shadows will become larger or

smaller to match the scale of the layer.
The Options section of the General Properties tab provides
the following options: • Use HSV modifier image: This checkbox lets you use an
image file to distort the colors of the layer. Sometimes
you may want to do this to break up the solid colors in
your project and make it look less computerized. The
exact behavior of this feature is difficult to explain. The
best way to try it out is to use one of the HSV modifier
images included with Anime Studio. These images
should be pretty close to 50% gray. Other images
may produce bizarre, unexpected results. Feel free to
experiment - you can always turn off this checkbox if
you don’t like the results.
General Options

• Immune to camera movements: Sometimes you may

• Rotate to follow path: When this checkbox is turned on, want to make some layers ignore camera movements.
the layer will automatically rotate to follow its direction For example, certain backgrounds or title or logo layers
of movement. (Specifically, the up direction will turn you may want to stay in one place on the screen even
to follow the direction of layer translation.) This can be while you move the camera around.
useful for creating things like flowing arrows that need
• Embedded Script File: Allows you to attach a lua script
to point in their direction of movement.
to a layer. When you play it back in the timeline or
• Scale compensation: When this box is checked (as render a document, the script is executed to go with
it is by default), and you scale an entire layer larger that layer.
or smaller, the lines in the final rendered output will
• Immune to depth of field: The depth of field function
automatically get thicker or thinner so that they retain
(in the Project Settings dialog) lets you simulate the
their relative weight in the overall image. Also, layer
Chapter 12: Layer Settings
182 Anime Studio Pro 10
Users Manual

blurring of objects with different distances from the ƒƒ Face Image Plane X Axis: Rotates the layer on its
camera. This option allows you to turn off this effect for X (horizontal) axis as best it can to keep the layer
any particular layer. parallel to the camera plane.

• Rotate to face camera: In previous versions of Anime ƒƒ Face Image Plane Y Axis: Rotates the layer on its
Studio, a layer would pivot only on the Y axis and face Y (vertical) axis as best it can to keep the layer
the center of the camera. In Anime Studio 9.5.2 or later, parallel to the camera plane.
you can choose different pivot axes, and the layer ƒƒ Face Image Plane Free Rotate: Rotates the layer
can face the camera center or the image plane. This on both its X (horizontal) and Y (vertical) axis as
can be useful when using Anime Studio’s 3D camera - best it can to keep the layer parallel to the camera
especially for scenery-type objects. Trees, for example, plane.
that always face the camera can save you a lot of
work. Choose a rotation option from the popup menu: In the diagrams that appear below, the X
and Z Axes are shown in red and blue. The Y
ƒƒ No: Turns off the Rotate to Face Camera feature.
axis points straight up, so being that we are looking
ƒƒ Pivot X Axis: Rotates the layer on its X (horizontal) at the scene from the top, the Y axis points at you.
axis as best it can to make the layer’s Z axis point at The black pyramid represents the camera view, with
the camera. the point of the pyramid representing the eye. An
image plane appears in front of the camera. This
ƒƒ Pivot Y Axis: Rotates the layer on its Y (vertical) axis
image plane is like film, and represents where the
as best it can to make the layer’s Z axis point at the
rendered image gets focused.
camera.

ƒƒ Free Pivot: Rotates the layer on both its X

There are also three layers in the diagrams: Layer A
(horizontal) and Y (vertical) axis as best it can to
is not set to face the camera. Layer B pivots on the Y
make the layer’s Z axis point at the camera.
axis so that it faces the center of the camera. Layer
C is set to Face Image Plane Y Axis.

Chapter 12: Layer Settings

183 Anime Studio Pro 10
Users Manual

In the first image, the camera is in its default position When the camera is moved to the left of the scene,
and rotation. Layer A, which has the Rotate to Face and rotated to face the center, the image plane
Camera feature off, will not move when the camera also rotates to the same angle. Notice now that
is moved. Layer B, which is set to rotate on the Y axis, Layer A remains in the same position because
turns to face the camera. Layer C, which is set to Rotate to Face Camera is off. Layer B, which is set to
rotate with the image plane, is rotated the same as rotate with the Y axis of the camera, rotates to face
the image plane. the new position of the camera eye. And Layer C,
which is set to rotate with the Y axis of the image
plane, rotates in parallel with the image plane.

An Anime Studio scene, viewed from the top.

An Anime Studio scene viewed from the top, with the camera
moved to the left side

• Layer blending mode: Normally, layers are composited

on top of each other simply according to the
Chapter 12: Layer Settings
184 Anime Studio Pro 10
Users Manual

transparency of each layer. The layer blending mode

popup lets you select a different blending mode
for each layer. This can be very useful for simulating
shading and lighting effects.

Shadows Tab
The controls in this tab allow you to apply automatic
shadows and shading to an entire layer.

Shadows Layer Settings

Chapter 12: Layer Settings

185 Anime Studio Pro 10
Users Manual

Layer Shadow • Blur: Determines how hard or soft the edges of the
shadow appear.
This section lets you apply a drop-shadow effect to a layer.
The options are: • Shadow Threshold: Works in conjunction with blur,
and can be used to produce smoother transitions in
corners. The more an object is blurred, the more the
threshold will have an effect. The blur is computed first,
and then the threshold is added on top of it to smooth
out the overall shape.

• Expansion: Allows you to expand the reach of the

shadow. This can be useful for halo-type effects. Try an
Offset of 0, Blur of 8, and Expansion of 8.

• Shadow Color: Clicking on the “Shadow color” swatch

lets you change the color of the shadow that is being
cast. You can also modify the transparency of the
Layer Shadow options. shadow with this control.

• Shadow Direction: Controls the direction the shadow

• Shadow On: Checking the Shadow on checkbox will is cast. Just drag the knob in circles to change the
make all objects in the layer cast shadows on the direction of the shadow.
layers underneath.

• Offset: Controls how far the shadow appears from the Layer Shading
actual objects. A larger offset makes objects appear
higher up above the layers below them. This section is similar to the “Layer Shadow” section above.
However, instead of producing a shadow effect behind

Chapter 12: Layer Settings

186 Anime Studio Pro 10
Users Manual

the layer, these controls let you apply a shading effect on • Shading Threshold: Works in conjunction with blur,
top of the layer. and can be used to produce smoother transitions in
corners. The more an object is blurred, the more the
threshold will have an effect. The blur is computed first,
and then the threshold is added on top of it to smooth
out the overall shape.

• Contraction: Allows you to pull the shading further into

the center of the layer.

• Inverted: Inverts the shading effect so that the object

looks like it has a rim highlight.

• Shading Color: Clicking on the “Shading color” swatch

lets you change the color of the shading that is
Layer Shading options. applied. You can also modify the transparency of the
shading with this control.

• Shading On: Checking the “Shading on” checkbox will • Shading Direction: Controls the direction the shading
make all objects in the layer appear shaded, giving appears. Just drag the knob in circles to change the
them a rounded edges effect. direction of the shading.

• Offset: Controls how far inside the layer the shading

appears. A larger offset makes objects appear to have 3D Shadow (Perspective Shadows)
more “rounded” edges.
Anime Studio allows you to easily create perspective
• Blur: Determines how hard or soft the edges of the shadows for the objects in your scene. Select a layer from
shading appear. the Layers window and open the Layer Settings dialog.
Click the Shadows tab, and adjust the settings in the 3D
Chapter 12: Layer Settings
187 Anime Studio Pro 10
Users Manual

shadow area. You can animate this feature by applying The settings for perspective shadows are as follows:
different settings at different points in the timeline. You
will not see the shadow until after you render the current
frame, or all or part of a movie.
The position of the shadow is determined by the Set Origin
tool in the Layer section of the toolbox. When you set a
perspective shadow, pay attention to the location of the
origin of the object. The shadow is cast from the origin
point. The origin represents the ground point, so you can
position it to make the object look as though it is resting on
the ground, or as if the object is floating in the air.

3D Shadow options.

• Perspective Shadow On: Check this button to

turn Perspective Shadows on. Uncheck it to turn
Perspective Shadows off.

• Blur: Sets the amount of blur on the perspective

shadow. Higher values create a softer shadow.

• Scale: Controls the “depth” of the shadow. Higher

values make the shadow seem more elongated, while
lower values make the shadow shorter
Position the origin point at “ground” level.

Chapter 12: Layer Settings

188 Anime Studio Pro 10
Users Manual

• Shear: Allows you to control the slant of the shadow

(the direction that the light source is coming from).

• Color: Allows you to select a color for the shadow.

Default color is black.

Motion Blur Tab

The controls in this tab control the motion blur effect for
this layer. Motion blur can be turned on and off during the
course of an animation.

Motion Blur Layer Settings

Chapter 12: Layer Settings

189 Anime Studio Pro 10
Users Manual

• Motion Blur On: Checking “Motion blur on” turns on the

effect. The default settings work pretty well for a basic
Masking Tab
motion blur effect. This tab is used to control layer masking. Layer masking
controls the visible region of a layer - objects in a layer that
• Frame Count: Controls how many copies of the layer
are not within the visible region of the mask will not appear
should trail behind itself. The higher this number, the
in the final output. This tab is available when a group or
longer it will take to render your animation. Sometimes
bone layer is selected.
a high number may be used for an exaggerated
anime or cartoon effect.

• Frame Skip: Controls the separation between blur

frames. A larger number will cause the blur effect to
trail farther out behind the current position.

• Start Opacity and End Opacity: Control how the blur

fades away behind the layer. Generally, a motion
blur effect will fade a bit as it trails behind the layer.
For some special effects, however, you may not want
the motion blur to fade at all. In those cases, set both
values to 100 to keep the motion blur completely
opaque.

• Blur Radius: Controls the radius (in pixels) of the motion

blur effect.

Chapter 12: Layer Settings

190 Anime Studio Pro 10
Users Manual

No masking in this group: Means that no masking will occur

in this group.

• Reveal all: Means that masking is on, and by default all

sub-layers will be fully visible.

• Hide all: Means that masking is on, and by default all

sub-layers will be invisible (this is the most common
option when using layer masking).
All other layers inside a group will have the following
options for layer masking:

• Mask this layer: Clip this layer against the current mask.

• Don’t mask this layer: Skip all masking operations for

this layer.

• + Add to mask: Add this layer to the mask. Any higher

layers will be visible wherever this layer is visible.

• + Add to mask, but keep invisible: Add this layer to the

mask, but don’t show it in the final output.

• - Subtract from mask: Use this layer to cut a hole in the

current mask.
Masking Layer Settings
• + Clear the mask, then add this layer to it: This makes
If the layer is a group or bone layer, then the following the mask identical to the transparency value of the
options are available: current layer.
Chapter 12: Layer Settings
191 Anime Studio Pro 10
Users Manual

• + Clear the mask, then add this layer invisibly to it: • Use additive masks only (use Hide All, instead of Reveal
All)
• Exclude Strokes: Check this option to exclude outlines
from the mask. • Don’t use any of the following modes for child layers in
the group:
• Expand mask by a pixel: Adds an additional pixel
around a layer mask. ƒƒ Subtract from mask

ƒƒ Clear this mask then add this layer invisibility to it

The masking controls are simple but powerful
options that can be used for all kinds of ƒƒ Don’t Mask This Layer (unless all other layers in the
creative tricks. The best way to explain these is with group above this one also use Don’t Mask This
a hands on example. See “Tutorial 2.7: Layer Layer)
Masking” on page 96 in your Anime Studio Tutorial
ƒƒ Exclude Strokes (unless all layers in the group
Manual.
above are set to Masked)
The following examples demonstrate some do’s and don’ts
in masking techniques.
Masking Tips and Tricks
Simple Masking (Produces No Fringing)
When setting up masking in a group, the best approach
is to first set up the mask, then set up the objects to be This example starts with a group that contains five layers.
masked. The bottom-most layers should define the mask each with a different shape. This group renders with no
by either adding to it or subtracting from it. Then the layers fringe because it follows the rule of only adding to a mask.
above that should be masked against the defined mask.
For masking to be fringe-free, try to follow these guidelines:

• Masking should only increase in a one-way direction.

The alpha channel must increase monotonically.

Chapter 12: Layer Settings

192 Anime Studio Pro 10
Users Manual

• Group mask: In the Group Mask section, choose Hide

All. In the Layer Masking section, choose Mask this
layer.

• Layer 1: Set to +Add to mask.

• Layer 2: Set to Mask this layer.

• Layer 3: Set to Mask this layer

• Layer 4: Set to + Add to mask

• Layer 5: Set to Mask this layer

After you apply the above settings, the end result will look
as shown in the following figure, when rendered.

A group with five layers, each with a different shape.

To mask an example such as this, use the following settings:

Chapter 12: Layer Settings

193 Anime Studio Pro 10
Users Manual

Result of simple masking.

Mask Reset (Produces Fringing)

This example consists of a group with five layers, each with

an oval shape. This group doesn’t follow the rules. It renders
with fringe because Layer 4 is set to “Clear and Add to the
Mask.”

A group with five layers, each with a different shape.

This example uses the following settings:

Chapter 12: Layer Settings

194 Anime Studio Pro 10
Users Manual

• Group mask: In the Group Mask section, choose Hide

All. In the Layer Masking section, choose Mask this
layer.

• Layer 1: Set to +Add to mask.

• Layer 2: Set to Mask this layer

• Layer 3: Set to Mask this layer

• Layer 4: Set to + Clear the mask, then add this layer to

it.

• Layer 5: Set to Mask this layer

After you apply the above settings, the end result will look Result of mask reset.
as shown in the following figure, when rendered.
Complex Masking (Produces Fringing)

This example starts with a group that contains three

layers. each with an oval shape. This masking example
also renders with fringe, because it breaks the rules by
combining additive and subtractive masking in the same
group.

Chapter 12: Layer Settings

195 Anime Studio Pro 10
Users Manual

• Layer 1: Set to +Add to mask.

• Layer 2: Set to -Subtract from mask (this layer will be

invisible)

• Layer 3: Set to Mask this layer

After you apply the above settings, the end result will look
as shown in the following figure, when rendered.

Result of complex masking.

A group with three layers, each with a different shape.

This example uses the following settings:

Vectors Tab
• Group mask: In the Group Mask section, choose Hide
This tab is only available for vector layers, and controls
All. In the Layer Masking section, choose Mask this
the appearance of lines and fills in the layer. The controls
layer.

Chapter 12: Layer Settings

196 Anime Studio Pro 10
Users Manual

here enable the vector “noise effect”. By adding “noise”

to a layer, you can make it look more hand-drawn, or at
least get rid of some of that pesky computer precision.
Of course, that’s up to artistic interpretation: if you like
computer precision, the noise effect may not be the
feature for you.

Vectors Layer Settings

Chapter 12: Layer Settings

197 Anime Studio Pro 10
Users Manual

• Noisy Outlines and Noisy Fills: The first two checkboxes • Interval (Frames): When vector noise is set to be
turn on noise for outlines and/or fills. If you turn on animated, you can set an interval so that the noise
both of these, all the shapes in the layer will become changes every nth frame, with n being the number
distorted. However, if you check only one, the effect that you enter in this field. Increase the number to
will look like someone was coloring but didn’t stay in reduce the amount of noise.
the lines. The circle displayed on the right side shows a
preview of what your noise effect settings will do to the • Line Count: Tells Anime Studio to draw a number of
final drawing. (The best way to understand this feature lines, distorting each in a different way.
is to just start clicking the checkboxes and watch the
• Gap Filling: Sometimes two shapes are drawn that line
circle.)
up exactly side-by-side with no overlap whatsoever. In
• Animated noise: Controls whether the noise factor will some situations, a small crack can appear between
vary over time in your animation. This can lead to either them. Turn this option on to enable Anime Studio to fill
a very distracting look, or a very sketchy, free-form in these cracks.
one, depending on your tastes. Again, experiment with
• Legacy Curves: Switches a layer back to the curve
this and watch the circle.
drawing method used in Anime Studio 7 and earlier.
• Extra Sketchy: (Associated with noise settings). Creates Documents created in Anime Studio 7 and earlier
gaps in the outlines. If you have a curve being drawing should open in the application with this option turned
you might actually have little gaps in it. on so that the existing artwork does not suddenly
change.
• Offset: Determines how far in pixels (on average) your
drawing will be distorted from its original shape.
Depth Sort Tab
• Scale: Determines the “jaggedness” of the distortion.
Larger scale numbers will result in smoother, lumpier This tab is only available for group and bone layers. Depth
distortion, while smaller numbers will give you a more Sort has two controls that can be used with Anime Studio’s
scribbled look. 3D features.

Chapter 12: Layer Settings

198 Anime Studio Pro 10
Users Manual

Normally, layers are drawn in the order they appear in

the Layers window. However, with this option turned
on, layers are displayed according to how far they are
from the camera. Typically, layers are sorted by their
depth from the camera, but if you’re trying to create
a 3D object using multiple Anime Studio layers (like a
cube or pyramid), you may want to turn it on.

• Sort by True Distance: Tells Anime Studio to sort layers

by the distance from the camera to the layers’ origins,
rather than by depth. Usually this option will be left
unchecked.

• Enable animated layer order: During the course of an

animation, you may want to move objects in front of
or behind each other. One example is when simulating
head turns. The children of a group layer have the
ability to move back and forth in layer order over
the course of an animation, but you need to turn this
option on to allow it. If it’s off, then moving one layer in
front of another affects them for the entire timeline.

Image Tab
Depth Sort Layer Settings
This tab is only available for image layers. There are five
options in this tab.
• Sort Layers by Depth: Allows sub-layers to move in
front of and behind each other during an animation.
Chapter 12: Layer Settings
199 Anime Studio Pro 10
Users Manual

• Set Source Image: Lets you select the image to be

used in the image layer. Use this if you want to change
the image, or if it got lost for some reason.

• Reveal Source Image: Click the button to open

Explorer (Windows) or Finder (Mac) to the folder that
the current source image is contained within.

• AVI movie has alpha: Turn this on if the image layer is

using an AVI movie, and that movie includes an alpha
channel.

• Loop movie indefinitely: When checked, the movie

plays in a loop for as long as required in the animation.
When unchecked, the movie plays once and stops
when it reaches its end.

• Play backwards: When checked, plays a movie layer

backwards (in reverse frame order).

• Persist First Frame: When checked, displays the first

frame of a movie continually until the playhead
reaches the frame at which the movie begins to play.
When unchecked, the movie will not appear in the
project until the playhead reaches the first frame in the
Image Layer Settings movie.

• Persist Last Frame: When checked, displays the last

frame of a movie continually after the playhead
Chapter 12: Layer Settings
200 Anime Studio Pro 10
Users Manual

reaches the last frame of the movie in the timeline. Toon Settings
When unchecked, the movie will no longer appear in
the project after the playhead moves beyond the last The Toon Effect filter is used with images and movies. Load
frame in the movie. an image or movie into a new layer. Open the Layer
Settings dialog to the Image tab and check the Toon Effect
• Premultiplied Alpha: If an imported movie has an alpha option. The image or movie will be processed through the
channel and the edges look bad after importing, it Toon Effect filter.
may be because the movie has premultiplied alpha.
Check this option to improve appearance.

• Movie FPS: Sets the speed of the movie in Frames per

Second

• Warp using bones: If this box is checked and the image

layer is placed inside a bone layer, the bones can
be used to warp the image as if it were printed on a
rubber sheet.

• Nearest neighbor sampling: When this option is not

checked, Anime Studio will try to smooth out the areas
in between pixels when you enlarge the image. If
you want the images to look blocky when they are
resized, turn this option on. Anime Studio will not smooth
the image and it will start to look blocky when it is
enlarged.
Toon effects on a photograph

When used with videos, the processing can take quite a

while. When working with videos, open up the movie file
Chapter 12: Layer Settings
201 Anime Studio Pro 10
Users Manual

and apply the toon effect filter. Immediately afterward,

import the animation as a new movie file. Use the new
movie file, with the toon effect applied, in your final
project.
Some types of images work better than others. Faces
should be pretty large in the image. If the face is small then
a lot of detail will be lost or blurred together.
The Toon Effect filter has several parameters in the Image
tab:

Toon settings in the Layer Settings Image tab

• Edge level: Controls the width of the edges in the toon

effect. Increase the setting to make the edges wider,
and decrease to make the edges thinner.

Chapter 12: Layer Settings

202 Anime Studio Pro 10
Users Manual

• Gray level: Darkens the middle areas of the toon

effect.

• Black level: Darkens the dark areas of the toon effect.

• Saturation: Increases or decreases the amount of color.

Negative values make the toon more black and white.

• Lightness: Increase the setting to make the image

appear more faded.

• Quantization: Sets the number of colors in the image.

When set at 0, the quantization works the same as
found in Anime Studio 7 and earlier. When set to a
value greater than 1, the value you enter is the number
of colors in the image.
Switch Layer Settings

Switch Tab
• Select Audio Sync Source: Lets you select a data
This tab is only available for switch layers. file used to control the switch layer. A data file is not
required (you can control a Switch layer manually by
right-clicking its entry in the Layers window), but if you
do want to use a data file you have two choices:

Chapter 12: Layer Settings

203 Anime Studio Pro 10
Users Manual

If you want a quicker lip-sync solution, you

can use an audio file as a data file. In this
Particles Tab
case, your switch file should contain several version This tab is only available for particle layers. The description
of a mouth shape, ranging from closed to wide for how these controls affect a particle layer can be found
open. The volume of the audio file will control which in “Particle Layers” on page 113.
mouth shape is used at which frame. If you do use
an audio file to control the Switch layer, you can
either use automatic volume gain (recommended)
or set the gain manually. The gain controls how wide
the mouth gets. When using manual gain, start with
a value of 1 - if the mouth seems too wide, try
smaller values (0.75 or 0.5). If the mouth isn’t wide
enough, try higher gain values (1.5 or 2).

See “Tutorial 5.1: Automatic Lip-Sync” on

page 140 in your Anime Studio Tutorial
Manual and “Tutorial 5.2: Phoneme Lip-Sync” on
page 142 in your Anime Studio Tutorial Manual for
examples of using audio lip-syncing functions.

• Interpolate sub-layers: If this box is checked Anime

Studio will do smooth transitions between the sub-
layers as long as they’re all vector layers and contain
the same number of points.

Particles Layer Settings

Chapter 12: Layer Settings

204 Anime Studio Pro 10
Users Manual

3D Options • Edges: Allows you to control which elements get edges

(or outlines) and to what degree. You can choose to
This tab is only available for 3D layers. enable or disable outlines around silhouettes, materials,
or creases. The Crease Threshold setting controls the
level of crease outline that will appear. The Edge
Extension setting makes the outline thicker.

• Shading: Controls the type of shading that appears

on the 3D object, along with the shading color and
density. Choices of shading include None, Smooth,
Toon, or Hatched.

• Polygon orientation: Allows you to adjust whether the

polygons in your model are oriented clockwise or
counter-clockwise. After importing a model, if it looks
turned inside-out or otherwise distorted, try switching
the polygon orientation.

• Warp using bones: If this box is checked and the 3D

layer is placed inside a bone layer, the bones can be
used to warp the 3D model. Be aware that although
the model is three-dimensional, bone layers are only
two-dimensional, so you will be limited in the ways you
can control the 3D object using bones.

• Reset Z buffer: Anime Studio uses a z buffer rendering

3D Options Layer Settings
algorithm and the result is that all 3D objects in the
scene interact in a visually consistent way. Objects

Chapter 12: Layer Settings

205 Anime Studio Pro 10
Users Manual

that are closer appear in front of those further away,

regardless of the layer order. However, if you turn
this checkbox on for layer X (a 3D layer), then when
layer X gets rendered it first resets the z buffer. This is a
way to force a 3D layer to appear in front of other 3D
layers that it might actually be behind. In other words,
sometimes you may want multiple 3D layers to interact
in the Z dimension (hide behind each other, or even
interpenetrate so that some parts of one object are
in front of another and some parts behind). This is the
normal behavior. Turning on the Reset Z Buffer option
forces 3D objects to act like regular 2D layers and just
be in front of or behind each other according to the
layer order in the Layers palette.

Note Tab
This tab is only available for note layers, and lets you
change the text label in the note.

Notes Layer Settings

Chapter 12: Layer Settings

206 Anime Studio Pro 10
Users Manual

Physics Tab Normally, physics simulations are re-run every

time you play back an animation so that they
The settings in the Physics tab are as follows: can respond to other objects in the scene. The
advantages to using baked physics are (1) it is faster
ƒƒ Enable physics: Check this option to turn the to re-use simulations rather than to re-run the physics;
physics simulator on. (2) If the physics simulation doesn’t give you the
ƒƒ Gravity direction: Use the directional slider to point results you want, you need to tweak results. You
to the direction from which gravity is originated. can’t manually animate objects if they are under
By default, the direction is straight down (270 the influence of physics, but you can use the
degrees). 0/360 degrees is at the 3:00 position of precomputed physics while you modify keyframes
the dial. as you see fit. (3) If you get a result that you like, you
can turn this option on to make sure it doesn’t
ƒƒ Gravity magnitude: Controls the strength of the change.
gravity. Lower values make the gravity less forceful
(objects are lighter) and higher values make the
For more information on how to use physics in your Anime
gravity more forceful (objects are heavier).
Studio projects, see “Tutorial 5.9: Basic Physics” on page
ƒƒ Use baked physics (advanced): Turn this option 232 in your Anime Studio Tutorial Manual.
on to stop the physics simulation from running. It
will play back results from the last time you played
back the animation.

Chapter 12: Layer Settings

207 Anime Studio Pro 10
Users Manual

The settings in the Bones tab are as follows:

• Binding Mode: Check one of the following to select the

binding mode that you want to use for bones.

ƒƒ Flexible Binding: This option is selected by default.

This uses Flexi-Binding, which allows greater control
over how bones affect different layers in a bone
group. See “Tutorial 3.5: Flexi-Binding” on page
120 in your Anime Studio Tutorial Manual.

ƒƒ Region Binding: Uses the binding style that was

used by Anime Studio prior to version 9.5. See
“Tutorial 3.4: Character Setup” on page 109 in
your Anime Studio Tutorial Manual.

• Allow Nested Layer Control: Allows you to control the

children of their children, making it easier to work with
bones on images and vector art.

Physics Settings

Bones Tab
Chapter 12: Layer Settings
208 Anime Studio Pro 10
Users Manual

Anime Studio provides an option that allows

you to control the children of a bone’s
children, making it easier to work with bones on
images and vector art. In other words, if you have a
group inside a bone layer, and vector layers inside
that group, the bone layer can warp the artwork in
those vector layers if Allow nested layer control is
turned on in the Bones tab of the Layer Properties
palette and if the group layer is not bound. This
allows more powerful bone rigging while also
allowing you to organize your layers in a hierarchy.
This allows you to have parent bones and
“Grandpa” bones ... bones that affect more than
one layer of bones beneath them.

Bones Settings

Chapter 12: Layer Settings

209 Anime Studio Pro 10
Users Manual

Bones Settings

Chapter 12: Layer Settings

210 Anime Studio Pro 10
Users Manual

Chapter 13: Style

Window
The Style window is where you set up colors, line widths, fill
effects, and other properties to control the appearance of
your vector artwork. The Style window has two views, Basic
(shown on the right in the following figure) and Advanced
(shown on the left in the following figure).
The Advanced checkbox in the lower-left corner of the
dialog will toggle the Styles palette between Basic and
Advanced views. Check the option to display in Advanced
view, and uncheck it to display in Basic view.
The options in the Style window are displayed and listed on
the following page.
When you edit the fill color, stroke color, or brush settings,
the changes will be displayed live on the canvas so that
you can see the effects of your changes.

Chapter 13: Style Window

211 Anime Studio Pro 10
Users Manual

Style Window Options: 27. Checker selection

1. Shape selection drop-down menu
2. Style management drop-down menu
3. Window mode indication
4. Name field
5. Fill enable checkbox
6. Fill color selector
7. Fill color override checkbox
8. Fill effect drop-down menus
9. Fill effect settings buttons
10. Stroke enable checkbox
11. Stroke color selector
12. Stroke color override checkbox
13. Stroke brush selector
14. Stroke line width field
15. Stroke width override checkbox
16. Stroke effect drop-down menu
17. Stroke effect settings button
18. Round end caps checkbox
19. Applied styles drop-down menus
20. 3D conversion thickness field Basic Style Options
21. Color swatch drop-down menu
22. Color swatch
23. Copy button
24. Paste button
25. Reset button
26. Advanced window checkbox

Chapter 13: Style Window

212 Anime Studio Pro 10
Users Manual

Shapes

Shape Selection Drop-Down Menu (1)

You can use this menu to select any existing and named
shape on the current vector layer. Select <None> to
deselect all shapes.

Shape Selection Drop-Down Menu

• Shapes: The fill and/or stroke that make vector

construction visible when rendering/exporting. For
example, if you use the Draw Shape (E) tool with the
Auto-fill and Auto-stroke options unchecked, you will
Advanced Style Options create a vector construction without any shape and
it will not be visible when rendered/exported. You can
Chapter 13: Style Window
213 Anime Studio Pro 10
Users Manual

always use the Create Shape (U) tool to make a shape

using this vector construction. Enabling either or both
of these Auto options before using the Draw Shape
tool will create a visible shape with the properties
chosen.

Choose Edit >Preferences... and in the

Option tab, you can select Auto-name new
shapes so that all of your shapes have names when
created. Refer to “Options Tab” on page 349 for
more information.

Style Management Drop-Down Menu

(2) Style Management Drop-Down Menu

A style contains all of the properties which define how a

shape should look. Use the Styles menu to create, delete, These are the options of this menu:
and edit your styles.
• New: This option allows you to create a new saved
style.

• Delete: This option allows you to delete a selected

style.

• Delete Unused: This option allows you to delete all

styles that are not currently applied to any shapes.

Chapter 13: Style Window

214 Anime Studio Pro 10
Users Manual

• <None>: This option deselects all saved styles. • STYLE: In this mode the style you define will either
create a new style or edit an existing one, depending
• List of style names: If you have created any saved on the option you select from the style management
styles there will be a list of their names. Selecting one of drop-down menu.
these will open that style for editing.
• Name Field (4)

Window Mode Indication (3) The name field allows you to name or rename any
selected shape or style and displays any existing name. It is
This indicates the current mode of the Style Window. There only active in SHAPE or STYLE mode.
are three modes:

Name Field
Window Mode Indication

• DEFAULTS (For new shapes): In this mode the style you

define will be applied to any new shapes you create.
Fills
This default will retain the style of the last shape you
had selected. This is the default mode when there are
no shapes or styles selected.
Fill Enable Checkbox (5)
This checkbox determines whether a selected shape has
• SHAPE: In this mode the style you define will edit the
a fill.
style of the currently selected shape. Selecting a shape
in the workspace or in the shape selection drop-down A fill is the color inside of a closed shape. This option is only
menu will enter shape mode. available when you have an existing shape selected.

Chapter 13: Style Window

215 Anime Studio Pro 10
Users Manual

brightness. The vertical colored bar to the right of this is

where you chose the color hue. The next, checkered bar is
where you set the color alpha value (opacity). At the top
right are two color chips. The top one is the current color
and the lower one is the previous color ( click to restore).
Below these are manual inputs for the red, green, blue,
and alpha values. And last is a hexadecimal field where
Fill Enable Checkbox you can copy or paste hex values to set the color.

Fill Color Selector (6)

This displays the fill color for the default style, the selected
shape, or the selected style, depending on the style
window mode. Clicking on it allows you to edit the color
with the color picker:

Fill Color Selector

Color Picker
The color picker allows you to select the color and
transparency of the fill or stroke of your style. The large field
to the left is where you can chose the color saturation and
Chapter 13: Style Window
216 Anime Studio Pro 10
Users Manual

Fill Color Override Checkbox (7) • When a style is applied any overrides checked in that
saved style will override those properties in the shape
If checked, the color displayed in the fill color selector will or default.
override any other fill color in the style.

Fill Effect Drop-down Menu (8)

These drop-down menus allow you to select two different
fill effects. There are many effects to chose from:

Fill Color Override Checkbox

This works slightly different, depending on which mode the

window is in:
Fill Effect Drop-Down Menu
• DEFAULTS and SHAPE: In these modes the override is
only available if a saved style has been applied (see
19). Enabling this will override the applied style fill color • <plain> indicates that no effect is applied in this drop-
with the current color in the fill color selector. down.

• STYLE: In this mode the override determines what This is followed by a list of fill effects. Some fill and line
properties are included in the saved style. There is an effects can be animated, with keyframes being added to
override for fill, stroke (see 12), and line width (see 14). the timeline when you change colors, blur radius, angles,
You can create styles with any combination of these offsets, blurs, and more.
properties.

Chapter 13: Style Window

217 Anime Studio Pro 10
Users Manual

Many of the fill and stroke effects can be

shown in the workspace, while others can
only be seen once rendered. This can slow down
performance, so it is disabled by default. To enable
effects in the workspace open the Display Quality
settings drop-down at the bottom of the workspace
and enable the Shape effects checkbox.

Shaded Fill Effects

When you choose Shaded Fill effects, a dialog displays the

following options:

Expanded Menu

Selecting an effect will bring up an effect settings dialog,

each of which are described in the sections that follow.
Each effect has a variety of specific parameters for the
user to adjust, as well as an effect preview that updates as
changes are made to these settings.

You will only be able to view the results of

some effects on your shapes by rendering a
single frame (Cmd/Ctrl+R) or exporting the
animation (Cmd/Ctrl+E).

Chapter 13: Style Window

218 Anime Studio Pro 10
Users Manual

• Offset: Allows you to assign a value for how far the

shadow is offset from the filled area

• Blur: Controls the softness of the shadow.

• Shadow Color: Allows you to choose the shadow color

from a color palette.

• Shadow Only: Check this option to only display the

shadow, without the fill.

• Threshold: Works in conjunction with blur, and can be

used to produce smoother transitions in corners. The
more an object is blurred, the more the threshold will
have an effect. The blur is computed first, and then
the threshold is added on top of it to smooth out the
overall shape.

Soft Edge Fill Effects

When you choose Soft Edge Fill effects, a dialog displays

the following options:
Shaded Effect Options

• Light Angle: Provides a dial that allows you to change

the direction that the light is coming from. You can also
enter a numerical value. Zero degrees is located at the
bottom of the dial.

Chapter 13: Style Window

219 Anime Studio Pro 10
Users Manual

Halo Fill Effects

When you choose Halo Fill effects, a dialog displays the

following options:

Soft Edge Effect Options

• Blur Radius: Allows you to increase or decrease the

softness, or blur, around the edge of the fill.

• Threshold: Works in conjunction with blur, and can be Halo Effect Options
used to produce smoother transitions in corners. The
more an object is blurred, the more the threshold will • Inset Radius: Adjusts the radius of the inner area
have an effect. The blur is computed first, and then
the threshold is added on top of it to smooth out the • Blur Radius: Adjusts the softness around the halo
overall shape.
• Halo Color: Click the Color chip to select a color for
the halo.

Chapter 13: Style Window

220 Anime Studio Pro 10
Users Manual

• Halo Only: Check this option to only add the halo • Type: Allows you to choose one of four types of
effect without the fill. gradient effects:: Linear, Radial, Reflected, or Angle.
The preview shows an example of each type.
Gradient Fill Effects
• Allow transparency: Check this option if you want the
Gradient fill effects can be animated and can also gradient to appear partially or completely transparent
respond to bone warping. You can animate the location in some areas.
and color of all of the color markers in the gradient. All
changes in color will show up in the timeline when added. • Color: Allows you to select a color and transparency
for the selected gradient marker (below).
This is the dialog used to control the gradient effect. The
following options appear:
• Gradient bar: This bar shows the current gradient.

• Gradient markers: Below the gradient bar are initially

two markers, one on each end. Selecting one of these
will fill the arrow above it and display its color in the
Color selector to indicate it is selected. These markers
can be moved anywhere along the gradient bar.

• You can also add additional color markers to the

gradient by clicking anywhere just below the gradient
bar. You can copy an existing marker by holding the
Alt key when you select a marker. You can then drag
this copied marker to a new location on the gradient
bar, or even click the color selector to change its color.

Gradient Effect Options

Chapter 13: Style Window

221 Anime Studio Pro 10
Users Manual

Image Texture Fill Effects • Don’t Repeat: Choose this option if you do not want
to repeat image used for the fill. The image will be
When you choose Image Texture Fill effects, a dialog rescaled proportionally as needed to fit the width or
displays the following options: height of the area that will be filled.

• Through Transparency: Check this option to mask

areas of an underlying shape with transparent areas in
a texture fill.
When you apply a texture fill effect, you can select images
that are partially transparent. After you select the image,
the preview in the Texture dialog will apply the partially
transparent image over the shape so that you can see the
underlying color through the texture.

Image Texture Effect Options

• Select Texture: Click this button to choose an image

file to be used as a texture fill.

• Tile: Choose this option if you want the image to

repeat more than once to fill the selected area
A shape filled with a partially transparent image.
Chapter 13: Style Window
222 Anime Studio Pro 10
Users Manual

When the Through Transparency option is checked, you will When you choose a Drop Shadow, a dialog displays the
see a change after you render a preview. The transparent following options:
areas in the texture will now be transparent through the
entire shape. This causes the transparencies in the image to
function similar to a mask.

A shape filled with a partially transparent image.

Drop Shadow
Drop Shadow Effect Options
The Drop Shadow feature allows you to quickly and easily
create a drop shadow for your objects. The feature allows
• Light Angle: Provides a dial that allows you to change
you to set the angle from which the light shines, how much
the direction that the light is coming from. You can also
the shadow is offset from the object, and the blur radius (or
enter a numerical value. Zero degrees is located at the
softness) of the shadow. In addition, you can set the color
bottom of the dial.
of the shadow through a color swatch.
Chapter 13: Style Window
223 Anime Studio Pro 10
Users Manual

• Offset: Allows you to assign a value for how far the

shadow is offset from the filled area

• Blur: Controls the softness of the shadow.

• Shadow Color: Allows you to choose the shadow color

from a color palette.

• Threshold: Works in conjunction with blur, and can be

used to produce smoother transitions in corners. The
more an object is blurred, the more the threshold will
have an effect. The blur is computed first, and then
the threshold is added on top of it to smooth out the
overall shape. Crayon Effect Options
A preview of the settings appears in the preview window
as you adjust them. When you are satisfied with the • Line Width: Allows you to increase or decrease the
appearance of your shadow, click OK to apply the width of the crayon stroke.
settings. You will need to preview the frame (Cmd/Ctrl+R)
or export the animation (Cmd/Ctrl+E) to see the results. • Density: Decrease the setting to give the crayon a
more grainy appearance. Increase the setting to
Crayon make the crayon more “solid.”

The Crayon feature allows you to simulate the effect of • Erase to Background: Check this option to erase
something that is drawn with a crayon. The feature allows underlying strokes with the crayon.
you to adjust the width and density of the crayon stroke.
You can also use the crayon as an eraser. • Minimize frame-to-frame randomness: Check this
When you choose the Crayon effect, a dialog displays the option to keep the crayon effect from jittering during
following options: the animation.

Chapter 13: Style Window

224 Anime Studio Pro 10
Users Manual

A preview of the settings appears in the preview window

as you adjust them. When you are satisfied with the effect
preview, click OK to apply the settings.

Legacy Effects
Legacy Effects (Anime Studio Pro only). These are older
effects that significantly slow down render speeds, do
not respond to bone influence, and may have other
limitations and drawbacks. You must decide for yourself
whether these effects are worth the extra time to render an
animation that makes use of them.

Splotchy

This effect fills the selected area with a splotchy pattern.

You can control the contrast, scale, and chromatics of the
pattern fill. Splotchy Options

• Magnitude: Allows you to adjust the contrast of the

splotchy pattern.

• Scale: Adjusts the scale of the splotchy pattern.

• Monochrome: When this option is checked the

splotchy pattern will only use shades of the fill color.

Chapter 13: Style Window

225 Anime Studio Pro 10
Users Manual

Spots • Spot length: This option determines the length of the

spots.

• Spot width: This option determines the width of the

spots.

• Length spacing: This option determines the space

between the ends of the spots.

• Width spacing: This option determines the space

between the sides of the spots.

• Angle: Provides a dial that allows you to change the

direction of the spots. You can also enter a numerical
value. Zero degrees is located at the right of the dial.

• Spot color: Allows you to choose the spot color from a

color palette.

Fill Effect Settings Button (9)

Each of these buttons become active when you have
an effect selected in the effect drop-down menu next to
it. These buttons allow you to access and edit the effect
settings dialog of the selected effect.

Spots Options

Chapter 13: Style Window

226 Anime Studio Pro 10
Users Manual

Stroke Enable Checkbox

Fill Effects Settings Button

Stroke Color Selector (11)

Stroke
This displays the stroke color for the default style, the
selected shape, or the selected style, depending on the
Stroke Enable Checkbox (10) style window mode. Clicking on it brings up the color
picker.
This checkbox determines whether a selected shape has
a stroke.
A stroke is the outline of a shape. Shapes can exist without
a stroke or only composed of a stroke. This option is only
available when you have an existing shape selected.

Stroke Color Selector

Chapter 13: Style Window

227 Anime Studio Pro 10
Users Manual

Stroke Override Checkbox (12) When a style is applied any overrides checked in that
saved style will override those properties in the shape or
If checked, the color displayed in the stroke color selector default.
will override any other stroke color in the style.

Stroke Brush Selector (13)

This displays the current brush used for the stroke of the
default style, selected shape, or selected style.

Stroke Override Checkbox

This works slightly different, depending on which mode the

window is in:
DEFAULTS and SHAPE: In these modes the override is only
available if a saved style has been applied (see 19). Stroke Brush Selector
Enabling this will override the applied style stroke color with
the current color in the stroke color selector. Clicking this box opens the Brush Settings dialog:
STYLE: In this mode the override determines what properties
are included in the saved style. There is an override for fill,
stroke, and line width (see 14). You can create styles with
any combination of these properties.

Chapter 13: Style Window

228 Anime Studio Pro 10
Users Manual

• Brush selection menu: This displays all of the available

brushes. You can click on one to select it for use or
select None for no brush.

• Current Brush: The name of the currently selected

brush appears in the line immediately below the brush
selector.

• Align brush with curve: This option changes the

orientation of the brush to the vector curve it is applied
to.

• Brush jitter angle: This option determines how much the

orientation angle varies, with zero being to variance.

• Brush spacing: This allows you to set the spacing

between each instance of the brush. Improvements to
brush spacing have been made so that brush spacing
remains consistent whether the brush curve follows
curve points that are either pointed or curved.

• Minimize frame-to-frame randomness: Check this

option to keep the brush from jittering during the
animation.
Brush Settings Dialog
• Tint brush using stroke color: For brushes that are
colored (not all black) this option allows the brush to
take on the selected stroke color instead of the color
displayed in the brush selection menu.
Chapter 13: Style Window
229 Anime Studio Pro 10
Users Manual

• Random Order: When checked, randomizes the order When you select a Multi-brush, the preview window at
of the Multi-Brush shapes while the stroke is painted. the bottom of the Brush palette displays a preview of the
selected brush. You will notice that there are multiple
• Brush preview: This displays a preview of the chosen images mixed into a single brush stroke.
brush settings.

Using Multi-Brushes

Anime Studio 10 includes a new feature called Multi-

Brushes. If you go into the Brush Settings dialog you will
notice several new brushes. Multi-brushes are indicated in
Multi-Brushes allow you to add multiple shapes in a single brush
the Brush Settings dialog with three dots in the upper left
stroke.
corner of the brush preview.

Some Multi-Brushes mix different textures into a single

stroke. The differences in texture may appear to be more
subtle in the preview window, but the variations will be
more obvious after you render a preview.

Multi-Brushes are indicated with three dots in the upper left

corner of the brush preview.

Chapter 13: Style Window

230 Anime Studio Pro 10
Users Manual

Creating Multi-Brushes

It is very easy to create your own Multi-Brushes. First,

locate your User Content folder. If you did not create
a User Content folder when you first ran Anime Studio
(as described in “Creating a Content Folder” on page
8) you can use the Help > Set Custom Content Folder
command to create one.
Your Custom Content folder includes a brushes category
folder within it. Beneath this brushes folder, create a new
folder that has the same name as the Multi-Brush that you
want to create.
The following naming convention can be used to save
settings that apply to the brush. The foldername can
contain six numbers, separated by underscores as follows:
Brushname_#_###_###_#_#_#

The numbers represent the following brush settings:

• First number: Align brush with curve off (0) or on (1).

• Second number: Represents the Brush Jitter angle.

• Third number: Represents the Brush Spacing setting.

Subtle Multi-Brush differences will be more clear after rendering • Fourth number: Minimize Frame to Frame Randomness
(as seen in the bottom) off (0) or on (1).

Chapter 13: Style Window

231 Anime Studio Pro 10
Users Manual

• Fifth number: Tint Brush Using Stroke Color off (0) or on

(1).

• Sixth number: Random Order off (0) or on (1).

After you create the folder, place PNG files, with
transparent backgrounds, for each shape that you want
the Multi-Brush to paint. The following figure shows three
different flower shapes added to the Flowers 1 Multi-Brush
folder.

Create a Multi-Brush folder in your custom content folder,

within the brushes category folder, and place PNG files into the
new folder.

The next time you start Anime Studio, you will find the Stroke Line Width Field
new Multi-Brush added to the Brush palette. It will appear
last in the list. You can further adjust the brush settings as
indicated previously in “Stroke Brush Selector (13)” on
page 227.

Chapter 13: Style Window

232 Anime Studio Pro 10
Users Manual

Stroke Line Width Field (14) This works slightly different, depending on which mode the
window is in:
This field allows you to set the stroke line width of the default
style, selected shape, or selected style. The minimum line • DEFAULTS and SHAPE: In these modes the override is
width is .25. After clicking in this field you can either type in only available if a saved style has been applied (see
or use the mouse wheel to adjust the value. 19). Enabling this will override the applied style line
width with the current width in the line width field.

• STYLE: In this mode the override determines what

properties are included in the saved style. There is an
override for fill, stroke, and line width. You can create
styles with any combination of these properties.

Stroke Line Width Field

• When a style is applied any overrides checked in
that style will override those properties in the shape or
default.
Stroke Width Override Checkbox (15)
If checked, the width displayed in the line width field will Stroke Effect Drop-down Menu (16)
override any other line width in the style.
This drop-down menus allow you to select a stroke effect.
There are many effects to chose from. The stroke effects
are the same as the fill effects described earlier.

Stroke Width Override Checkbox

Chapter 13: Style Window

233 Anime Studio Pro 10
Users Manual

Sketchy

Sketchy Effect Options

Stroke Effect Drop-Down Menu

There are two more stroke Legacy Effects: • Radius: Adjust the radius of the effect.

Chapter 13: Style Window

234 Anime Studio Pro 10
Users Manual

Angled Pen Stroke Effect Settings Button (17)

This button becomes active when you have an effect
selected in the effect drop-down menu next to it. This
button allows you to access and edit the effect settings
dialog of the selected effect.

Stroke Effect Settings Button

Round End Caps Checkbox (14) (18)

Angled Pen Effect Options
You’ll notice the addition of a Round Caps option in the
Stroke section of the Advanced Style window. Check this
• Radius: Adjust the radius of the effect. option if you want to use strokes that have rounded ends.
Uncheck the option to use flat ends on your strokes (similar
• Angle: Provides a dial that allows you to change the to those used in Anime Studio 7 and earlier).
direction of the angled pen. You can also enter a
numerical value. Zero degrees is located at the right of
the dial.

Chapter 13: Style Window

235 Anime Studio Pro 10
Users Manual

Applied Styles Drop-Down Menus

These drop-down menus (19) allow you to apply two
different saved styles.

Rounded End Caps Checkbox

Older files will open with plain end caps to retain their
original appearance. New artwork will default to round
end caps unless the Round Caps option is unchecked. Applied Styles Drop-Down Menus

A saved style is a set of information used by a shape

(color, line width, line brush, effects, etc.), but it doesn’t
actually appear on its own in your animation. Instead, after
creating a style, you can apply that saved style to one or
more shapes. For example, you might create a “Skin” style,
and apply it to all the body parts of a character. Later,
if you want to change the color of the character, just
modify the Skin style, and any shapes that use that style will
change instantly. Use the Style management drop-down
menu to create new styles and to select a style for editing.
Rounded end caps compared to ends that are not rounded.
You can select any saved style you have created to apply
to the default style or the selected shape. Select <None>
to clear the applied style.

Chapter 13: Style Window

236 Anime Studio Pro 10
Users Manual

3D Conversion Thickness Field

Expanded Menu
Swatches
You can define global shading, line width, etc. to maintain
a consistent look throughout your project.
Color Swatch Drop-down Menu (21)
3D Conversion Thickness Field (20) This menu allows you to select from a variety of color
swatches or select a Custom Image as a swatch.
This option (20) is only available for the default style or
selected shapes on vector layers that are using either the
Extrude or Inflate options of the vector layer Layer Settings
> 3D Options tab > 3D Conversion drop-down. This field
displays the 3D thickness of the default style or selected
shape. After clicking this field, you can type in or use the
mouse wheel to adjust this value.
Swatches menu
These swatches appear in the Color Swatch (22) below.

Chapter 13: Style Window

237 Anime Studio Pro 10
Users Manual

These swatches appear in the Color Swatch (22) below.

Color Swatch (22)

The swatch you select from the color swatch drop-down
menu shows up here as a simple color picker. You can
use this as a shortcut for selecting colors for your objects.
Just click a color in this palette to assign it as the selected
shape’s fill color. Right-click a color swatch to assign it as
the selected shape’s outline color.

Color Swatch

Copy, Paste, and Reset Buttons

Expanded menu
There are three buttons that we’ve classified as “other”
controls:
Chapter 13: Style Window
238 Anime Studio Pro 10
Users Manual

Copy, Paste, and Reset buttons

Advanced Window Checkbox

• Press Copy (23) to copy the properties of the selected
shape or style.

• Press Paste (24) to apply a previously copied set of Checker Selection (27)
properties to another shape or style.
When the Checker Selection option is enabled, a
• Press Reset (25) to switch back to editing the default bounding box will be shown around the selected shape
fill and line properties - if a shape or style is currently rather than displaying the object with a checkerboard
selected, it will be de-selected. pattern. This allows you to see the colors and outlines of the
selected shape more clearly.

Advanced Window Checkbox

(26)
As mentioned at the beginning of this chapter, this
checkbox switches the style window between Basic
and Advanced views. The basic view minimizes the style
window to some of the options most used while animating.

Chapter 13: Style Window

239 Anime Studio Pro 10
Users Manual

Chapter 14: The Library • Use the Up and Down arrow keys to move higher or
lower in your content tree.

Window • Use the Right and Left arrow keys to open and close
folders.
The Anime Studio Library window provides access to
• Click or select an item in the list to expand the display
all of the content that ships with Anime Studio such as
and view a larger preview of the content item.
characters, props, images, audio, etc. It has three tabs: the
Library tab that provides access to the content categories,
the Search tab which allows you to search your content
folders for specific files, and the Favorites tab where you
can gain easy access to your frequently used or favorite
content items.
The version of Anime Studio Debut that is sold
through the Mac App store offers most of the
functionality described in this section. Differences will be
noted in this chapter where appropriate.
The Library tab contains eight categories, discussed below.
Each category is further divided into subcategories. You
can create and remove categories and subcategories,
and can add and remove content, including your existing
content libraries, to/from the Library palette.
The following figure shows the various controls and options
that are contained in the library palette. Navigate through
the Library list as follows: The Anime Studio Library window

Chapter 14: The Library Window

240 Anime Studio Pro 10
Users Manual

1. Library Tabs: Allows you to switch between three views 7. Double Checkmark (Add button): Click the double-
in the Library Palette: Library, Search, and Favorites. checkmark icon to add the currently selected item to
your scene.
2. Category Icons: Allows you to select one of the eight
library categories. From left to right, they are Figures, 8. Create New Folder (+}: Click this button to create a
Props, Images, Audio, Video, Effects, Scenes, and 3D. new folder or subfolder beneath the currently selected
library folder. This button appears only when a “My”
3. Collapsed folder: Click the right arrow to expand content folder is selected (My Characters, My Props,
the contents of the folder. The number that appears etc.). You cannot add folders to the default library
in brackets at the beginning of the folder name categories that are furnished with Anime Studio.
designates the number of items that are contained
within that folder. 9. Save to Library (+): Click this button to save the scene
item that is currently selected into the Library.
4. Expanded folder: Click the down arrow to collapse
the contents of the folder. The number that appears 10. Add to Favorites: Adds the item that is currently
in brackets at the beginning of the folder name highlighted in the library to the library’s Favorites tab.
designates the number of items that are contained
within that folder.

5. Selected item: The currently selected item is

Displaying the Library Window
highlighted, and displayed with a larger icon. File If the Library Window is not open, select Window > Library
details appear at the left of the icon that indicate file or use the keyboard shortcut Command/Ctrl+Shift+L.
name and other details if available.
To resize the Library palette:
6. Content preview: If a content item is not selected, a
• Drag the left or right side to resize the width of the
smaller preview icon appears beside the name of the
Library.
file. Click once to select the item to view its details.

Chapter 14: The Library Window

241 Anime Studio Pro 10
Users Manual

• Drag the top or bottom edge to resize the height of • Double checkmark: The Add to Scene (double check)
the Library. button adds the selected item to your scene. After you
choose a content category and locate the item you
• Drag any corner of the Library palette across your want to use in your scene, click the Add to scene icon
screen to the desired height and/or width. to add the item to your project.

• Loading and Managing Items using the Library Icons • Create New Folder: Click the Add a Folder (+) button
The Library icons appear as shown in the following figure. to create a folder beneath the currently selected
These icons appear at the bottom of the palette. Library folder.

From left to right, these icons are: • Save to Library: Clicking the Save to Library (+) button
adds the selected item to the Library palette.

• Delete from Library: Clicking the Delete from Library

(-) button removes the selected item from the Library
palette.

The Save to Library and Delete from Library

buttons allow you to save and delete
content to your “My” folders only. You will not be
allowed to save or delete library content from the
Anime Studio library.

Add to Favorites: Click to add the currently

Library Icons highlighted library item to your Favorites list.

Chapter 14: The Library Window

242 Anime Studio Pro 10
Users Manual

About Library Palette Categories

Anime Studio’s library allows you to quickly select
categories and the items contained within them:
Click a Category icon to select a Content category. Then
drill down in the hierarchical list in the Library list to select
the item you want to add to your scene.

Category Icons

The default categories are broken down by content type:

Figures, Props, Images, Audio, Video, Effects, Scenes, and
3D. When you switch between categories, the Library
remembers which item was selected the last time you used
a specific category.
The content items are shown as a series of thumbnails
arranged in a tree hierarchy. This area is called the Content
Content Pane
pane.

Chapter 14: The Library Window

243 Anime Studio Pro 10
Users Manual

Maintaining Your Content Folders 2. Highlight the folder beneath which you want the new
folder to appear (such as the Anime Characters folder
When you first start Anime Studio, you are prompted shown in the following figure.
to create a content folder. The steps are discussed in
“Creating a Content Folder” on page 8. You can use 3. Click the Create New Folder icon located at the
the subfolders in this directory to store your own custom bottom of the Library palette. You are prompted to
Anime Studio-compatible content. enter a name for the new folder.

In addition, the Library window allows you to add content 4. Enter a new folder name and choose OK. The folder
to your own folders so that you can access this content appears in the Library window.
more easily. When you select one of the category icons at
the top of the Library window (such as Characters, Props,
Cameras, and so on), you’ll see a “My” folder at the top
of the content pane. For example, you will see a folder
named My Characters in the Character category.
You can maintain your Library palette by adding and
removing items to and from the Library palette, as
described below.

Creating Subfolders
You can create new subfolders in the library to store your Creating a Subfolder
content. Follow these steps:
1. Click the category icon that applies to the subfolder
you want to create. For example, if you will use the
new folder to store your own characters, select the
Characters category.
Chapter 14: The Library Window
244 Anime Studio Pro 10
Users Manual

Adding Items to the Library

Saving an item to the Library palette adds the appropriate
item to the currently selected category/subfolder. To add
an item to the Library palette:
1. In the Layers window, locate and highlight the
item that you want to save to the library. Assign a
descriptive name to the object, if necessary, as the
Library uses the layer name to identify the Library
object name.
Library Icons
2. In the Library window, select the desired category/
subcategory by clicking the appropriate Category
icon (Figures, Props, Images, Audio, Video, Effects,
Scenes, or 3D).
Deleting Items from the Library Palette
To delete an item from the Library palette, select it by
3. Click the Save to Library icon (+) at the bottom of the
clicking its preview image, then click the Delete from
Library palette. The object is saved to the Library folder
Library icon (-) at the bottom of the palette (see below for
that you selected.
an image of the Library icons).

Deletions are permanent! Be sure you really

want to delete the selected item. If you have
not saved your content elsewhere (such as archiving
the source files), the deleted content will be
permanently lost. You cannot undo content
deletions.

Chapter 14: The Library Window

245 Anime Studio Pro 10
Users Manual

Searching the Library 1. Switch to the Search tab in the Library.

2. Enter a keyword (such as anime) or a series of

The Search tab in the library allows you to perform a
keywords (such as outdoor scene) in the Search For
keyword search in all or in selected categories.
field.

3. Check or uncheck options as follows:

ƒƒ To perform a search throughout all Library

categories, check the All Categories option.

ƒƒ To perform a search in specific categories in your

Library, uncheck the All Categories option and
then check or uncheck Characters, Props, Images,
Audio, Video, Effects, Scenes, or 3D as needed to
find the content you are looking for.

Searching specific categories

Library Search Tab
4. Click the Search (eyeglass) button. Anime Studio
To perform a search, follow these steps: performs a search for the content that you specified,
and search results appear in the Content pane.
Chapter 14: The Library Window
246 Anime Studio Pro 10
Users Manual

Favorites Tab
The Favorites tab allows you to quickly add your favorite
content to library folders that you create yourself.
To add an item to the Favorites tab:
1. Highlight the library item that you want to add to
favorites.

2. Click the Add to Favorites button at the bottom of the

Library palette. An Add to Favorites menu appears
above the selected item.

3. From the menu, select an existing Favorites category,

or choose <<New Folder>> to create a new Favorites
Add to Favorites button
folder. When the New Library Name dialog appears,
enter a name for your new folder and click OK. The
new folder appears in the Favorites tab and your item You can also access library content by choosing
appears within it. Import > and selecting content from one of the various
subcategories.

Chapter 14: The Library Window

247 Anime Studio Pro 10
Users Manual

Selecting content from the File > Import command

Chapter 14: The Library Window

248 Anime Studio Pro 10
Users Manual

Chapter 15: The

Character Wizard
The Character Wizard allows you to quickly and easily
create characters that you can animate in Anime Studio.
It consists of several different tabs that allow you to specify
body proportions, facial features, movement, clothing and
Click the Character Wizard button to open the Character
other styling features.
Wizard

Using the Character Wizard

You can open the Character Wizard by clicking the
Character Wizard button that is located in the upper right
corner of the Anime Studio interface. It appears just to the
left of the Library button.
The Character Wizard consists of a number of different tabs
that help you design your own character. There are also a
few controls that appear from one tab to the next.

The Character Wizard window

Chapter 15: The Character Wizard

249 Anime Studio Pro 10
Users Manual

Presets
The Presets drop-Down allows you to choose from a
number of different character types: Boy Spiky, Creature,
and Mannequin. Each of these different humanoid
character types has a different appearance to start with,
varying in proportion, body shape, head shape, and so
on. Some presets are more “human” while other are more Presets available in the Character Wizard
fantasy-like. You can use the other tabs to customize the
appearance of the Preset even further.
Use the + button beside the Preset drop-Down to create Changing the Character Views
your own preset, or the - button to delete a preset that you
have previously saved yourself. Built-in presets cannot be On the right side of the Character Wizard, you will see a
deleted. preview of the current character. Beneath the preview is
a slider, that allows you to view your character in one of
The preset will be saved at its current state. If eight angles. Move the slider to the right or left to change
you go back and later change the the perspective view of the character. The first bar displays
character’s appearance (such as changing the character in its front view. As you move the slider
features or colors), the saved preset does not toward the right, the view changes to reflect 1/8 of a circle
automatically update to reflect those changes. You (as if the character has turned 45 degrees).
can resave the character under its original name to
overwrite the old one, or save a new preset under a
different name.

Chapter 15: The Character Wizard

250 Anime Studio Pro 10
Users Manual

Different character views

Changing character views

Exporting Views
After you complete your character in wizard, either with a
preset or by customizing in the other tabs (described in the

Chapter 15: The Character Wizard

251 Anime Studio Pro 10
Users Manual

sections that follow) you can click OK to exit the character

wizard and view the character in your Anime Studio
project.
Before clicking the OK button, you should check the status
of the Export All Views option beneath the view slider. With
this option checked, five views of the character will be
exported to your Anime Studio project (Front, Front 3/4,
Back, Back 3/4, and Side). With the option unchecked,
only the currently selected view will appear in your project.

If any of the parts used in the character have

pre-animated movement (such as eyes that
blink), the movement will also be added to your Some random characters
character. The animation will show on the
Movement tab in the Character Wizard, and will be
added as Actions in your Anime Studio project. Body Tab
The Body tab allows you to adjust the proportions of the
Randomizing Characters various parts of the character’s body. Move the sliders
left or right to adjust the proportions as described in the
The lower-right corner of the Character Wizard contains following sections. The preview window will update the
a Randomize button. When you click this button, the character in real time while you make your adjustments.
Character Wizard combines settings from the different tabs
to create a totally unique character. This is a quick and
easy way to generate a customized character or preset as
a starting point that you can later modify yourself.

Chapter 15: The Character Wizard

252 Anime Studio Pro 10
Users Manual

• Torso height: Move the slider toward the left to

decrease the height of the area between the
shoulders and hip, or toward the right to increase the
height of this area.

• Leg length: Move the slider toward the left to shorten

the legs, or toward the right to lengthen them. The feet
will remain stationary on the ground.

• Head height: Move the slider toward the left to make

the head smaller, or toward the right to make the
head larger. The height of the character will remain the
same.

• Belly width: Move the slider toward the left to decrease

the width of the waist, or toward the right to increase it.

Character wizard Body tab

Proportions

• Height: Move the slider toward the left to make the

character shorter, or toward the right to make the
character taller.
Proportion options

Chapter 15: The Character Wizard

253 Anime Studio Pro 10
Users Manual

Legs

• Hip width: Move the slider toward the left to decrease

the width of the hip, bringing the legs closer together.
Move the slider toward the right to increase the width
of the hip, creating more space between the legs.

• Leg width: Move the slider toward the left to make the
legs and hip thinner, and toward the right to make the
legs and hip wider.
Leg options
• Leg muscles: Move the slider toward the left to make
the legs appear less muscular (and more bony). Move
the slider toward the right to add more muscle to the
legs. Arms
• Foot length: Move the slider toward the left to • Arm length: Move the slider toward the left to shorten
decrease the size of the feet, or toward the right to the arms from the shoulder, and toward the right to
increase the size of the feet. lengthen them.

• Feet: Use the Feet drop-Down menu to select the • Shoulder width: Move the slider toward the left to
appearance of the feet. Choose Generic to create decrease the width of the shoulder (bringing the
a simple representation of a bare foot with no toes. arms closer toward the body), or toward the right to
Other choices include Anime Boy Sneakers, Bare (with increase the width of the shoulder (moving the arms
toes), Bowling Shoes, Female Sandals, Male Sandals, away from the body).
Reference, and Simple.
• Arm width: Move the slider toward the left to decrease
the size of the arms (making them thinner), or toward

Chapter 15: The Character Wizard

254 Anime Studio Pro 10
Users Manual

the right to increase the size of the arms (making them

fatter).
Face Tab
The Face Tab of the Character Wizard allows you to select
• Arm muscles: Move the slider toward the left to make
and adjust the facial features, including the head, eyes,
the arms less muscular and bony, or toward the right to
mouth, and nose. Included at the bottom of the various
make them more muscular.
categories are the following sliders:
• Hand length: Move the slider toward the left to
• Horizontal adjustment: Move the slider left or right to
decrease the size of the hands, and toward the right to
position the facial features, if necessary after you adjust
increase the size of the hands.
the head proportions. For example, you can move
the eyes, nose, and mouth closer to the face if they
• Hands: Use the Hands drop-Down menu to select a
appear to be detached from the face. The adjustment
style of hands for the character. Choose Generic to
slider will be disabled in the Front and Back views
create generic hands that have no fingers. Other
where it does not apply.
choices include Anime Boy Mittens, Female Red Nails,
Long Fingers, Simple, Square, and Toon.
• Vertical adjustment: Move the slider left or right to
adjust the height of the facial features, if necessary
after you adjust the head proportions. For example,
in some cases, the profile of the lips will not match up
with the line of the mouth and this control can match it
more closely.

Arm options

Chapter 15: The Character Wizard

255 Anime Studio Pro 10
Users Manual

• Neck width: When you are working with a head where

the size of the neck can be adjusted, this dial allows
you to increase or decrease the width of the neck. The
option will be disabled when the character does not
have a resizeable neck.

• Head top: (enabled for Generic head only) Move

the slider toward the left to decrease the width of the
crown, or toward the right to increase the width.

• Head middle: (enabled for Generic head only) Move

the slider toward the left to decrease the width of the
middle head, or toward the right to increase the width.

• Head bottom: (enabled for Generic head only) Move

the slider toward the left to decrease the width of the
lower head, or toward the right to increase the width.
Character wizard Face tab

Head

• Head selector: Click the Head drop-Down list to

choose from a number of preset character heads.
Styles range from human to fantasy and more. Some
characters have hair or hats, while others are bald.
Head options

Chapter 15: The Character Wizard

256 Anime Studio Pro 10
Users Manual

Eyes Mouth

• Eye selector: Use the Eyes drop-Down list to select one • Mouth selector: Use the Mouth drop-Down list to select
of several different eye shapes. one of several different mouth shapes.

• Size: Move the slider toward the left to decrease the • Size: Move the slider toward the left to decrease the
size of the eyes, or toward the right to increase the size size of the mouth, or toward the right to increase the
of the eyes. The size will increase or decrease from the size of the mouth.
center point of each eye.
• Height: Move the slider toward the left to lower the
• Height: Move the slider toward the left to lower the mouth, or toward the right to raise the mouth.
eyes, or toward the right to raise the eyes.

• Spacing: Move the slider toward the left to bring the

eyes closer, or toward the right to move the eyes
farther apart.

Mouth options

Nose
Eyes options
• Nose selector: Use the Nose drop-Down list to select
one of several different nose shapes.

Chapter 15: The Character Wizard

257 Anime Studio Pro 10
Users Manual

• Size: Move the slider toward the left to decrease the • Size: Move the slider toward the left to decrease the
size of the nose, or toward the right to increase the size size of the head prop, or toward the right to increase
of the nose. its size.

• Height: Move the slider toward the left to lower the • Height: Move the slider toward the left to lower the
nose, or toward the right to raise the nose. head prop, or toward the right to raise it.

Nose options Head Prop options

Head Prop Movement Tab

Head props are only enabled when the Creature is The Movement tab in the Character Wizard allows you to
selected as a character preset. generate a walk cycle for your character, very quickly and
easily, through the use of sliders. As you design the walk
• Prop: Use the Prop drop-Down list to select one of
cycle, it will be applied to all of the character views (front,
several different head props, such as hats, beards,
back, sides, and quarter-views).
curls, and other facial and head features.
The character is not automatically animated by default.
When you add a character to the scene, the actions
will also appear in the Actions palette so that you can
Chapter 15: The Character Wizard
258 Anime Studio Pro 10
Users Manual

manually add actions in the timeline where you want them

to occur. For example, you can apply a walk at frame 1,
and then add a jump action at frame 100 and a wave
action at frame 120.

When you export a single view of your

character, it will appear as a bone group
inside your Anime Studio scene. When multiple views
of the character are exported to your Anime Studio
scene, the character will appear as a Switch Layer.
Beneath that switch layer, you will see a bone group
for each of the character views (front, back, and so
on).

You will not initially see the actions appear in

the timeline because the bone groups and
layers are contained within a switch layer. The Character wizard Movement tab
actions that you use in your animation will be
applied to the currently selected view (active switch The following options appear:
layer) of the character. To view the actions in the
timeline, select one of the bone groups beneath the • Actions: Use the Actions drop-Down list to select the
main switch layer. type of action that you want to use or preview.

The Walk cycle is a computer generated action. The others

(Jump, Kick, and Wave) are custom actions that were
created in Anime Studio Pro. These actions can be applied
to any character.

Chapter 15: The Character Wizard

259 Anime Studio Pro 10
Users Manual

Move the slider toward the right to add more bend

(adding more bounce to the walk).

Actions options

• Steps per second: Move the slider toward the left to

make your character walk more slowly, and toward Other settings options
the right to make it walk faster.

• Step distance: Move the slider toward the left to make

your character take shorter steps, and toward the right Clothing Tab
to make your character take longer steps.
The Clothing Tab allows you to change the style and colors
• Step height: Move the slider toward the left to keep of the pants and shirt that the character wears. There are
the steps closer to the ground (less knee bend); and two sections available in this tab.
toward the right to raise the feet more from the ground
(more knee bend).

• Arm swing: Move the slider toward the left to decrease

the arm swing (making it stiffer), and toward the right
to increase the arm swing (making it looser).

• Torso bend: Move the slider toward the left to add

less bend to the torso (making the posture straighter).
Chapter 15: The Character Wizard
260 Anime Studio Pro 10
Users Manual

Other settings options

Shirt

• Type selector: Choose whether you want your

character to wear a short-sleeved shirt or a long-
sleeved shirt.
Character wizard Clothing tab
• Color: Click the color ship to open the color palette,
where you can select a new color for the shirt.

Pants

• Type selector: Choose whether you want your

character to wear short or long pants.

• Color: Click the color chip to open the color palette,

where you can select a new color for the pants.
Other settings options
Chapter 15: The Character Wizard
261 Anime Studio Pro 10
Users Manual

Style Tab
The Style tab allows you to change the skin color, hair
color, and stroke color and width for your character.

Other settings options

• Skin color: Click the color chip to open the color

palette, where you can select a new color for the skin.

When you create body parts for the

character wizard, special colors MUST be
used for the skin and hair. Use Yellow (R 255, G 255, B
Character wizard Style tab
0) for any body part that you want to identify as skin
color, and Cyan (R 0, G 255, B 255) for any part that
The settings you select here are as follows: you want to identify as hair. Any parts that use these
colors will inherit the skin or hair colors that you
identify in the Character wizard.

Chapter 15: The Character Wizard

262 Anime Studio Pro 10
Users Manual

• Hair color: Click the color chip to open the color decrease its size, and changes to stroke width will need
palette, and select a new color for the hair. to be made manually.

• Stroke color: Click the color ship to open the color

palette, and select a new color for the character Designing a Character and Walk
outlines.
Cycle
• Stroke width: Sets the stroke width size to use as the
The Walk cycle is a computer generated action. The others
default.
(Jump, Kick, and Wave) are custom actions that were
If you have a mouse with a scroll wheel, you created in Anime Studio Pro. These actions can be applied
can increase or decrease this value while to any character.
watching the character update in the preview To create a walk for your character, follow these steps:
window
1. Click the Character Wizard button in the upper-right
corner of the Anime Studio interface to open the
• Set as default: Click this button after you change the Character Wizard.
value in the Stroke Width field.
2. Design your character using the Body, Face, Clothing,
• Randomize line width: With this setting on, the line width and Style tabs as outlined in the previous sections. Use
will vary slightly across the character. With the setting the view slider beneath the preview window to view
off, the line width will be uniform. your character from all directions as you design it.

• Scale compensation: When checked, the stroke width

will be proportionally adjusted as the character is
resized. If you make the character smaller, the strokes
will get narrower. If you make the character larger,
the strokes will get wider. When unchecked, the stroke
width will remain the same when you increase or

Chapter 15: The Character Wizard

263 Anime Studio Pro 10
Users Manual

Pay attention to the adjustments you make in

height and placement of the facial features.
Use the Horizontal and Vertical adjustment sliders to
position the eyes, nose, and mouth in the side and
quarter-view, and then verify that the changes are
acceptable for each of those views. In other words,
if you use the slider to adjust the position of the nose
and mouth in the side view, also look at how the
changes affect the placement of the facial features
in the Front 3/4 and Back 3/4 views.

3. After you design your character, click the Movement

tab.

Character wizard Movement tab

4. From the Actions drop-down menu, choose Walk (it

should be selected by default).

5. Adjust the Steps per second, Step distance, Step

height, Arm swing, and Torso bend sliders until you are
happy with the walk.

6. The preview window shows a preview of the walk

cycle as it is applied to your character. You can view

Chapter 15: The Character Wizard

264 Anime Studio Pro 10
Users Manual

the walk from several angles by moving the slider right

below the preview window. Examine your character
Making Your Character Walk
from all directions and make tweaks as necessary In the previous project you designed a character and
before you export it to your Anime Studio project. You a walk, and saved the preset. When you exited the
will export your character in the next tutorial. Character Wizard, you noticed that the character that
you worked on appeared in the project window. However,
7. Click the + button at the top of the Character Wizard
because you saved the character, you can easily reuse
window. Name your character My First Character and
it at any time in any project you start. We will begin this
click OK to save the preset. Now you will be able to
tutorial with a new project, and you’ll reuse the character
reuse that character preset in any of your projects.
preset that you designed in the previous exercise. In this
tutorial, you will export only one view of the character: the
Side view.
1. Start a new empty project in Anime Studio.

2. Optionally, you can shorten the length of the

animation from its default of 240 frames. To do so, enter
100 in the end frame field in the timeline.

Saving a preset character

8. Click OK to exit the Character Wizard. You will notice

that the character appears in your scene when you do
so. The next two tutorials will explain different ways that
you can export and use the character in your projects.

Decrease the length of the animation to 100 frames.

Chapter 15: The Character Wizard

265 Anime Studio Pro 10
Users Manual

3. Click the Character Wizard to open the Character 7. Click OK to exit the Character Wizard. Your character
Wizard. now appears in the scene. Press the Play button and
you will see the character walking in the center of
4. From the Presets menu at the top of the screen, select the scene. Press the Stop button after you view the
the My First Character preset that you created in the animation.
previous exercise. Your custom character appears in
the preview area. 8. Click the Rewind button to move the timeline back to
Frame 0. Then use the Transform Layer tool to move
your character off the screen to the left.

Transformation

Choosing a preset character

5. Move the View slider so that you see your character in

the side view.

6. Uncheck the Export All Views option beneath the

preview window. This will export only the current view,
which is now set to the Side view.

Chapter 15: The Character Wizard

266 Anime Studio Pro 10
Users Manual

At frame 96, move the character to the right of the screen.

At frame 0, move the character to the left of the screen.

10. Press the Play button to view your character as it walks

9. Advance the timeline to frame 96, and move the across the screen.
character off to the other side.

Rotating Your Character 360

Degrees
In this exercise you’ll make your character spin around in a
full 360 degree circle.
It’s fairly easy to do, if you follow these steps:
1. Start a new empty project in Anime Studio.

Chapter 15: The Character Wizard

267 Anime Studio Pro 10
Users Manual

2. Click the Character Wizard to open the Character As a general rule, you will want to select the
Wizard. Switch Layer (the top layer) when you
translate, scale, or rotate your character. This applies
3. From the Presets menu at the top of the screen, select the changes to all views of your character. If you
the My First Character preset that you created in the want your character to face a different direction at
previous exercise. Your custom character appears in a specific point in the timeline, you simply move to a
the preview area. later frame, and make the appropriate switch layer
active. This will be demonstrated in the next few
4. Select the Front view before you export the character.
steps. For more information about switch layers, see
This is the view that will be visible when you initially
“Switch Layer” on page 141.
import the character into your scene.

5. Make sure that the Export All Views option beneath 8. If you are not already at Frame 0 in the timeline, use
the preview window is checked. This step will be the Rewind button to return there. Your character
necessary, because you will be working with all of the should be facing toward the front.
exported views in this project.
9. Now, advance the timeline to Frame 6. Expand the
6. Click OK to exit the Character Wizard. The character character’s switch layer so that you see the various
appears in your project. views, as shown in the following figure. The view that
has the filled-in bone is the layer that is currently in
7. The top layer of the character is a Switch layer, and view.
the various character views appear as bone groups
beneath it. With the character’s switch layer selected
(the topmost layer), use the Transform Layer tool to
resize your character as needed.

Chapter 15: The Character Wizard

268 Anime Studio Pro 10
Users Manual

When you export multiple views of the

character, you will see the character appear
as a Switch Layer. Each of the different views of the
character then appear as individual bone groups
beneath that layer, as shown in the following figure.
The view that is currently visible is the layer that you
had selected at the time you exported the
character (in this case, the Front view).

At Frame 6, right-click the Switch layer (shown here as Man)

and select the Front 3/4 view.

11. Now move to Frame 12 (the next keyframe), and right-

click to select the Side view in the Layers window. Your
character will rotate to face the side.
The different views of the character appear as bone groups
within the switch layer. The layer that shows a highlighted bone 12. At Frame 18, switch to the Back 3/4 view.
is the switch layer that is currently visible for the character.
13. At Frame 24, switch to the Back view. At this point, your
10. At Frame 6, right-click in the Switch layer (shown as character has turned one-half of the circle.
Man in the above figure), and select the Front 3/4
view. Your character should rotate to that view and a
keyframe will appear at Frame 6.

Chapter 15: The Character Wizard

269 Anime Studio Pro 10
Users Manual

14. Now select the Transform Layer tool. You won’t actually
use this tool, but you will use the Flip Horizontal button
later in this tutorial.

15. Advance to Frame 30. In the Layers window, right-click

the switch layer, and choose the Back 3/4 view.

16. Next, to make your character continue to spin in the

same direction (rather than return in the same direction
from which it came), you’ll need to click the Flip Layer
Horizontally button in the Transform Layer tool option
bar, as shown below.

At Frame 30, select the Back 3/4 view and then flip it
horizontally.

17. Complete the remaining three frames as follows:

ƒƒ Frame 36: Right-click the switch layer to choose the

Side view.

Chapter 15: The Character Wizard

270 Anime Studio Pro 10
Users Manual

ƒƒ Frame 42: Right-click the switch layer to choose the 3. Open one of these projects, and save it into the
Front ¾ view. Character Wizard folder that resides in your custom
Anime Studio Content folder (see “Creating a Content
ƒƒ Frame 48: Right-click the switch layer to choose the
Folder” on page 8). Name the file according to the
Front view.
action that you want to create (twist, dance, Jumping
18. Save the project if you like, and then play back the Jack, etc). This step is important ... if you save the file
animation. You should see your character spin around under its original name and location you will overwrite
in a circle. the original action that is furnished with Anime Studio.

4. The project will consist of five different bone layers that

Designing Your Own Actions animate a mannequin figure: Back, Back 3/4, Side,
Front 3/4, and Front. If you play the animation you will
Advanced Anime Studio users may be interested in notice that all of the views are animated in unison.
creating their own actions for the Character Wizard. The
actions that you create will appear in the Actions selection
menu that appears at the top of the Character Wizard
Movement tab.
The steps to create your own custom actions are briefly as
follows:
1. Use Windows Explorer (Windows) or Finder (Mac) to
locate your Anime Studio installation folder.

2. Navigate from your installation folder to the Resources

> Support > Character Wizard > Actions folder. You will
see three ANME files within that folder: Jump, Kick, and
Wave. These are the three files that are associated with
the actions that appear in the Actions selection menu.
Chapter 15: The Character Wizard
271 Anime Studio Pro 10
Users Manual

you make your changes on frames 1 or higher (do not

make changes on Frame 0).

7. Make sure that you adjust the length of your animation

so that the movement is seamless when it is played in a
loop. Add or remove frames as necessary to create a
smooth-flowing animation where you cannot tell where
the loop starts or ends.

Five bone layers display a mannequin in different views.

5. Choose the Animation > Clear Animation from

Document command to remove all of the keyframes in
the timeline. They will be removed from all bone groups
in the document.

6. Use the Manipulate Bone tool to modify the movement

of each view so that you again create five different Edit each view for your figure so that the character moves in
views of the character that move in unison. Make sure the same manner for each view.

Chapter 15: The Character Wizard

272 Anime Studio Pro 10
Users Manual

8. After all five views of your character have been “Designing Your Own Actions” on page 270. In addition
animated, save the modified file. You should now see to the Actions folder previously discussed, the Resources >
your new action appear in the Actions menu in the Support > Character Wizard folder contains other subfolders
Character Wizard Movement tab. that store the ANME files for the Character Wizard content
that you select in the Body and Face tabs.

Character Wizard content folders.

The additional subfolders are as follows. Examine the files

for some ideas on how you can create your own content:
Your new action will appear in the Actions menu in the Eyes: Contains the Eyes content that you select from the
Character Wizard movement tab. Eyes section of the Face tab.

• Feet: Contains the Feet content that you select from

the Legs section of the Body tab.
Creating Content for the
Character Wizard • Hands: Contains the Hands content that you select
from the Arms section of the Body tab.
Your Anime Studio application installation folder includes
the Character Wizard subfolder as mentioned previously in

Chapter 15: The Character Wizard

273 Anime Studio Pro 10
Users Manual

Eyes, Feet, and Hands come in pairs ... you Heads, Head Props, Mouths, and Noses don’t
have a right eye and a left eye, a right foot come in pairs, so you won’t need to add the
and a left foot, and a right hand and a left hand. Right or Left prefix as you do with paired body parts.
When you create content for paired body parts, When you create switch layers for a “single” body
precede the topmost layer (switch layer, bone part, name the switch layer according to the view
group, or image) with a name that starts with Right that you are creating. For example, if you create a
or Left, where Right corresponds to the right part, head for the Front 3/4 view, place the head in a
and Left corresponds to the left part. For example, if switch layer named Front 3/4. Names are case-
you create a set of animated eyes for the front view, sensitive and should be initial-capped.
place the character’s right eye in a switch layer
named Right Front, and the character’s left eye in a Here are some additional notes and tips about creating
switch layer named Left Front. Names are case- content for use in the Character Wizard. Again, we
sensitive and should be initial-capped. Open one of recommend that you study the various ANME files in the
the files in the Eyes, Feet, or Hands folders and Character Wizard subfolders to learn more about how
examine the layers within them to view the naming these features work.
conventions used.
Pay attention to the point of origin for the layer that you
are working on. The point of origin is important for the main
• Head Props: Contains the Prop content that you select folder (the topmost layer for the part - whether it be a
from the Head Prop section of the Face tab. switch group, a bone layer, or an image). For example, if
there are multiple eyes contained in a switch layer to make
• Heads: Contains the Head content that you select an animated eye, you only need to set the point of origin
from the Head section of the Face tab. on the switch layer, instead of on each individual eye layer
within that switch layer. If you only have one layer for a
• Mouths: Contains the Mouth content that you select
body part, set the point of origin on that one layer.
from the Mouth section of the Face tab.
• The points of origin for eyes, mouth, and nose should
• Noses: Contains the Nose content that you select from
generally be set at the center. On the other hand,
the Nose section of the Face tab.
Chapter 15: The Character Wizard
274 Anime Studio Pro 10
Users Manual

if you are creating something like a broken nose, • Skin color is also controlled within the Style tab of the
the point of origin might look better being a little bit Character Wizard. When designing your character,
off center. For moving parts (like hands, feet, and assign the color R 255, G 255, B 0 to any parts that you
head) you should set the point of origin at the point of want to replace with the Skin color selected in the Style
rotation. tab.

• Parts can be resized, but only to a limited degree. In • Stroke color is also controlled within the Style tab of the
order to work well within the “normal range”, parts Character Wizard. Any strokes in your Character Wizard
should be designed to the size of the blue output content file that are pure black (R 0, G 0, B 0) will be
rectangle. This rule can be broken ... for example, if you replaced with the Stroke color that is specified in the
intentionally want small, beady eyes you can make Style tab.
them much smaller.

• Examine the heads that are included within the Heads

folder. Some heads have hair that fall in front of facial
features (for an example, see the Spike head, and turn
visibility on and off for the various layers to examine
how they work).

• Hair color is controlled within the Style tab of the

Character Wizard. When designing your character,
assign the color R 0, G 255, B 255 to the objects that
you are using for hair (or eyebrows, moustaches,
and beards). The Character Wizard will replace this
“special” color with the hair color that you choose in
the Style tab.

Chapter 15: The Character Wizard

275 Anime Studio Pro 10
Users Manual

Chapter 16: The Changes are not displayed in the timeline until you actually
create a keyframe change in a channel. For example, you

Timeline Window won’t see a change in the Bone channel until you actually
move a bone.

The Timeline window is used when animating in Anime

Studio to control the current time, and to control objects’
keyframes.

Animation channels are not displayed in the timeline until you

add them to your project

If you then rotate the layer, you’ll see the Rotation channel
added to the timeline, along with its keyframe.

The Anime Studio timeline

The Timeline window only displays information about the

currently active layer in the project. When you switch to a
new layer, the timeline panel will update its display to show
the new layer’s keyframes. A rotation channel added to the timeline

Chapter 16: The Timeline Window

276 Anime Studio Pro 10
Users Manual

There is a Preferences option that allows you to consolidate what the layer looks like if the Consolidate Timeline
timeline channels. This option is off by default in Anime Channels option is active (bottom).
Studio Pro, and on by default in Anime Studio Debut.

A timeline that is not consolidated (top), and a consolidated

timeline (bottom)

Uncheck the Consolidate Timeline Channels option before you

delete keyframes

This option combines all changes on a single layer into one

line in the timeline. The following image shows an example
of a layer that has several channel changes (top), and

Chapter 16: The Timeline Window

277 Anime Studio Pro 10
Users Manual

The consolidated timeline view displays a main window, not in the Timeline window itself.) From left to
keyframe when there is a change in any of right these buttons are: rewind, step back, stop, play, step
the consolidated layers. If you delete a keyframe, forward, and jump to end.
you may not be sure which type of keyframe you
are deleting , or whether or not there are multiple
keyframes being deleted at that point. Be sure to
uncheck the Consolidate Timeline Channels option
in the Preferences dialog before you remove any
keyframes from your timeline.

Controlling Time
The top of the Timeline window has controls for setting the
current time. Whenever you modify an object in Anime
Studio, the modification is recorded at the current time. The
process of modifying an object, changing the time, and Playback controls
modifying it again is how an animation is created in Anime
Studio. Rewind sets the current frame to 0, while jump to end sets
the current frame to the last one in the animation (the
Time in Anime Studio is expressed in terms of “frames”,
length of the animation is defined by the shaded area
where there are x number of frames in a second. By
in the time ruler). The step forward and back buttons
default, a new Anime Studio project has 24 frames per
advance and back up by one frame. The play button
second, although this value can be adjusted in the Project
plays back the animation in the main editing area,
Settings dialog.
repeating playback in a loop. Finally, the stop button stops
The first set of controls for adjusting time is a set of VCR-like playback.
playback buttons. (These are actually at the bottom of the

Chapter 16: The Timeline Window

278 Anime Studio Pro 10
Users Manual

At the top-left of the Timeline window is a text control that

indicates the current frame number. You can change the
Navigating the Timeline with the
current frame by typing in a new value here and pressing Mouse
enter.
To navigate through the timeline with your mouse, you can
Directly below the frame field is a sort of ruler that measures use the following:
time. This time ruler has small tick marks, one per frame, and
has labeled frame numbers at intervals along its length. • Use the mouse scrollwheel to move the sequencer
The time ruler also displays the current frame with a red vertically (up and down through the layers).
triangular marker above the current frame’s tick mark. The
time ruler is used both as an indicator of the current time, • Press the Alt key while you use the scrollwheel to move
as well as a control to adjust it. By clicking (or clicking and the playhead right and left through time.
dragging) anywhere on the time ruler, you can change the
• Right-click and drag to pan left or right through the
current frame.
timeline.
A certain range of frames in the time ruler are shaded with
a darker color. This shaded region indicates the length of • Use the mouse wheel in Graph mode to zoom in and
your animation. When you play back your animation in out of the timeline.
Anime Studio or export it as a movie file, this shaded region
is the part that will play back. You can change the start
and end frames of your animation in the Project Settings Choosing an Interpolation
dialog, or you can Alt-click in the time ruler to set a new Method
start and/or end time. Alt-Click with the left mouse button
to set the start of your animation, and Alt-click with the right You can choose a keyframe interpolation method in one
mouse button to set the end. of two ways:

• To change the interpolation method for existing

keyframes: Select one or more keyframes. Then right-
click a selected keyframe to open the Keyframe menu.
Chapter 16: The Timeline Window
279 Anime Studio Pro 10
Users Manual

Select one of the available interpolation methods from • To change the interpolation method for keyframes that
the menu. you will add to the timeline: Immediately to the right of
the Motion Graph tab you will see a popup menu that
allows you to choose a default interpolation method.
The method that you choose here will be applied to
any new keyframes that you create.

Choosing a default Interpolation Method

The interpolation methods are as follows:

Default Interpolation: Uses the interpolation method that is
set by the Interpolation popup.

• Smooth: Takes into account neighboring keyframes,

Choosing an interpolation method for existing keyframes
creating a smooth transition from one keyframe to the
next.
Chapter 16: The Timeline Window
280 Anime Studio Pro 10
Users Manual

Smooth interpolation Ease In/Out interpolation

• Linear: Moves an object in a straight line, with no • Ease In: Creates a smooth transition at the beginning.
acceleration or deceleration from one keyframe to the
next.

Ease In interpolation

Linear interpolation
• Ease Out: Creates a smooth transition at the end.

• Ease In/Out: Creates a smooth transition at the

beginning and the end.

Chapter 16: The Timeline Window

281 Anime Studio Pro 10
Users Manual

Ease Out interpolation Step interpolation

• Bezier: Allows you to use Bezier handles to shape an • Noisy: Can be used to simulate a handheld camera,
animation curve. but it can be used to interpolate any value. It adds
jitter to the interpolation process so that the object
appears wobbly from one keyframe to the next.

Bezier interpolation

Noisy interpolation
• Step: Holds an object, unmoving, at the previous
keyframe’s position until the next keyframe is reached.
Then it suddenly jumps (or steps) to the new position. • Bounce: Creates a bounce between the start and end
points. Settings include the number of bounces, and
the height scale. A setting of 4 for a bounce count and
a scale of .75 would result in an object that bounces

Chapter 16: The Timeline Window

282 Anime Studio Pro 10
Users Manual

four times, and each bounce would reach 75 percent • Stagger: Creates a stairstepping effect between
of its previous height. keyframes, and gives the illusion of an object that is
staggering against weight.

Bounce interpolation
Stagger interpolation

• Elastic: Similar to bounce, above, except that the

• Cycle: Cycles back to a specific frame number
effect overshoots the ending value and then curves
(absolute cycling), or back by a specified number of
back again until it settles down on the ending value.
frames (relative cycling).

Cycle interpolation
Elastic interpolation

Chapter 16: The Timeline Window

283 Anime Studio Pro 10
Users Manual

Choosing an Animation Interval

By default, interpolation is calculated for each frame (an
animation interval of 1). There might be cases when you
want your animation to be calculated less frequently.
The greater the animation interval, the less smooth your
animation will be.
The Animation Interval popup menu will allow you to
select an animation interval between 1 and 6 frames. You
can find this popup menu in the Timeline, between the
Interpolation and Onionskins popup menus.
The interpolation level is normally 1, which means that a
change is interpolated for each frame. When you choose
an animation interval other than one, a change will not Choosing an Animation Interval for selected keyframe(s)
occur until after that number of frames is reached. For
example, an interpolation level of 3 would cause the
• To change the default animation interval: Use the
selected layer to change at every third frame. This can
Animation Interval popup that appears in the Timeline
create motion that looks more staggered, without having
window. Click the Animation Interval button to select
to add a lot of keyframes to accomplish the same effect.
a default animation interval between 1 and 6. This
• To change the animation interval for existing default animation interval will be applied to any new
keyframes: Select one or more keyframes. Then right- keyframes that you add, until you change the default
click a selected keyframe to open the Keyframe menu. setting.
Expand the Interval command to select an animation
interval between 1 and 6.

Chapter 16: The Timeline Window

284 Anime Studio Pro 10
Users Manual

Choosing a default Animation Interval

Onion Skin Options

Onion Skins
The Onionskin options are as follows:
Next, just below the time ruler, is the onionskin controller.
Expand the Onionskins menu to enable this feature and set • Enable onion skins: Turns on the display of onion skins
additional options. and allows you to set onion skin markers in the timeline.
You will be unable to add onion skin markers unless
this option is checked. You’ll notice has marks that line
up with the frames in the time ruler. By clicking one of
these tick marks, you can turn on an “onionskin” frame.
Anime Studio can display up to 8 onionskin frames.

ƒƒ To add an onionskin marker, click in the tickmarks,

beneath the frame number at which you want to
add an onionskin.

Chapter 16: The Timeline Window

285 Anime Studio Pro 10
Users Manual

ƒƒ To remove an onionskin marker, click the marker will be less transparent. With this option checked.
that you want to remove. the onion skin frames will be displayed only in outline
form. Onionskins before the current frame will be
colored red in varying transparencies. Onionskins after
the current frame will be displayed green in varying
transparencies.

Onion skin markers placed in the timeline.

If you uncheck this option after you set

onionskin markers, it will remove the existing
markers completely and the onionskin bar will be
inactive. To remove existing markers but keep the With Outlines Only unchecked, onionskins are shown as
bar active, use the Clear All button, described partially transparent versions of the layer.
below.

• Outlines only: With this option checked, onion skin

frames will be displayed at various levels of opacity.
Frames that are farther away from the current frame
will be more transparent, and frames that are closer

Chapter 16: The Timeline Window

286 Anime Studio Pro 10
Users Manual

• Clear All: Click this button to remove all existing onion

skin markers. The onion skin bar will remain active so
that you can add new onionskin markers.

Playing a Partial Segment

Sometimes, you may want to play back just a short
segment of the timeline, instead of your entire animation.
For example, you may be working on one small move, and
you want to play it back over and over while you make
small changes to see when you’ve got it just right.
To set a limited segment of the timeline for playback, hold
With outlines only checked, onionskins are shown as red and down the Ctrl key (Windows) or Cmd key (Mac) while you
green outlines of varying transparency. click in the time ruler. Click with the left mouse button to
set the beginning of the segment, and click with the right
mouse button to set the endpoint. To remove the limited
• Relative frames: When this option is checked, you
playback segment, Ctrl-click on the segment endpoints to
will be able to scrub through the timeline, and the
remove them from the timeline.
onionskin markers will move with the current frame,
keeping the same relative distance to each other.
When unchecked, the onion skin frames will remain Animation Channels
stationary as you scrub through the timeline.
Most of the timeline panel is taken up with animation
• Selected layer only: When checked, this option will channels, drawn as horizontal bars below the time ruler.
only display the onionskins for the currently active layer. Each animation channel displays a certain type of
When unchecked, onionskins will be displayed for all motion or effect that can take place in an Anime Studio
layers in the scene. animation. These animation channels only appear in

Chapter 16: The Timeline Window

287 Anime Studio Pro 10
Users Manual

the timeline if you have keyframes associated with that Layer Motion Channels
particular animation channel.
Different types of layers have different animation channels Layer Translation

available. For example, vector layers are the only ones

with a point animation channel, and bone layers are the Layer Scale
only ones with bone animation channels. At the left end of
each animation channel is a small icon that indicates what Layer Z Rotation
type of channel it is.
Layer Y Rotation
Shown below are the icons for the various types of
animation channels. Note that the red-colored channel Layer X Rotation
icons represent animation for the currently selected object.
(If you’re ever unsure about which channel an channel
Layer Horizontal Flip
icon refers to, just hold your mouse over it momentarily for a
tooltip reminder.)
Layer Vertical Flip

To help reduce visual clutter, not all animation

Layer Shear
channels have to be displayed at once in the
timeline. For example, you won’t often have to refer
to the Layer Shading channel in the timeline. Hidden
channels are still doing their work behind the scenes, Layer Effect Channels
they just aren’t displayed in the timeline.
Layer Visibility

Layer Blur

Chapter 16: The Timeline Window

288 Anime Studio Pro 10
Users Manual

Layer Opacity Selected Point Motion

Layer Shadow Point Curvature

Layer Shading Selected Point Curvature

Layer Motion Blur Fill Color

Selected Fill Color

Camera Channels
Line Color

Camera Tracking
Selected Line Color

Camera Zoom

Camera Roll Bone-Only Channels

Camera Pan/Tilt Bone Angle

Selected Bone Angle

Vector-Only Channels
Bone Translation
Point Motion
Selected Bone Translation

Chapter 16: The Timeline Window

289 Anime Studio Pro 10
Users Manual

Bone Scale
the layer, a keyframe will appear in the layer scale channel
at frame 24.
Selected Bone Scale Keyframes appear as small markers on the channels. At
points in time that lie in between keyframes, Anime Studio
Bone Lock automatically calculates how to move an object from one
keyframe position to the next.
Selected Bone Lock
Keyframes are not just static elements displayed in the
animation channels. They can be moved, deleted, and
copied. Anime Studio remembers what key frames are
Switch-Only Channels selected when you change layers, delete keys, move keys,
and so on.
Switch Layer

Adding Keyframes
Particle-Only Channels Keyframes are added automatically when you make a
change (such as position, rotation, scale, etc) on any
Particles On/Off
object in your project.
Use the Animation > Add Keyframe command to add
a new keyframe to any animation that already has
keyframes.
Working with Keyframes
You can also add a keyframe to the current frame at
Keyframes are displayed along the length of an animation any time by double-clicking the timeline in any animation
channel. A keyframe represents a point in time at which channel. This also works in graph mode.
you, the animator, made a modification to an object. For
example, if you set the current time to frame 24, then scale

Chapter 16: The Timeline Window

290 Anime Studio Pro 10
Users Manual

Copying and Pasting Keyframes middle of a long animation, because you won’t have to
scroll through to the end of the animation while selecting
Another way of creating keyframes is to copy an object’s keyframes manually.
position from another point in time. To do this, first select
the keyframes you want to copy. Next, press CMD/CTRL+C.
Now, set the current frame to when you want the copied
keyframe to appear (using the time ruler or the step
forward/back buttons). Finally, press CMD/CTRL+V to place
a copy of the keyframes at the current time. When you
paste keyframes, they become the new selection so that
you can move, scale, or finetune them.

Selecting Keyframes
To modify a keyframe, first it must be selected. This is
accomplished simply by clicking a keyframe in the timeline
panel. A selected keyframe shows up in a highlighted
color.
Multiple keyframes may be selected by holding the shift
key while clicking on keyframes. Alternatively, you can click
Keyframe context menu
and drag a rectangular selection box around the group of
keyframes you want selected.
You can also right-click a keyframe and then use the Select Deleting Keyframes
Keys to Right command in the context menu to select all
keyframes that appear in time after the currently selected To delete selected keyframe(s), press the Delete key.
keyframe. This helps when you need to add space in the Deleting a keyframe removes motion from an object.

Chapter 16: The Timeline Window

291 Anime Studio Pro 10
Users Manual

Moving Keyframes
Keyframes can also be moved by dragging them forward
and back in time. If you want some motion to take less
time, drag its keyframe to the left. To take more time, drag
it to the right.

In Anime Studio 9.5 and later, you can move

selected keyframes beyond other keyframes.

Coloring Keyframes
You can use color to label the keyframes in your timeline
in ways that are meaningful to you. For example, you
can assign one color to keyframes that pertain to a
particular character in your scene, and another color for
another character. This helps you visually keep track of the
movements associated with a particular object or group of
objects.
Assigning a color label to keyframes
To add color to keyframes, select the keyframes that you
want to assign color to. Then right-click to display the
Keyframe context menu, and choose Label > followed
by your color choice (Gray, Purple, Blue, Green, Yellow, Editing Multiple Keyframes
Orange, or Red).
If you have a number of keyframes that you want to edit.
you can now select multiple keyframes and edit them
at the same time. For example, if you want to move an

Chapter 16: The Timeline Window

292 Anime Studio Pro 10
Users Manual

object to a different part of the screen but want to keep appear in the frames where the keyframe is held in its set
the animation of that object the same, you can select all position.
the keyframes and translate them all at the same time.
You can also right-click the keyframe in the timeline to
Select all the keyframes for that object and use the mouse
display the keyframe context menu, and then enter a hold
to move the object to the new location. Then release the
duration (in frames) in the Hold Duration dialog.
mouse button to complete the movement.
This works for both layer movement and point movement.
For example, let’s say that you have a circle that squashes
and stretches, but you want to turn it into a petal shape.
You can select all of the keyframes and then reshape the
object on the first keyframe as needed. Then the reshaping
will be applied to all of the keyframes that follow.

Hold Durations
Hold durations shown in the timeline.
There are times when you need to hold an object in the
same position for a while, before the animation starts. In
cases like this, you can add a hold duration that keeps
the object in place for a set number of frames. Place a
Keyframe Transitions
keyframe in the first frame where you want the object to
As mentioned before, Anime Studio automatically
stay still, and then add a hold duration for the number of
calculates what happens in between keyframes. However,
additional frames where you want the object to pause.
you do have some control over this. By default, Anime
To directly modify the hold duration for a selected Studio will compute a smooth transition from one keyframe
keyframe, hold down the ALT/OPTION key while dragging to the next - most of the time, this is probably what you
the keyframe in the timeline. A red-colored rectangle will want. However, you can change the transition type by
right-clicking a keyframe and choosing a new method

Chapter 16: The Timeline Window

293 Anime Studio Pro 10
Users Manual

from the popup menu that appears. The transition methods The Sequencer allows you to easily move a layer forward
are: smooth (the default), ease in/out (also a smooth or backward in time. Move the clip toward the left to have
motion, but the object starts off moving kind of slowly and it start sooner, or toward the right to have it start later.
slows down again as it approaches the next keyframe), The green arrow in the time ruler, located at the top of
linear (motion is straight from one keyframe to the next, the Sequencer timeline, indicates the frame at which the
leading to a somewhat mechanical look to the motion), currently selected clip will start.
step (there is no transition at all - the object just jumps
from one keyframe to the next), noisy (the object moves You can also reposition your clips in the
in a slightly wobbly motion), and cycle (the value from Channels timeline view. Select the channel
this keyframe to the next will be taken from some earlier you want to move, then right-click in the Time Ruler
section of the timeline). to drag the green arrow to the right or left. You’ll
notice the keyframes and arrow relocate with the
mouse.
Sequencer
For example, you can reposition a layer from frame 1 to
The sequencer provides another view of the timeline. It frame 38, causing the animation in that layer to start at
displays each layer as a block of time. Keyframe changes a later time. To move a layer and its sublayers, click the
are not displayed in the sequencer, but you can create topmost layer and move all of them at the same time. To
keyframe changes in this view. move a sublayer, click the desired sublayer to move it on
its own.

The Sequencer

Chapter 16: The Timeline Window

294 Anime Studio Pro 10
Users Manual

window, and the track in the sequencer will appear as

though it ends at the point where it was hidden.

Select a layer to move it and its sublayers

You can also move a sublayer by itself

You can also use the sequencer to show or hide a layer at

any time during the movie. Advance to the frame where
you want the layer to become invisible. Open the Layer
Settings dialog for the layer that you want to hide, uncheck
the Visible checkbox, and close the Layer Settings dialog. Check or uncheck the Visible setting in the Layer Settings
The contents in the layer will disappear in the project dialog to show or hide a layer

Chapter 16: The Timeline Window

295 Anime Studio Pro 10
Users Manual

To make the layer reappear later in the timeline, repeat character disappears from the scene. You can place the
the process. Select the layer you want to unhide, open pop in the right place.
the Layer Settings dialog, and check the Visible checkbox.
It works the same way if you import a video layer. For
After you close the Layer Settings dialog the layer will
example, if you want an explosion to happen just before
reappear in the sequencer.
the pop, you can import a video layer and place it just
before the sound effect.

You can precisely place audio and video files in Sequencer

view

Motion Graph
The sequencer shows a break where the layer is hidden
In the Motion Graph in the Timeline window, you can
If you import an audio file, it has a fixed duration in the enable Anime Studio’s graph mode. In graph mode, the
sequencer. You can see where the sound effect will animation channels of the current layer are displayed
happen. Say you want a pop to happen when your graphically, rather than just as points along a line. In the
example below you can see what graph mode looks like:
Chapter 16: The Timeline Window
296 Anime Studio Pro 10
Users Manual

Page Up/Page Down, you can move the graph up

and down.

ƒƒ Press the End key, to automatically scale the graph

to accommodate the currently active channel.

The Timeline window in graph mode

The main body of the timeline is now a graph, showing the

value of the animation channels as curves:
Use the scrollwheel on your mouse to increase the vertical
range of the animation curves.
• The horizontal dimension represents time in frames (just
as in the regular timeline mode). To move forward or
backward in time, you can scrub the playhead left or If all animation channels were displayed at once, the
right. graph would become too cluttered to be useful, so it’s
up to you which channels to display at any given time. To
• Depending on the values in your animation channels, turn the display of a channel on and off, click its icon on
the curves on the graph may be too large to view, the left side of the timeline. Channels that are turned on
or too small to work with easily. You can change the become highlighted in the color of their respective curves
vertical scale of the graph in the following ways: in the graph - in the following example, three channels are
turned on: Move (red), Scale (green), and Rotate (olive).
• Scroll the mousewheel to increase or decrease the
vertical scale.

ƒƒ Set the vertical scale numerically in the Scale text

field in the Graph Mode popup.

ƒƒ Press the Page Up/Page Down keys to zoom in and

out vertically. If you hold the Shift key while pressing
Chapter 16: The Timeline Window
297 Anime Studio Pro 10
Users Manual

Double-click a channel icon to make it the active channel.

Use the scrollwheel on your mouse to increase the vertical
range of the animation curves.
In graph mode, you can still add keyframes (use the popup
menu through the right mouse button), delete keyframes,
To further reduce clutter, only one channel can be active
and move keyframes back and forth. In addition, you can
in editing mode at a time. The active channel’s icon on the
move keyframes vertically - that is, change the value of
left is outlined to indicate this - here the Layer Z Rotation
keyframes.
channel is active. Double-click a channel icon to activate
it. The active channel is the only one that has its keyframes Something that will become apparent in graph mode is
displayed in the graph - the keyframes look the same as in that some channels have more than one value for every
regular mode. keyframe. For example, the Layer Translation channel has
separate values for X, Y, and Z translation. These values will
appear as separate colors in the graph: Red for X, Green
for Y, and Blue for Z.

Chapter 16: The Timeline Window

298 Anime Studio Pro 10
Users Manual

Chapter 17: Other

Windows
Audio Recording
Anime Studio allows you to record audio tracks within the
Different colors are used for X (Red), Y (Green) and Z (Blue) application. Select Window > Audio Recording to open the
layer translations. Audio Recording palette. You will see the following controls
and settings:
Another thing you may notice when using animation
cycling: A channel that cycles will have a repeating curve, • Record Button: Press the Record button to start a
without more keyframes after the one that cycles. recording. After you have recorded the content you
want to record (speech, sound effects, etc.), press the
For a hands-on example of using the timeline in graph
same button to stop the recording.
mode, see “Tutorial 5.4: Animation Curves” on page 203 in
your Anime Studio Tutorial Manual. You can start a recording at any selected
frame in the timeline. Simply select the frame
at which you want the recording to begin, and start
your recording at that frame.

• Play Button: After the recording is complete, press the

Play button to hear the recording.

• Sync with Timeline Playback: If this box is checked, the

timeline will play back while you record the audio (and
Chapter 16: The Timeline Window
299 Anime Studio Pro 10
Users Manual

when you play back the audio). This lets you record in
sync with the visuals if you choose to do so.

• Microphone Drop-Down List: Selects the microphone

that you want to use for audio recording.

• Pitch Shifting: Use the Pitch Shifting slider to raise or

lower the pitch of the recording. Move the slider
toward the left to lower the pitch, or toward the right to
raise the pitch. The Reset button returns the recording
to its original pitch.

• Add to Project: Once you are satisfied with the

recording, click this button to save the recording as
a WAV file. The WAV file also appears in the Layers
window as a new audio layer, and in the timeline of
your current project.

Audio Recording Window

Actions Window
In Anime Studio, “actions” are short clips of animation that
can be inserted into the timeline and re-used over and
over again. You might use actions to create little bits of
animation that you don’t want to have to re-create each
and every time you use them - for example, eye blinks,

Chapter 16: The Timeline Window

300 Anime Studio Pro 10
Users Manual

head turns, walk cycles, etc. The Actions window (as you Across the top of the window are four buttons: New Action,
may have guessed) is where you create and use actions. Insert Reference, Insert Copy, Delete Action.
“Tutorial 5.6: Actions” on page 212 in your Anime Studio
Below the buttons is the actions list, which contains a list of
Tutorial Manual shows you step-by-step how to use actions
all actions available for the current layer. You can display
in Anime Studio.
the Actions list in one of four views:
When you start up Anime Studio, the Actions window is
hidden. To bring it up, select “Actions” from the Window • All: Displays all actions in your project.
menu. The Actions window looks like this:
• Regular: Displays actions of a general nature, and
which are not configured as morphs or smart bones.

• Morphs: Displays a list of actions that apply to morphs

only. See “Creating Morphs” on page 303 for further
steps.

• Smart Bones: Displays a list of actions that apply only

to Smart Bones. See “Smart Bones” on page 88 for
more information.
New layers have no actions, just “Mainline”, which
represents the main animation timeline.

Creating New Actions

To create a new action, just click the New Action button.
Anime Studio will prompt you to name the action. The new
action is created in the current layer and, if the layer is a
The Actions window group-type layer, in all of its child layers.

Chapter 16: The Timeline Window

301 Anime Studio Pro 10
Users Manual

The Blink action in editing mode.

Creating a New Layer

When you’re editing an action, you’ll also notice a couple

things change in the Timeline window. First, the title bar of
Editing Actions the timeline will indicate the active action. Second, the
background of the timeline changes color to remind you
To edit an action, double-click it - this will switch an action
that you’re editing an action, and not the main timeline.
into editing mode. (When you create a new action, it also
starts off in editing mode.) You can tell which action is in As you edit an action, the timeline works like normal,
editing mode by the red arrow to its left, as seen below. but instead of working on your main animation, you’re
Chapter 16: The Timeline Window
302 Anime Studio Pro 10
Users Manual

working on a little reusable clip. Actions by themselves do

not appear in your final animation - they only appear if
you use them in the main timeline. To switch back to the
main timeline, double-click on the “Mainline” action in the
actions window. (Mainline is not really an action - it’s just a
way to refer to the main animation timeline.)

Using Actions
When you simply create actions, they won’t appear in the
final animation - they need to be used in the main timeline.
To use an action, you just need to insert it into the main
timeline, which is a simple process.
Make sure the “Mainline” action is active (double-click it so
that it has a red arrow next to it).
1. Set the current time to the frame at which you wish to
use the action.
Inserting an action.
2. Click once on the action you wish to use to highlight it.
If you insert an action by reference, Anime Studio will
3. Click either the “Insert Reference” or “Insert Copy”
insert a special keyframe in the Mainline that refers back
buttons in the Actions window. This is what the Actions
to the action you used. Later, if you make changes to the
window would look like just before inserting the “Step”
action, these changes will automatically be reflected in
action:
the mainline. On the other hand, if you insert an action by
copy, Anime Studio will simply copy all of the keyframes
in the action to the mainline, and they will act just like

Chapter 16: The Timeline Window

303 Anime Studio Pro 10
Users Manual

other normal keyframes. If you later modify the action, any Deleting Actions
changes you make will not appear in the mainline.
To delete an action, click once to make sure it is
If you create actions for objects in your scene you can
highlighted, then click the Delete Action button. When you
assign shortcuts to those actions. You can assign the
delete an action, if that action was inserted by reference
shortcut when you create an action, or you can right-click
into the mainline at any point, those inserted references will
on an existing action and assign a shortcut.
also disappear. If you inserted the action as a copy, those
The shortcuts make it easy to reuse the actions in an copies will remain unchanged.
animation. You can press the shortcut keys while an
animation is playing back to insert the action into the
timeline. Creating Morphs
Anime Studio allows you to blend several different morph
targets together to create a combination of actions or
effects. For further information on this feature, see “Blend
Morphs” on page 392.
To create morph that you can use with the Window > Blend
Morphs command, choose Window > Actions to open the
Actions window. This window allows you to create little
reusable clips of single-frame animations.

Setting an Action Shortcut.

Chapter 16: The Timeline Window

304 Anime Studio Pro 10
Users Manual

The Actions window. Assign a name for your morph.

To create a new morph, click the New Action button (the Then, move some points around in your scene to represent
first button in the Actions toolbar). Enter a name for your the morph that you are creating. The following shows
morph in the Action Name dialog. an example of the scene before and after the Happy
changes are made:

Chapter 16: The Timeline Window

305 Anime Studio Pro 10
Users Manual

Select the Happy morph in the Actions window, and notice a

single keyframe in the timeline

Default state (left) and Happy morph (right).

Continue creating additional actions that you want to
blend together. In our demonstration, we have created
After you create your new morph, click the Mainline
two additional actions – Angry, and Sad – both shown in
(top) line in the Actions window. The character should
the following image. Note that your action can change
return to its default state. Select the Happy action again
keyframes for anything. In addition to moving some points,
in the Actions window, and notice a single-frame action
the Angry action also changes the color of the face. Now
in the Channels tab of the timeline. Notice that all of the
you should have a number of actions, all with single-frame
keyframes are on Frame 1. This is very important when
animations that have keyframes on frame 1.
blending poses. A general action can have as many
keyframes as you like … but if you want to blend poses, the
action can only contain a single keyframe at Frame 1.

Chapter 16: The Timeline Window

306 Anime Studio Pro 10
Users Manual

You can morph any type of value. The Angry morph will
change the color of the face in addition to changing the facial
features.

Chapter 16: The Timeline Window

307 Anime Studio Pro 10
Users Manual

Anime Studio
Menus

Chapter 16: The Timeline Window

308 Anime Studio Pro 10
Users Manual

Chapter 18: File Menu

File Menu

Chapter 18: File Menu

309 Anime Studio Pro 10
Users Manual

New • To switch to the previous document press Ctrl+Shift+Tab

(Windows) or Alt+Shift+Tab (Mac).
Creates a new, empty Anime Studio project using the Autosave files are generated for all open documents. If the
default project settings (NTSC D1, 720 x 534 pixels). Use the application doesn’t shut down properly for some reason,
Project Settings command (“Project Settings...” on page a dialog will give you the opportunity to reopen them the
312) to change your project settings if desired. next time you launch Anime Studio. Viewport settings and
tool selections will also be restored.
Multiple Document Support
Anime Studio 10 allows you to have multiple documents New from Template
open at the same time. When you create a new
Allows you to create a new project based on a template.
document, it will open in a new tab and keep existing
Expand the submenu to see an available list of templates.
documents open in their own tabs.
You can use the View > Show Document Tabs command Templates are standard ANME files that are
or the keyboard shortcut Command/CTRL+Shift+J to show saved to the Templates folder within your
and hide the document tabs in the interface. If the tabs Anime Studio installation folder. For example, if you
are hidden, you can select documents in the following want to create a template for use in Anime Studio
ways: Pro, you can save your ANME file to Smith Micro >
Anime Studio Pro 10 > Templates folder.
• Open documents will appear in a list at the bottom of
the View menu. Select one of the documents in the list
to bring it to the foreground.
Open...
• To switch to the next document press Ctrl+Tab
Prompts you to open a Anime Studio project file that was
(Windows) or Alt+Tab (Mac).
previously saved to disk. The Open dialog allows you to
select multiple documents. You can also drag one or more

Chapter 18: File Menu

310 Anime Studio Pro 10
Users Manual

documents from Windows Explorer or Finder to open them

in Anime Studio. Each document will open in its own tab.
See “Multiple Document Support” on page 309 for more
information.

Open Recent
Click the X in the tab to close the current document.
Displays a list of recent files that you can reopen. Files
that have been moved or deleted since saving them will
automatically be removed from the list.
To clear the list of recent files, choose File > Open Recent,
Save
and click the Clear Menu command at the bottom of the Saves the current project to disk.
list.
Your Anime Studio project is automatically
saved every 30 seconds while you work, to a
Close temporary location on your hard drive. If the
application crashes, you will be asked if you want to
Closes the current project. You can also close a document
reopen the previous project the next time you start
by clicking the X that appears in the left side of the
Anime Studio.
document tab when you hover over the tab.

Anime Studio documents are now saved with

a preview thumbnail. By default the it
generates a thumbnail that is 128 x 128 pixels. You
can set thumbnail preferences in the Preferences
dialog. See “Options Tab” on page 349 for more
information about thumbnail options.

Chapter 18: File Menu

311 Anime Studio Pro 10
Users Manual

Save As... if you need to send your project to someone else for
collaboration or for technical support.
Prompts you for a name and location, then saves the
project to disk.

Revert
Revert the current document to its last saved state.

Gather Media
When you import something into an Anime Studio project,
such as an image, movie, or audio file, the original
locations of the imported objects are only referenced
within the Anime Studio project. In other words, they are
not actually part of the project file itself, rather the project
file links to the files on your disk(s).
If your project contains many external files, we recommend Gather Media command
that you place them in a common folder. When you do
that, you have a self-contained folder that you can copy, After choosing the command, you are prompted to select
archive, or move the project and the project will still work. or create a folder in which to store the project-related files.
If you haven’t kept your files in a single folder, the File > You then enter a name for the gathered project and click
Gather Media command allows you to create a single Save to save it to the selected folder. When you look in
location for all related project files. This is very useful the folder, you will see the Anime Studio project file, along

Chapter 18: File Menu

312 Anime Studio Pro 10
Users Manual

with Audio, Images, and/or Movies folders that store the frame rate). Also in this dialog, you can set the start and
collected media associated with it. end frames of your animation, defining how long the
overall animation will be.
Poser scenes will not get gathered, due to the
complex structure of the Poser library folder
hierarchy.

A Gathered Media folder

The Project Settings dialog

Project Settings...
Brings up the project settings dialog. As seen below, the Dimensions
project settings dialog lets you control the pixel width and
height of the project, as well as the number of frames per • Dimensions menu: Allows you to set Custom
second. You’re free to change these values at any time, dimensions, or choose from a wide variety of presets.
although it’s easiest if you set up the values you want Presets include the following:
before you start creating your animation (particularly the

Chapter 18: File Menu

313 Anime Studio Pro 10
Users Manual

ƒƒ Custom: Allows you to enter or edit your own ƒƒ YouTube HD: 1280 x 720 pixels, 24 frames per
settings. second

ƒƒ NTSC D1: 720 x 534 pixels, 24 frames per second ƒƒ iPhone: 480 x 320 pixels, 24 frames per second

ƒƒ NTSC D1 Widescreen: 872 x 486 pixels, 24 frames ƒƒ iPhone 4: 960 x 640 pixels, 24 frames per second
per second
ƒƒ iPhone 5: 1136 x 640 pixels, 24 frames per second
ƒƒ PAL D1/DV: 788 x 576 pixels, 24 frames per second
ƒƒ iPad: 1024 x 768 pixels, 24 frames per second
ƒƒ PAL D1/DV Widescreen: 1050 x 576 pixels, 24 frames
ƒƒ iPad HD: 1280 x 1024 pixels, 24 frames per second
per second
ƒƒ Android: 480 x 360 pixels, 24 frames per second
ƒƒ 480p Widescreen: 852 x 480, 24 frames per second
ƒƒ Android HD: 1280 x 1024 pixels, 24 frames per
ƒƒ 720p (HDV/HDTV): 1280 x 720 pixels, 24 frames per
second
second
ƒƒ Droid: 854 x 480 pixels, 24 frames per second
ƒƒ 1080p (HDV): 1440 x 1080 pixels, 24 frames per
second • Constrain Proportions: This option allows you to
ƒƒ 1080p (HDTV): 1920 x 1080 pixels, 24 frames per maintain the aspect ratio of your animation project.
second When the option is checked, you can enter a
new width or height, and the other dimension will
ƒƒ VGA: 640 x 480 pixels, 24 frames per second automatically change to maintain the same width-to-
ƒƒ Web: 320 x 240 pixels, 24 frames per second height aspect ratio. If you choose one of the preset
configurations from the Dimensions drop-down list, it
ƒƒ Web Widescreen: 426 x 240 pixels, 24 frames per will ignore the Constrain Proportions option and resize
second your project to the dimensions specified in the selected
ƒƒ YouTube: 480 x 320 pixels, 24 frames per second preset.

Chapter 18: File Menu

314 Anime Studio Pro 10
Users Manual

• When you select a preset, the following settings ƒƒ Focus Distance: The focus distance value is the
appear below. distance from the camera to the plane of perfect
focus.
ƒƒ Width: The width, in pixels
ƒƒ Focus Range: Objects that are within the “focus
ƒƒ Height: The height, in pixels
range” distance of this plane will also appear in
ƒƒ Frame Rate: The number of frames per second in focus. For this feature to work correctly, you need
the animation. to set up multiple layers with different depth values
so that some can be in focus, and others out of
ƒƒ Start Frame: The starting frame of the animation.
focus. If you move the layers (or the camera)
ƒƒ End Frame: The ending frame of the animation. in your animation, the focus will automatically
change based on distance from the camera.

Background Color ƒƒ Max Blur Radius: Sets a maximum value for the
blurriness of your scene.
• Background Color: Sets a background color for the
Enhancements in Anime Studio 10 make it easier to
project - just click on the color swatch.
define sharp and blurry areas when Depth of Field
is used. “Tutorial 6:5.2: Crowds, Particles, and Depth
Depth of Field of Field” on page 261 in your Anime Studio Tutorial
Manual shows how to use these enhancements.
• Depth of Field: Depth of field simulates a camera,
where a certain range of objects are in focus, while
closer or more distant objects become blurry Render Style
ƒƒ Enabled: Check this option to enable or disable the
The Render Style section allows you to select the type of
Depth of Field feature in your project.
rendering that will be performed when you choose the File
> Preview command, or use the Cmd +R (Mac) or Ctrl+R
(Windows) shortcuts.
Chapter 18: File Menu
315 Anime Studio Pro 10
Users Manual

The following settings are included in this section:

• Fill Style: Select the fill style that you want to use each
time you render. Choices are Normal, None (same
as turning the Fill option off in the Style window);
Background; Back Transparent; Crayon; Hatched, and
Pen. The preview window updates as you make your
selections.

Global Fill styles

Chapter 18: File Menu

316 Anime Studio Pro 10
Users Manual

• Stroke Style: Select the stroke style that you want to

use each time you render. Choices are Normal; None;
Basic Black; Sketchy; Crayon; and Pen. The preview
window updates as you make your selections. In
addition, there is a Chalk style that is designed for use
with a white stroke color on a dark background as
shown below.

The Crayon style is also available as an effect

in the Advanced view of the Style window.

Global Stroke styles.

Chapter 18: File Menu

317 Anime Studio Pro 10
Users Manual

Chalk Stroke style.

• Layer Style: Select the layer style that you want to use
each time you render. Choices are Normal, Heavy Global Layer styles.
Outline, and Cutout. The preview window updates as
you make your selections.
• Minimize frame-to-frame randomness: If this option
is not checked, styles like crayon will have lines that
appear different on each frame, which can cause
some distraction unless frame rates are lower and
the effect is intentional. When you turn this option
on, Anime Studio will try to use the same crayon
strokes from frame to frame to reduce the amount of
flickering.
Chapter 18: File Menu
318 Anime Studio Pro 10
Users Manual

Other Settings grain, a value of 16 is a good start for a subtle noise

effect.
• Sort Layers by Depth: The “Sort layers by depth”
checkbox allows top-level layers in Anime Studio to • Stereo Rendering: Use the Stereo Rendering drop-Down
move in front of and behind each other during an to select the type of stereo rendering you want to
animation. Normally, layers are drawn in the order they perform:
appear in the Layers window. However, with this option ƒƒ None: Turns off stereo rendering capabilities.
turned on, layers are displayed according to how far
they are from the camera. See “Tutorial 5.5: Sorting 3D Rendering settings should be set to None if
Layers by Depth” on page 207 in your Anime Studio you do not want to render out in a 3D
Tutorial Manual for an example of using this feature. format).

• Sort by True Distance: Typically, layers are sorted by

ƒƒ Red/Blue Anaglyph: When you render or preview
their depth from the camera, but if you’re trying to
your project with this setting enabled, you will see
create a 3D object using multiple Anime Studio layers
3D objects rendered as a red/blue stereo pair. You
(like a cube or pyramid), you may want to turn on “Sort
will need special red/blue stereo 3D glasses to see
by true distance”. This tells Anime Studio to sort layers
the object in three dimensional space.
by the distance from the camera to the layers’ origins,
rather than by depth. Usually this option will be left ƒƒ Side By Side (YouTube friendly): Produces two
unchecked. separate images rendered side by side in the same
image, one for the left eye and one for the right
• Noise Grain: With the “Noise grain” field, you can set eye.
up some noise grain for the project. Noise grain is a
subtle film grain-type effect that adds slight variations ƒƒ Cross-eyed: Looks similar to Side by Side, except
to the pixels in your project and leads to a more natural that the left eye image is on the right side, and the
look to the final image. It can also increase the visual right eye image is on the left side. This is the type of
quality in some kinds of movie compression when you stereo rendering that YouTube expects.
generate an animation. If you want to try out noise
Chapter 18: File Menu
319 Anime Studio Pro 10
Users Manual

Choose View > Stereo to see a live preview of

the Red/Blue stereo effects. This makes it
easier to preview and reposition your 3D objects

• Eye Separation: This setting controls how far apart the

right and left eyes are when rendering two images
for a stereo rendering. If the value is too close, the 3D
effect is lost. If the value is too far apart, the 3D effect
will cause eye strain or won’t look as effective.

• Extra SWF Frame: Check this option to add an extra

frame at the end of the video

3D Stereo view

• Save as Defaults: When you create a new project in

Anime Studio, your animation defaults to 320x240 pixels
at 24 frames per second. If you create most of your
projects at different settings, you can change these
defaults. Just type in new values in this dialog, and
click “Save As Defaults” to make the new settings the
default settings for all new projects.

Chapter 18: File Menu

320 Anime Studio Pro 10
Users Manual

• Restore Defaults: Resets the project to the default Checkboxes appear to the left of each of the items
values. in the scene you want to import. Check one or more
of the layers to add it to your own project (a preview
of the selected layer appears on the right side of the
Import dialog. The Uncheck All or Check All buttons can be
used to deselect or select all of the items in the project.
Anime Studio can import several kinds of other media files
Press OK to copy the selected layers into your open
into an animation project. The commands in this sub-menu
project, including any animation in the layer. This is an
let you import these files.
easy way to share objects between project files and
reuse bits of animation here and there.
• Anime Studio Object: This command will ask you to
choose a Anime Studio project file. Once you’ve Several files are included with Anime Studio that
chosen a file, a list of layers in the project will show up contain scenery, characters, props, etc. You are
in the dialog welcome to include these in your own projects by using
this menu command.

• Image Imports an image file as a new Image layer. The

most common type of file to import into Anime Studio is
images. It doesn’t matter how the images are created,
so feel free to use pictures from digital cameras,
backgrounds from scanned drawings or painted on
the computer, textures, computer-generated 3D
scenery, etc. The image formats supported by Anime
Studio are: JPEG, BMP, Targa, GIF, and PNG. Generally,
we recommend PNG, since the PNG format provides
The Insert Object dialog for variable levels of transparency, allowing you to
create non-rectangular images that can blend in
smoothly with other elements in the scene.

Chapter 18: File Menu

321 Anime Studio Pro 10
Users Manual

• Movie: Imports a movie file as a new Image layer. • Tracing Image: (Anime Studio Pro only) Loads an
Anime Studio supports importing QuickTime (Windows image file to be used for tracing purposes. The image
and Mac OS) and AVI (Windows only) movie files. A formats supported by Anime Studio are listed in
movie that you import into Anime Studio will play back “Appendix A: Product Comparison” on page 402.
along with the Anime Studio animation, allowing you The Tracing Image command is the same thing as
to combine 2D and 3D elements, or to composite an “Select Tracing Image” in the View menu.
Anime Studio animation on top of a pre-recorded
video sequence. On Windows, if you have problems • Audio File: Loads a sound file to be used as a
importing QuickTime movies, then you probably need soundtrack for the current animation. The audio
to download and install QuickTime (http://www.apple. formats supported by Anime Studio are listed in
com/quicktime/). Anime Studio will also import native “Appendix A: Product Comparison” on page 402.
Moho files (files ending with .moho). This command is the same thing as “Select Soundtrack”
in the Animation menu. Anime Studio has limited
• Vector File: (Anime Studio Pro only) Asks you to select support for audio, but you can import a single sound
an Adobe Illustrator (.ai) file (http://www.adobe.com), file as a soundtrack for your animation. Anime Studio
SVG file, or EPS file. Anime Studio will import the bezier uses libsndfile to handle sound files (see http://www.
curve shapes in this file into a new Anime Studio vector mega-nerd.com/libsndfile/), so any format that
layer. These objects can then be further edited and libsndfile supports is fair game. Generally, it’s best to
animated in Anime Studio. Anime Studio can import stick with uncompressed WAV or AIFF files.
vector artwork created in other vector illustration
programs. These files can be in Adobe Illustrator, EPS, • OBJ 3D Model (Anime Studio Pro only) Imports a
or SVG format. If your files are in Illustrator format, 3D model as a new Anime Studio 3D layer. Anime
make sure that you save them as Illustrator 8 (or earlier) Studio can import 3D files that are in OBJ format.
format. More information about 3D layers can be found in
“3D Layers” on page 117. Finally, Anime Studio can
You can open multiple Illustrator files at once. import 3D files created by 3D modeling programs. At
Simply drag and drop multiple Illustrator files this time Anime Studio can only import OBJ files, but it’s
into the Anime Studio window. a quite common format, and most 3D programs can
Chapter 18: File Menu
322 Anime Studio Pro 10
Users Manual

export to OBJ. OBJ files can include texture maps, and They are also editable in the Style window. You can
if your model uses one, Anime Studio will import and turn the stroke on or off, and adjust the width of the
use it as well. If you’re new to 3D, and you’re looking stroke.
for a program to create 3D models for use with Anime
Studio, we recommend Poser (http://store.smithmicro. Many OBJ files and Poser objects have multiple
com/ProductDetails.aspx?pid=10430). materials. The multiple materials will show up as
Shapes in the Style window. Select a material from the
• Poser Scene: If you already own Poser, you can import Shapes drop-Down (discussed in “Tutorial 3.1: Bone
Poser scenes directly as discussed in “Import Notes and Binding” on page 83 in your Anime Studio Tutorial
Tips” on page 326. Manual) and change material settings if desired. If you
select None from the Shapes drop-Down it controls the
default material and stroke.

Materials appear as Shapes in the Style window

Materials appear as Shapes in the Style window

Chapter 18: File Menu

323 Anime Studio Pro 10
Users Manual

When you are using a 3D layer, you can open

the Layers window and go to the 3D Options tab
Poser Integration
to control some additional properties. See “3D Anime Studio allows you to import Poser scenes into your
Options” on page 204 for more information. Anime Studio projects. In order for this feature to work,
Poser 7 or later must be installed on your system, and
The lower section of the File > Import menu displays content used in your Poser scene must be installed into a
several different categories that allow you to open Library folder that is recognized by your Poser application.
content that is furnished with Anime Studio. You will also Choose File > Import > OBJ 3D Model. You will be allowed
find these items in the Library (see “Chapter 14: The to choose OBJ files or Poser scenes (PZ3). Locate the file
Library Window” on page 239). In the Import menu that you want to import. After a brief wait, the Poser file will
this content is arranged in the following categories: 3D, be imported into your scene. It appears as a 3D layer, so
Audio, Characters, Effects, Images, Props, Scenes, and you will be able to control the appearance of the Poser
Video. content by opening the Layer Settings dialog and clicking
the 3D Options tab.

Real-Time Media Connection

The “live linking” feature allows you to import images,
movies and sound files and then edit them in their native
editors without worry. Any edits you make later in third party
editors will automatically be recognized and updated
within Anime Studio.
Real-time media connections, combined with Photoshop
layer support on import, provide an exceptional way to
design characters and other content for your Anime Studio
scenes. For more information on Photoshop support, see
“About Photoshop Layer Support:” on page 330.

Chapter 18: File Menu

324 Anime Studio Pro 10
Users Manual

The Poser integration features also import any animation

associated with the Poser scene. The Poser tool, located
in the Layer section of the tool box, allows you to select
a Poser figure or actor (such as a body part) within the
scene, and then modify the parameters of the selected
item. You will be able to edit many of the same parameters
as you can in Poser. For example, you can select a
body part and then adjust the Bend, Twist, Front-Back,
or Side-Side parameter to rotate the body part to a
different position. You can also use the Window > Poser
Parameters command to open the Parameters window
for the selected body part. When you move a body part,
keyframes appear in the timeline.

If the Poser project used a BVH motion

capture file to generate the animation on the
character, you will see keyframes on every frame.
You can select and delete some or all these
An imported Poser object keyframes and edit the animation within Anime
Studio if desired. A new keyframe will be added at
Poser must be installed in order for the Poser any point in the timeline when you make a change
integration features to work. in the Poser Parameters palette.

When you rotate the integrated Poser content, the display

of the character switches to Box mode to reduce demand
of your computer resources.

Chapter 18: File Menu

325 Anime Studio Pro 10
Users Manual

After importing the Poser scene, you may

notice a difference in the time length of your
animation after you import into Anime Studio. Poser’s
default frame rate it 30 frames per second, whereas
Anime Studio’s default frame rate is 24 frames per
second. To make the time match up to that created
in the Poser program, choose File > Project Settings,
and set the frame rate of your Anime Studio project
to 30 frames per second.

Use the Poser Parameters window to adjust scale or position of

body parts.

Chapter 18: File Menu

326 Anime Studio Pro 10
Users Manual

Import Notes and Tips Moho Files

Anime Studio will also import native Moho files (files ending
Referenced Files with .moho).

Please note that Anime Studio references the directory

location of images, OBJ’s, sound files and movies files that
Library Content
have been imported for use. When exporting into movie Please read Section 6 of the EULA (End User License
format, Anime Studio continues to reference this directory Agreement) for rules on using the content that has been
location. Moving referenced items from one location supplied with your version of Anime Studio. Please note that
to another will prevent the item from being displayed when importing existing content/movies from the Anime
or heard. We recommend that all items used in your Studio Content Library using the File > Import option, some
animations or artwork accompany it’s native file format animations/movies exceed the default “End Frame”. This
(ANME) and final exported format. will prevent you from seeing the full movie. To adjust the
default “End Frame” settings, please select File > Project
Startup Folder Settings and change the field beside “End Frame”. You
can also double click the movie/content file you would
Adding your own .anme file to the “Startup Folder” like to view from within the Content Library. To access the
(located in the root directory of your Anime Studio Library, select Help > Open Content Library.
installation) will always make Anime Studio open this .anme
document first when it’s initially launched. Please make
sure to rename your .anme file to “StartupFile.anme”.

Chapter 18: File Menu

327 Anime Studio Pro 10
Users Manual

The Library content files (characters, props, how you want to handle the layer import within Anime
etc.) are installed in a shared documents Studio.
location on both Windows and Macintosh. This
allows multiple users on the same computer to share
library resources, and to install additional content
that they might download (from Content Paradise,
for example). On Windows systems in particular, it
can be difficult to add new files to the Program Files
directory when running newer versions of the
Windows operating system, which is why the shared
documents location is used.

Photoshop images can be imported with individual layers, or

as a composite image.
Importing 3D OBJ’s (Anime Studio Pro
only) The choices are:

Please note that loading 3D OBJ files may take some time. • Individually: Choose this option if you want to retain
Loading times depend on the complexity of the OBJ file. the Photoshop layers when you import your Photoshop
file. Each Photoshop layer will appear in the Layers
window and will be named exactly as they are named
Photoshop Tips in the original Photoshop file. You will be able to show
and hide the layers individually within Anime Studio
in the same way that you can in Photoshop, and you
Importing Photoshop Files will be able to use the Anime Studio tools to modify or
animate the layers.
When you use the File > Import > Image command to
import a Photoshop file into Anime Studio, a dialog will ask

Chapter 18: File Menu

328 Anime Studio Pro 10
Users Manual

Photoshop layers shown in Anime Studio Pro.

Photoshop layers shown in Photoshop.

Further, you can group layers in Photoshop that can be

interpreted as layers in Anime Studio. For example, you
can create a Photoshop group that contains various
mouth positions. If you make only one of those mouths
visible in the group before you import the Photoshop
file into Anime Studio, the other layers in the group will
be configured as switch layers for the visible mouth
when it appears inside Anime Studio.

Chapter 18: File Menu

329 Anime Studio Pro 10
Users Manual

Mouth group in Anime Studio Pro (with the same mouth layer
Mouth group in Photoshop (with one mouth layer visible). visible).

There will also be a live connection between Anime

Studio and Photoshop, such that if you make changes
to the Photoshop file and resave it, the changes will
also appear in your Anime Studio project.

Chapter 18: File Menu

330 Anime Studio Pro 10
Users Manual

The opacity of a Photoshop layer will be RGB files with regular pixel layers are the best way to go for
baked in Anime Studio when imported. In compatibility.
other words, if the opacity of a layer was set to 50%
Anime Studio has been tested with several Photoshop
in Photoshop, Anime Studio will see that as the 100%
examples, and the following Photoshop features are known
value. You will not be able to increase to 100% in
to work within Anime Studio:
Anime Studio.
• Blending modes are supported
• Composite: Choose this option if you want the
• Layer opacity is supported
Photoshop file to be combined into a single image
layer in Anime Studio. • Groups are supported. Groups where only one child of
the group is visible come in as switch layers.
About Photoshop Layer Support: • Smart objects and smart filters do work internally to the
When importing a PSD file, you have the option to load PSD. They store a flat representation of themselves.
layers individually or load the composite as a single layer. The following Photoshop features are not supported in
Anime Studio:
The live linking feature between Photoshop
and Anime Studio may work unexpectedly in • Layer effects are not imported.
certain situations. The live link works as expected
when layers are edited and left visible in Photoshop. • Any layer that has a mask in Photoshop gets skipped.
However, the live link may work unexpectedly after
• 3D layers, text layers, and other kinds of non-basic or
importing into Anime Studio if you later move,
non-pixel layers cannot be imported.
delete, or hide layers in Photoshop and then return
to Anime Studio.
• Layers that have visibility turned off in Photoshop will
have their names grayed out in the Anime Studio
Photoshop has many features, and not all of them are Layers palette.
supported within Anime Studio. In general, standard 8-bit
Chapter 18: File Menu
331 Anime Studio Pro 10
Users Manual

Exporting from Photoshop The script exports the following 2 things: Firstly, it converts
the PSD file into a .ANME file. Secondly, all the individual
Anime Studio is equipped with a Photoshop export script layers of the PSD file are converted into individual PNG files
that will give you the ability to take your PSD files and and are placed in a folder of the same name as the .ANME
export them into .ANME format. The .ANME format is the file. The folder with the PNG’s and the newly converted
native Anime Studio format. This process helps users from .ANME file will be located side by side. It is important
having to re-draw or export individual layers as images into to note that whenever you open the .ANME file, it will
Anime Studio. reference the PNG folder. So please keep them side by
side. If the PNG folder and the newly converted .ANME are
The PSD to ANME script is named Export Layers To Anime
not located in the same folder, the layers within your newly
Studio.jsx. To access this script, please make sure you’ve
opened .ANME will not work properly in Anime Studio.
configured a content location as described in “Creating
a Content Folder” on page 8. The script will be copied
into that folder.
Refresh Media
To use the script within Adobe Photoshop, copy the Export
Layers To Anime Studio.jsx file to your .../Photoshop/ The File > Refresh Media command (or the keyboard
Presets/Scripts folder. You should then be able to open up shortcut Command/Ctrl+M) causes Anime Studio to
a Photoshop document, run this script from File > Scripts > check the modification dates of all of the media that is
Export Layers to Anime Studio, and it will generate a new referenced in the project, and will reload the media that
Anime Studio file complete with an image layer for each has changed.
original Photoshop layer. Basically, the script converts PSD
formatted files to .ANME files. It exports every layer that
was created originally in Adobe Photoshop and makes it
Preview
completely readable when imported into Anime Studio. All
Generates a preview image of what your project will look
versions of Adobe Photoshop since version 7 should support
like. If you’re in the process of animating your project,
this script.
the image will be of the current frame in your animation.
A preview image does not contain all the fill styles, and

Chapter 18: File Menu

332 Anime Studio Pro 10
Users Manual

is of lower quality, but is quicker to generate than a fully preview images in your render cache, which has to be
rendered image. located in a User Content folder. If you did not set up a
User Content folder during installation, you can choose
When the Preview window opens up to display your work,
the Help > Set Custom Content Folder to configure one.
you can save the preview as a still image, using the popup
See “Set Custom Content Folder” on page 400 for
menu in the Preview window. By default, the file will be
more information.
named with the name of your project, followed by the
frame number.
The Options tab in the General Preferences
The following options are available in the Preview window: dialog allows you to specify the number of
images stored in your Render Cache. See “Options
Tab” on page 349 for more information.

• Save As: Expand the menu to choose the file format

(JPG, BMP, Targa, or PNG). You can also copy the
image to a clipboard and paste it into another
application.

• Zoom: Move the scrollbar left or right to zoom in

and out of the image. You can also use the mouse
scrollwheel to zoom in or out.

• Percentage field: Allows you to enter a zoom

percentage value.
Preview window.
• Restore Defaults: Resets the preview window to the
default zoom level.
• Render Cache: Click to place a preview render in
your render cache. By default you can store up to 100

Chapter 18: File Menu

333 Anime Studio Pro 10
Users Manual

Preview Animation
The File > Preview Animation command performs a screen
capture of the items on the canvas during playback and
saves it as a movie file. You can also generate a preview
animation by holding down the Option key (Mac) or Alt key
(Windows) while clicking the Play button.

Export Animation...
This command brings up a dialog that lets you export an
animated sequence and save it to disk. The Anime Studio
project file is where your work is saved, but to view the
animation as a movie, to put it on the web, or to work with
it in other programs, you have to export the animation.

The Export Animation dialog.

Chapter 18: File Menu

334 Anime Studio Pro 10
Users Manual

The options in this dialog are: • Render at half dimensions: Check this box to render
a smaller version of your movie. This makes rendering
• Start Frame: Enter the start frame for your exported faster if you just want a quick preview, and is useful for
movie here. making smaller movies for the web.

• End Frame: Enter the end frame for your exported • Render at half frame rate: Check this box to skip every
movie here. other frame in the animation. This makes rendering
faster, and results in smaller movie files.
• Entire Animation: Press this button to reset the start and
end frames to include all frames in the movie • Reduced particles (Anime Studio Pro only): Some
particle effects require hundreds of particles to
• Output Format: The options in the Export Animation
achieve their effect. Check this box to render fewer
dialog are described in “Saving Movies in Windows”
particles. The effect may not look as good, but will
on page 335 and “Saving Movies in Mac OS X” on
render much faster if all you need is a preview.
page 337:
• Extra-smooth images: Renders image layers with a
• Antialiased edges (Anime Studio Pro only): Normally,
higher quality level. Exporting takes longer with this
Anime Studio renders your shapes with smoothed
option on.
edges. Uncheck this box to turn this feature off.
• Use NTSC-safe colors: Automatically limits colors to be
• Apply shape effects (Anime Studio Pro only): If this box
NTSC safe. This is only an approximation - you should
is unchecked, Anime Studio will skip shape effects like
still do some testing to make sure your animation looks
shading, texture fills, and gradients.
good on a TV monitor.
• Apply layer effects: If this box is unchecked, Anime
• Do not premultiply alpha channel: Useful if you plan
Studio will skip layer effects like layer shadows and layer
to composite your Anime Studio animation with other
transparency.
elements in a video editing program.

Chapter 18: File Menu

335 Anime Studio Pro 10
Users Manual

• Variable line widths (SWF) (Anime Studio Pro only): Anime Studio can only export to a maximum size
Exports variable line widths to SWF. See “What to of 900 pixels x 900 pixels and 3000 frames. (Anime
Avoid” on page 342 for more information about Studio Pro does not have this limitation.)
variable width lines and Flash.

• Enable multi-threaded rendering: With this option

unchecked, only one thread will be used to rendering.
Saving Movies in Windows
With the option checked, up to four threads will be The Export Animation dialog also has several options for
used. adjusting the output quality of your animation. These
When exporting a movie, Anime Studio will include an default to the highest quality rendering, but you may
alpha channel if the codec you’re using supports it. This sometimes want to lower the quality to increase rendering
makes it possible to composite Anime Studio movies with speed or to output animations with smaller file sizes for
other media in a video editing program. streaming over the internet.
Supported formats for Windows include the following:
If you’re using QuickTime, set the color depth to
“Millions of Colors+”. The “+” is QuickTime’s indication
of an alpha channel. The codecs that support this
include Animation, None, PNG, TGA, and TIFF.

AVI on Windows doesn’t include any built-in codecs

that support alpha channels. However, at least one
such codec does exist, and you can download it for
free - the Huffyuv codec found at http://neuron2.
net/www.math.berkeley.edu/benrg/huffyuv.html.

Chapter 18: File Menu

336 Anime Studio Pro 10
Users Manual

ƒƒ Image: Supported image formats are JPEG, BMP,

Targa, PNG, or PSD.

ƒƒ MP4 Movie (H.264 AAC): (Windows 7 and higher

only). Saves the movie in mp4 format using an
H.264 video and AAC audio codec.

ƒƒ iPhone Movie: (Windows 7 and higher only). Saves

the movie as a 480 x 320 file in m4v format.

ƒƒ iPhone 4 Movie: (Windows 7 and higher only).

Saves the movie as a 960 x 640 file in m4v format.

ƒƒ iPhone 5 Movie: (Windows 7 and higher only).

Saves the movie as a 1136 x 640 file in m4v format.

ƒƒ iPad Movie: (Windows 7 and higher only). Saves the

movie as a 1024 x 768 file in m4v format.

ƒƒ iPad HD Movie: (Windows 7 and higher only). Saves

the movie as a 1280 x 1024 file in m4v format.

ƒƒ AVI Movie (DV): (Windows XP and higher only).

Saves the movie as a 720 x 480 file in avi format.

ƒƒ AVI Movie (Uncompressed): (Windows XP and

higher only). Saves the movie in avi format using an
uncompressed video codec. Expect these movies
Movie Export Formats: Windows.
to be large compared to a compressed format
like DV.

Chapter 18: File Menu

337 Anime Studio Pro 10
Users Manual

ƒƒ AVI Movie: (Windows XP and higher only). Saves

the movie in avi format. In the next dialog, the
user will be prompted for the video codec of the
export.

ƒƒ QuickTIme: (Mac and 32-bit version of Anime

Studio for Windows only, not available in Anime
Studio 64-bit Windows). Saves the movie in
QuickTime (mov) format. In the next dialog, you
will be prompted for the video codec and quality
of the export.

On Windows, this output format only appears

in the 32-bit version of the software and
QuickTime must be installed

ƒƒ Flash (SWF): Exports your animation to a Flash SWF

file, using the dimensions of your project.

Saving Movies in Mac OS X

When saving movies from Anime Studio on the Mac, you
can select from the following choices in the Output Format Movie Export Formats: Macintosh.
menu.
• Image formats include JPEG, BMP, Targa, PNG and
For further information about these formats,
PSD:
see your QuickTime documentation.

Chapter 18: File Menu

338 Anime Studio Pro 10
Users Manual

• Movie formats include the following: ƒƒ Flash (SWF): Exports your animation to a Flash SWF
file, using the dimensions of your project.
ƒƒ Apple M4V: Available in two formats. H.264-AAC
and JPEG-AAC. Quality choices allow you to choose a range of movie
qualities between Maximum and Minimum, with the
ƒƒ MP4: Available in two formats. H.264-AAC and
default selection being High quality. The higher the quality,
JPEG-AAC.
the larger the file size will be, and the longer it will take for
ƒƒ QuickTime: Available in seven formats. H.264-AAC, others to download.
H.264-PCM, JPEG-AAC, ProRes 422-AAC, ProRes After you select your format and quality, choose Save to
4444-AAC, ProRes 4444-ALAC, and PNG-AAC. render the QuickTime Movie.
ƒƒ iPhone Movie: Available in 480x320, iPhone 4
(960x640) and iPhone 5 (1136x640)
Exporting Flash
ƒƒ iPad Movie: Available in 1024 x 768 and iPad HD
(1280x1024) Anime Studio can also export Flash files in SWF format.
Flash is a common vector animation format on the Web.
ƒƒ QuickTIme: Saves the movie in QuickTime (mov) When exporting Flash, Anime Studio will also include the
format. In the next dialog, you will be prompted soundtrack (if any), if the soundtrack is in MP3 format. If you
for the video codec and quality of the export. plan on exporting Flash files, it is important to read “How to
Create Efficient Flash Files” on page 340.
When choosing a compression format or
codec for export, keep in mind that viewers If you plan to export your animations to Flash
must also have the same codec available to view (SWF) format, you will need to use MP3 audio
the file. We recommend that you select a basic files instead of WAV audio files. In addition, if you
compression format/codec that is installed with Mac plan to render to SWF format, you can only use a
OS X. single audio file in the project.

Chapter 18: File Menu

339 Anime Studio Pro 10
Users Manual

Flash Tips What Can be Exported

Advice for working with Anime Studio and Flash Most common objects in Anime Studio can be exported to
Flash. These include:
Among the other export formats that Anime Studio offers,
you also have the option to output Flash SWF files. SWF is a
• Vector layers
format created by Adobe as a way to deliver animated
vector artwork and interactive applications. Flash • Fills/Outlines/Colors
animations are very common on the web, and most users
already have the Flash player installed on their computers. • Transparency
Because Anime Studio is also vector-based, there are
enough similarities to make it possible for Anime Studio to • Gradients
export SWF files.
• Variable-width lines (try to use these sparingly - see
However, Anime Studio and Flash are not completely below)
compatible. Therefore, not all the features of Anime Studio
can be exported successfully to Flash. In addition, because • Bone warping of vector layers
Flash is a web format, small file size is important - there are
• Image layers (PNG and JPEG only, and only if they are
certain issues to keep in mind when working with Anime
not warped by a bone layer)
Studio if Flash is your intended output format.
When exporting SWF files, you may want to use • Particle layers (careful - a complex particle effect can
Macromedia’s Flash authoring tool to combine multiple easily overwhelm Flash)
SWF files, add extra elements, sound, etc. Be aware that
Anime Studio’s SWF files are compatible with Flash MX and • A soundtrack can be exported if it’s in MP3 format, and
later - Flash 5 and earlier are not able to load Anime Studio- at either 44100 Hz, 22050 Hz, or 11025 Hz sample rate.
created SWF files. If you want your SWF file to contain audio, make sure
that your project contains only one audio track, and
that the audio track is in MP3 format. In order for Anime

Chapter 18: File Menu

340 Anime Studio Pro 10
Users Manual

Studio to play MP3 format audio files, you must have How to Create Efficient Flash Files
QuickTime installed
When you’re creating an animation with the intent to
What Can’t be Exported produce an SWF file as output, there are several things
to keep in mind. An important concern with SWF files is
On the other hand, some things in Anime Studio are just not keeping the file size down. The key way to do this in Anime
compatible with Flash, and cannot be exported to a SWF Studio is to keep as many layers “optimized” as possible. An
file. The following list covers the most important of these optimized layer when exported to SWF will take up much
objects and effects. less space than a non-optimized one. (For other formats,
like QuickTime or AVI, it doesn’t matter.) You can tell which
• Brushes
layers are optimized by looking for a little red dot next to
• Fill and line effects (except gradients) the layer’s icon in the Layers window:

• Layer effects (shadows, shading, layer blur, motion blur,

etc.)

• Image warping or 3D movements in image layers

• Image layers that use progressive JPEG images (Flash

can’t handle progressive JPEG images)

• Layer masking

• 3D layers

• Multiple audio tracks, or audio tracks other than MP3

format

Chapter 18: File Menu

341 Anime Studio Pro 10
Users Manual

• 3D layer rotation (X or Y rotation, or perspective

rotation)

• Layer shear

• A group layer that has 3D rotation or shear will cause all

of its sub-layers to be non-optimized

• Uneven scaling in the X and Y directions

• Point animation

• Bone animation is a common cause of non-optimized

layers. What’s happening is that because Flash doesn’t
have a bone system like Anime Studio, Anime Studio
needs to export a lot of extra information for Flash to
be able to produce the same effect. One way to use
bone animation and to stay optimized is to attach a
Notice the red dot by the optimized layer.
vector layer to a single bone, instead of letting the
bones warp all the points in the vector layer. The vector
A new layer is optimized to start with, but depending on layer will then remain optimized. While you can’t do this
the effects you apply, that optimization can go away. The in all cases, sometimes you can break up a character
following things will “de-optimize” a layer. Note: a non- into multiple body parts - some parts will be warped
optimized layer will still export to Flash, it just won’t be nearly with the bones, and some will be attached to a single
as efficient. bone. At least some parts of the character can remain
optimized.
• 3D camera movements (this will de-optimize all layers
in the project, so it should be avoided if possible when Here are some other things to think about when exporting
targeting SWF) to SWF:

Chapter 18: File Menu

342 Anime Studio Pro 10
Users Manual

• Consider using a lower frame rate (12 fps, for example) resulting SWF file will be smaller, and will load quicker over
for your animation. Fewer frames means a smaller file. the web.

• If some of your layers can do without any animation • 3D camera moves - no Flash optimization is possible
at all, or just layer translation/scaling/rotation when you’re moving the camera around in 3D. Simple
(background scenery, props, background characters, side-to-side pans and zooms are OK, but when you
etc.), that can save a lot of space. start using camera pan/tilt, Flash efficiency goes down
the drain.
• If most of a layer is stationary, except for one small
object, move that object into its own layer if possible. • Try to use as few control points as possible in your
Example: a character who is waving his arms, but vector artwork.
is otherwise still - move the arms into a separate
layer from the rest of the body. The body will remain • The freehand tool and the insert text dialog can
optimized and take up much less space. generate a lot of points, resulting in a big SWF file.

• If an object sits still for a time with no animation, • Limit the use of variable-width lines. It’s easy to
consider replacing it with a non-animated object for overwhelm Flash with the complexity of variable-
that time period. width lines, making the resulting SWF file play back
unpredictably. Read “Flash Movie Size Limit” at http://
What to Avoid kb2.adobe.com/cps/144/tn_14437.html for more
information. If possible, only use variable-width lines in
If your goal is to create a SWF animation, there are some SWF-optimized layers.
things you should try to avoid. Besides the effects that
just are not possible to export, you should try to avoid the • Avoid compound shapes (two adjacent circles filled as
following effects if possible. These are all things that can be one, shapes with holes, or figure 8’s).
exported - it’s just that they make for a less efficient SWF file.
Of course, you won’t want to avoid all of these things all
of the time. However, if you plan your animation carefully,
and use as few of the following effects as possible, the
Chapter 18: File Menu
343 Anime Studio Pro 10
Users Manual

Exporting Still Images Export POV

Finally, you can export an animation as a sequence of You can use the File > Export POV command to export
numbered still images. This option is not used very often, but 3D objects from Anime Studio to POV format, which is
sometimes for certain post-processing tasks, you may prefer compatible with POV-Ray, a free raytracing application
to work with a sequence of separate still image files. You that produces high quality 3D renderings. For more
can choose between JPEG, BMP, PSD, Targa, or PNG. information about POV-Ray, see http://www.povray.org/.

Export OBJ Upload to YouTube

If your scene contains 3D objects, including those that The File > Upload to YouTube command allows you to
you have converted from 2D to 3D with Anime Studio’s upload your Anime Studio animation to YouTube. After
3D Conversion feature (see “3D Options” on page 204), choosing the command you are prompted to locate the
you can use the File > Export OBJ command to save the animation that you want to upload. Before performing the
objects to WaveFront OBJ format. You will be prompted to upload, you will need to enter your YouTube Username
enter a file name and choose a location for the exported and Password in the Web Uploads tab of the Preferences
OBJ file. dialog, as discussed in “Web Uploads:” on page 352.

If you import an OBJ file that has been

exported from Anime Studio into your 3D Upload to Facebook®
software, and some or all of the faces appear to be
missing, it may be due to inverted normals. Select The File > Upload to Facebook command allows you
the missing faces and invert the normals in your to upload your Anime Studio animation to your page
modeler. on Facebook. After choosing the command you are
prompted to locate the animation that you want to
upload.

Chapter 18: File Menu

344 Anime Studio Pro 10
Users Manual

Before using this features, you will need to sign

in to your Facebook account and authorize
Anime Studio as an application that can upload to
your Facebook account.

After logging in to your Facebook account and choosing

the Upload to Facebook command, your browser will
display a screen that prompts you to allow the Smith Micro
Software Video Uploader to upload files to your Facebook
account. Click the Allow button to enable this feature, and
then the upload will continue. You should only need to
authorize the uploader the first time you use it

Batch Export... (Anime Studio Pro

only) The Batch Export window.

Anime Studio’s batch export window lets you line up The batch export window has many of the same controls
several Anime Studio project files to be exported one at as the Export Animation dialog The options are as follows:
a time. This is very convenient when you’re working on a
large project with separate project files for different scenes, • Add Files: To queue up files for batch export, click the
and you want to render them all at once (like during lunch Add Files button to select files on your system, or drag
maybe): the Anime Studio files into the window. They will appear
in the list view at the bottom.

Chapter 18: File Menu

345 Anime Studio Pro 10
Users Manual

You can remove a file from the queue by • Apply shape effects (Anime Studio Pro only): If this box
selecting it and pressing the Backspace or is unchecked, Anime Studio will skip shape effects like
Delete keys (this will not delete the file from your shading, texture fills, and gradients.
system, just remove it from batch export).
• Apply layer effects: If this box is unchecked, Anime
Studio will skip layer effects like layer shadows and layer
You can change rendering options by transparency.
selecting a file and then changing the
options at the top of the window. The options that • Render at half dimensions: Check this box to render
are set before you queue up any files will apply to all a smaller version of your movie. This makes rendering
the files as you add them. The output file format you faster if you just want a quick preview, and is useful for
select will be the same for all files in the batch. making smaller movies for the web.

• Render at half frame rate: Check this box to skip every

The plus (+) button at the bottom of the other frame in the animation. This makes rendering
dialog allows you to readd items that are faster, and results in smaller movie files.
already in the export list. This button is helpful for
when you are exporting multiple layer comps from • Render layer comp: When you batch export layer
the same file. You won’t have to go back to add the comps, the name of the layer comp will be added
files over and over again, just select the file in the to the name of the output file. Check the option and
export list and press + to add it again. select the layer comp you want to render.

• Reduced particles (Anime Studio Pro only): Some

• Antialiased edges (Anime Studio Pro only): Normally, particle effects require hundreds of particles to
Anime Studio renders your shapes with smoothed achieve their effect. Check this box to render fewer
edges. Uncheck this box to turn this feature off. particles. The effect may not look as good, but will
render much faster if all you need is a preview.

Chapter 18: File Menu

346 Anime Studio Pro 10
Users Manual

• Extra-smooth images: Renders image layers with a • Export files into the same folder as the project file:
higher quality level. Exporting takes longer with this Allows you to specify whether or not to export all files to
option on. a single folder.

• Use NTSC-safe colors: Automatically limits colors to be • Export all files to a selected folder: Allows you to select
NTSC safe. This is only an approximation - you should or create a folder in which to export all of the files.
still do some testing to make sure your animation looks
good on a TV monitor. • Start: When all your files have been added and the
options set, press the Start button to begin batch
• Do not premultiply alpha: Useful if you plan to export. The window will display the progress of each file
composite your Anime Studio animation with other as it is exported. When a file is finished and disappears
elements in a video editing program. from the list, you can find the rendered result in the
same folder as the Anime Studio file itself.
• Variable line widths (SWF) (Anime Studio Pro only):
Exports variable line widths to SWF. See “What to
Avoid” on page 342 for more information about Relaunch in (x)-bit Mode
variable width lines and Flash.
The Universal installer allows you to install Anime Studio Pro
• Overwrite existing files: You can also check an option in both 32-bit and 64-bit versions. The File > Relaunch in
to overwrite existing files if desired. If you choose not to 32-bit Mode and File > Relaunch in 64-bit Mode commands
overwrite existing files, a number will be appended to allow you to switch between modes.
name of the new file to prevent overwriting the existing
version.
Quit
• Start Frame/End Frame: Enter the start and end frames
of the range that you want to render. Quits Anime Studio. Anime Studio will prompt you to save
any unsaved projects before closing.
• Format: Select one of the supported movie formats
from the Format chooser.
Chapter 18: File Menu
347 Anime Studio Pro 10
Users Manual

Chapter 19: Edit Menu Undo

Choose this command to undo the last operation. You
may undo up to 8 of your most recent editing operations in
Anime Studio.
You will not receive a warning when you undo an
operation. You will be able to undo the operation by using
the Edit > Redo command.

Redo
This command will redo the last operation that you “un-
did” with the Undo command.

Cut, Copy, Paste

These are the traditional clipboard commands. They can
be used together with the Draw editing tools for vector
Edit Menu layers, and operate on the currently selected group of
points.

Chapter 19: Edit Menu

348 Anime Studio Pro 10
Users Manual

Clear choose this command: if all the points on the head are
somehow connected together, the whole head will now
This command is the same as pressing the backspace or be selected.
delete key: the currently selected object in the working
area will be deleted from the project.
Preferences...
Select All Mac users will find the Preferences command
in the Anime Studio menu category.
Selects all the points in the active vector layer.
Brings up a dialog that lets you customize some aspects of

Select None Anime Studio, such as the display colors used in the working
area of the Anime Studio window. Some of these features
De-selects all the points in the active vector layer. including Edit Colors and GUI Colors are only available in
Anime Studio Pro.

Select Inverse
Selects the opposite points in the active vector layer.
Selected points will become de-selected, and de-selected
points will become selected.

Select Connected
Selects all points that are connected to any other currently
selected points. For example, if you have a complex shape
like a character’s head, just select a few points on it, then
Chapter 19: Edit Menu
349 Anime Studio Pro 10
Users Manual

Options Tab option. You can also control this on a per-layer basis in
the Layer Settings dialog. This option controls it for any
new layers you create.

• Show paths for new layers: Determines whether the

paths (previously called construction curves) are
displayed for new layers. They’re always shown for the
selected layer, but usually hidden otherwise.

• Auto-name new shapes: Shapes can be named by

the user. If this is turned on, all bones and shapes get
names like “1”, “2”, etc.

Anime Studio names bones automatically as

you create them. For more information, see
“Add Bone” on page 80.

• Zoom with drag box: When this option is on, allows you
to draw a box around the area that you want to zoom
Options
into, rather than using a continuous zoom.

• Auto-assist with bone locking keyframes: Adds an • Consolidate timeline channels: Instead of showing
extra keyframe when bones are locked or unlocked to separate channels (point animation, bone animation,
prevent them from “drifting”. layer translation, layer rotation, etc.), this option groups
all channels into one in the timeline palette. This is on
• Scale compensation for new layers: When a layer is by default in Debut, and off in Pro.
scaled up (or down), its lines get thicker (or thinner)
to match. If you don’t want this behavior, turn off this
Chapter 19: Edit Menu
350 Anime Studio Pro 10
Users Manual

• Status bar at top of window: Shows the status bar at the • Enable drawing tools only on frame 0: Creation tools
top of the window, rather than the bottom. The status (Add Point, Freehand, Draw Shape, Add Bone) are
bar is where tools show their descriptions, like what only available on frame 0 if this option is on. Otherwise,
modifiers keys do what, etc. they can be used at any time.

• Inline Layer Naming: Allows you to name the layer in In Anime Studio, there are certain tasks that
the Layers panel when you create a new layer. can only be performed on Frame 0, many of
which pertain to rigging. Beginning with Anime
• Auto-scale imported vectors: Makes it easier to import Studio 10, when you move to Frame 0 in your
multiple Illustrator files (for example, multiple body parts project, each layer will go to its own “Frame 0,”
in a character). The imported files will all be in scale regardless of where it starts in the project timeline. If
with each other when this option is checked. When this a layer starts before Frame 0, you will now be able to
option is turned off, you may need to press the Esc key make edits to that layer without moving it back into
to automatically zoom in to the selected points after the project timeline.
you import the files.

• Automatically check for updates: When this option is • Use SMPTE timecode: Shows time in the timeline using
checked, Anime Studio will automatically check for SMPTE timecode instead of frame numbers. SMPTE
updates upon startup. Uncheck this option if you prefer timecode looks like this: 00:02:34:07 That would be 0
to manually check for updates. hours, 2 minutes, 34 seconds, and 7 frames.

• Disable GPU: Check this option to disable GPU • Show angles in degrees in timeline: Angle values
acceleration if it is not supported by your hardware. (like layer rotation or bone rotation) are shown in
radians in the timeline’s Motion Graph. This is because
• Highlight frame 0: If on, a red box is drawn on the angle values in radians are smaller numerically and
canvas if the current time is set to 0. This can be helpful fit in better with other values in the graph. But if the
to remind you when you’re working on frame 0 (the user chooses to, they can display these curves using
setup frame) vs. some other frame. degrees with this option.

Chapter 19: Edit Menu

351 Anime Studio Pro 10
Users Manual

• Disable custom tool cursors: A long time ago there was large files and your workflow is slowed down by saving
a bug on some Windows systems where tool cursors every thirty seconds, you can turn this option off to
didn’t display correctly. Turning on this option will improve performance.
just use the standard system arrow cursor, regardless
of what tool is active on the canvas. It may not be • Auto Center New Layers: If the camera is in its default
needed anymore (I’m not sure if that bug happens for position (such as it would be in a new document) this
anyone these days). option won’t do anything. The option will become
noticeable if you have moved the camera (for
• Disable audio feedback: When welding points, you example, if you are looking 90 degrees to the left). If
hear a “clicking” sound in Anime Studio. Turning this this option is unchecked in such a case, new layers
option on will disable the click. will be centered at 0,0,0 and will be off-camera. If
this option is checked in such a case, the new layers
• Legacy curves for new layers: When checked, uses the will appear centered in front of the current camera
old style curves, rather than the smoother curves found position.
in Anime Studio 8 and later.
• Confirm before reverting document: When checked,
• Nearest neighbor sampling for new image layers: Anime Studio will ask for verification before a
When an image is scaled up larger than its original document is reverted to the last saved version.
size, Anime Studio will try to smooth out the areas in
between pixels to create a smoother image. Turn this • Default Startup File: Allows you to start Anime Studio
option off if you want the enlarged image to appear with a default startup file, an empty document, or a
blocky. specified project file.

• Auto save for crash recovery: When turned on, Anime • Document Preview Thumbnail Size: Anime Studio can
Studio will automatically save your work every thirty automatically generate thumbnails when you save
seconds to a temporary file. If the application crashes, your documents. The default maximum size for the
you can recover your work the next time you start the thumbnails is 128x128 pixels. Other options are None
application. In the event that you are working on very

Chapter 19: Edit Menu

352 Anime Studio Pro 10
Users Manual

(will not automatically generate a thumbnail), 256x256, • Password: Enter your YouTube password.
512x512, and 1024x1024.
• Private uploads: Check this option if you want your
• Max Render Cache Size: Enter the number of renders Anime Studio uploads to be private uploads rather
that you want to store your Anime Studio render than public uploads.
cache. The default setting is 100 images. In order to
store these images, you must create a user content
folder. If you did not do this during setup, see “Set
Custom Content Folder” on page 400.

• Poser Location: Allows you to specify the location of

the Poser executable.

• Language: Select the desired language for the Anime

Studio interface. Choices are English, German, Spanish,
and Chinese.

Web Uploads:
This tab is used to enter your YouTube user account name
and passwords. Anime Studio will log into this account to
post YouTube videos when you select the File > Upload
to YouTube command to send a project file to another Web Uploads
person.
Enter the following information:

• Username: Enter your YouTube user name.

Chapter 19: Edit Menu

353 Anime Studio Pro 10
Users Manual

Editor Colors:
Allows you to change the color scheme for the editor
window, including various options for background and
object colors. Press the Reset button to return to default
application colors. The Default Stroke Width option allows
you to specify the default Stroke Width setting that appears
in the Style window.

Editor Colors

GUI Colors:
Allows you to change the color scheme for the application,
including various options for background, text, and widget
colors. A preview of your changes appears in the Sample
Widget area as changes are made.

Editor Colors • Click the Color Theme button at the top of the GUI
Colors tab to choose from one of several different

Chapter 19: Edit Menu

354 Anime Studio Pro 10
Users Manual

color schemes. You can then modify the color scheme

further if desired.

• Press the Reset button to set the color scheme back to

the default settings.

• Check the Use Large Fonts option to increase the size

of the fonts used in the application.

GUI Colors

Chapter 19: Edit Menu

355 Anime Studio Pro 10
Users Manual

Chapter 20: Draw

Menu

Draw Menu

Chapter 20: Draw Menu

356 Anime Studio Pro 10
Users Manual

Insert Text... You can use the Randomize button to randomize the
transitions between minimum and maximum percentages.
Choose Draw > Insert Text or use the keyboard shortcut
Command/Ctrl+T to open the Insert Text dialog, which is
described in “Inserting Text and Word Balloons” on page
131.

Snap to Grid
If the grid is turned on in the working area, then this
command can be used to snap all selected points to the
nearest grid intersection.

Random Line Width dialog.

Reset Line Width
Using the Line Width tool, you can adjust the width of a line
at any point. Choosing this menu command will reset your Peak
custom line widths at any selected points.
This command creates a peaked (or hard) transition
between the curves at the point that you click.
Random Line Width
Use this command to randomize the width of the line(s) Smooth
through the currently selected points. You will be asked
to specify the minimum and maximum width, and Anime This command smooths the transitions between the curves
Studio will assign random line widths within that range. at the point that you click.

Chapter 20: Draw Menu

357 Anime Studio Pro 10
Users Manual

Raise Shape Trace Image

Select this menu item to raise a shape in the stacking Anime Studio has always allowed you to import black
order. This will move it in front of the next higher shape. The and white or color bitmap images and work with them.
stacking order only applies to shapes within the same layer However, they are not as flexible as vector objects for
- all shapes in a layer will appear above any lower layers several reasons. You can’t zoom in an infinite amount, you
and behind any upper ones, regardless of stacking order. can’t bend them quite as much, and you can’t edit them.
Note that if there is no shape overlapping the selected Anime Studio includes Automatic Image Tracing, which
one, you may not see any change when this item is allows you to convert a black and white or color bitmap
selected, even though the shape gets moved higher. image to a vector object.
For this feature to work its best, you should choose drawing
Lower Shape that have bold lines, such as those created with a felt pen.
Pencil sketches will be more difficult to trace.
Select this menu item to lower a shape in the stacking After you import your drawing into an Image layer, you
order. can use the Draw > Trace Image command to display the
Trace Image dialog. The Trace Image dialog contains the
following settings.
Raise to Front
Works like Raise Shape, but raises the shape above all
others in its layer.

Lower to Back
Works like Lower Shape, but lowers the shape below all
others in its layer.

Chapter 20: Draw Menu

358 Anime Studio Pro 10
Users Manual

ƒƒ Photo Edges: Check this option if your source

image is a line drawing and you only want to
convert it to strokes; or if you want Anime Studio to
only draw strokes where one color meets another
color.

Tracing Black and White

You can convert either a color or a black and white image
to a black and white vector layer. When you choose a
Black and White conversion, the following settings are
available:

• Threshold: Adjusting the Threshold value can help

Trace Image dialog. remove unwanted gray from the black and white
conversion. Move the slider toward the left to allow less
gray, or toward the right to allow more gray.
• Conversion type selection: Choose one of the following
radio buttons, based on the type of image you are
importing:

ƒƒ Black and white: Check this option if your source

image is black and white, or if you want to create
a black and white vector image.

ƒƒ Color: Check this option if your source image is

color and you want to create a vector image that
is also color.

Chapter 20: Draw Menu

359 Anime Studio Pro 10
Users Manual

Low threshold (left); high threshold (right).

• Detail reduction: Move the slider toward the left to add Maximum detail (left); reduced detail (right).
more detail to the vector layer. This will increase the
number of points in the object and make it harder to • Fatten Lines: When Black and White is selected as an
edit, but it will look more like the original image. image type, this option controls the width of the lines in
the black and white drawing. Move the slider toward
the left to decrease the width, and toward the right to
increase the width.

Chapter 20: Draw Menu

360 Anime Studio Pro 10
Users Manual

Default lines (left); thickened lines (right)

A close-up of the traced result

After you click OK, Anime Studio traces the image and
adds a new vector layer to the Layers palette. The image
layer that contains the original bitmap image is turned off.

The Automatic Image Tracing feature

remembers your last settings. If you are not
quite happy with the results that you get, you can
return to the Trace Image dialog and tweak your
settings.
Chapter 20: Draw Menu
361 Anime Studio Pro 10
Users Manual

Tracing Color
When you choose a Color conversion, the following settings
are available:

• Number of Colors: Move the slider toward the left to

reduce the number of colors in the traced result. Move
the slider toward the right to increase the number of
colors. As you move the slider, the number of colors
that will appear in the traced result will display above
the slider.

4 colors (left); 5 colors (right).

• Detail reduction: Move the slider toward the left to add

more detail to the vector layer. This will increase the
number of points in the object and make it harder to
edit, but it will look more like the original image.

Chapter 20: Draw Menu

362 Anime Studio Pro 10
Users Manual

A close-up of the traced result

Maximum detail (left); reduced detail (right). After you click OK, Anime Studio traces the image and
adds a new vector layer to the Layers palette. The image
• Outlines: When converting to a Color vector layer, you layer that contains the original bitmap image is turned off.
can check this option to also convert outlines in the
drawing, or uncheck the option to omit the outlines. Tracing Photo Edges
To create a vector image that only contains the outlines in
your original bitmap, check the Photo Edges option at the
top of the Trace Image dialog. You are presented with the
following settings:

Chapter 20: Draw Menu

363 Anime Studio Pro 10
Users Manual

• Threshold: Move the slider toward the left to accept

less outline, or toward the right to accept more outline.
Show All Shapes
Shows all shapes that have previously been hidden.

Hide Selected Points

Sometimes when projects are complex and you have a lot
Freeze Points
of points and bones, you only want to work on one object After selecting points, choose this command to freeze all
or reshape it. When scenes are complex you sometimes points so that they cannot be edited.
select points in the group.
Select the object you want to work on, then choose Edit
> Select Inverse to select all the points you want to hide.
Freeze Selected Points
Then choose Draw > Hide Points to hide the selected
Adds a keyframe at the current time for all selected points.
points. The shapes are still there, but the points are hidden
and you can’t accidentally select them.
Reset Points
Show All Points Moves the selected points back to their original positions,
adding a new keyframe for them at the current time.
Choose Draw > Show All Points to unhide the points that
were previously hidden with the Hide Selected Points
command. Reset All Points
Same as above, but moves all points in the layer back to
Hide Shape their original positions, not just the selected ones.

Hides the currently selected shape

Chapter 20: Draw Menu

364 Anime Studio Pro 10
Users Manual

Chapter 21: Bone

Menu

Bone Menu

Bone Menu

Chapter 21: Bone Menu

365 Anime Studio Pro 10
Users Manual

Release Points influenced by all the bones in the parent bone layer,
depending on the strength and region of influence of each
This command detaches the selected points from any bone. This results in more of a “squishy” type of motion
bones they may be bound to. when the skeleton is animated.

Flexi-Bind Points Release Layer And Points

This command binds the selected points to bones in such a Detaches selected points and layer from any bones that
way that they will influenced by all the bones in the parent they are bound to.
bone layer, depending on the strength and region of
influence of each bone. This results in more of a “squishy”
type of motion when the skeleton is animated. This is the Use Selected Bones for Flexi-
default behavior for all drawings in Anime Studio, so you Binding
usually won’t have to use this menu command - the points
are probably already flexi-bound. Assigns the selected bones to the currently-selected layer
in the Layers palette. For more information, see “Tutorial 3.5:
Flexi-Binding” on page 120 in your Anime Studio Tutorial
Release Layer Manual.

This command detaches the current layer from any bone it

may be bound to. Create Smooth Joint for Bone Pair
This command works on a pair of selected bones (for
Flexi-Bind Layer example, bones for the upper and lower arms, or upper
and lower legs). The two bones also have to have a
This command binds the current layer to the bones in parent-child relationship, and start out in close to a straight
the parent layer in such a way that the child layer will line.

Chapter 21: Bone Menu

366 Anime Studio Pro 10
Users Manual

For more information about using bone pairs

and smooth bending, see “Tutorial 3.6: New
Bone Features” on page 163 in your Anime Studio
Tutorial Manual.

Before applying Elbow binding, the joint collapses when it is

bent.

If you are using vector shapes, the collapsing can be

Two bones (a parent and its child) are arranged in a straight remedied, in part, by using Smart Bones (discussed in
line. “Smart Bones” on page 88). However, Smart Bones
only work on vector shapes. Elbow binding, on the other
Applying this command on a pair of selected bones helps hand, works with either vector shapes (, or with scanned or
prevent a bend from collapsing when the child bone imported images.
is bent. It is ideal for use with elbow or knee bends in a To use this command, go to the Layers palette and select
character. the layer that is controlled by the two bones. Then use the
Select Bones tool to select two bones (the upper and lower
arm bones in the case of this example). Next, select the

Chapter 21: Bone Menu

367 Anime Studio Pro 10
Users Manual

layer that is controlled by the bone, and choose Bone >

Create Smooth Joint for Bone Pair.
After you apply the command, you will notice an
improvement in the elbow joint when you rotate the lower
arm bone. There is a nice smooth bend around the joint,
and it pinches together on the inside.

You can offset the bone from the artwork to amplify the bend
effect.

Use All Bones for Flexi-Binding

Reassigns the selected layer in the Layers palette so that it
After you apply Elbow binding, the joint bends more smoothly. is controlled by all bones in the bone group, rather than by
selected bones that were previously assigned with the Use
If you offset the bone and place it to the side of the object, Selected Bones for Flexi-Binding command.
the bend will be amplified. This is an easy way to create
cartoon characters with rubbery arms.

Chapter 21: Bone Menu

368 Anime Studio Pro 10
Users Manual

Hide Selected Bones Track Bone to Video

Select the bone or bones that you want to hide, and Allows you to link a bone to the tracking points that you
choose Bone > Hide Selected Bones. The bones and their defined with the Video Tracking tool. For a description of
associated keyframes will be hidden. how to use this tool, see “Video Tracking” on page 143.

Hide Controlled Bones Make Smart Bone Dial

Hides any bones that are set up to have their angle or The Create Smart Bone Dial command is an easier and
position controlled by another bone. These types of bones more convenient way to set up smart bones. Smart bone
are often not animated by the user (their animation is creation involves several steps. You create a bone, give
“automatic” through the control feature), and hiding them it a name, and set up actions and restraints for it. This
can clear up some of the clutter in the workspace. This command simplifies the process.
function is not available when the time is set to frame 0.
When you want to use the Create Smart Bone dial to set up
your smart bones, the process is as follows:
Show All Bones 1. Create the bone that you want to use as your smart
bone control dial.
Use the Bone > Show All Bones command to redisplay
bones that have previously been hidden with the Hide
Selected Bones command.

Chapter 21: Bone Menu

369 Anime Studio Pro 10
Users Manual

example, you can enter a value of -90 to create

an expression that looks less angry, or happy).

ƒƒ Maximum Angle: Enter the value that represents

the maximum setting of the bone. For example,
you can enter a value of 90 to represent the
maximum strength of the Angry expression.

ƒƒ Duration (Frames): Enter the number of frames over

which you want the smart bone to travel from its
minimum to maximum values. A higher number of
frames creates a smoother range of motion.

Create your control bone.

2. Choose Bone > Make Smart Bone Dial.

3. The Create Smart Dial dialog appears, with the

following settings:

ƒƒ Name: Assign a name that is descriptive of what

the dial controls. For example, if you are creating a
dial that gives your character an angry expression,
Enter your settings in the Create Smart Dial dialog.
name the bone Angry.

ƒƒ Minimum Angle: Enter the value that represents 4. Click OK. A bone appears on the screen, labeled
the minimum setting of the bone. You can use with the name that you assigned in the Create Smart
negative values to create the opposite state (for Dial dialog. The Actions window opens to display the
associated action.
Chapter 21: Bone Menu
370 Anime Studio Pro 10
Users Manual

Modify the scene for the minimum and maximum dial settings.

The control dial and the associated action appear in the

window.
Freeze Pose
The rest of the process is similar to that described in “Smart Keyframing can be tricky sometimes for new users of
Bones” on page 88. Scrub the timeline to the minimum Anime Studio, or for those who are new to animation. For
setting and change the scene to the way you want it to example, let’s say you move a left foot up on frame 12,
appear when the bone is at its minimum value. Then scrub and then down again at frame 24. At frame 36, you want
the timeline to the maximum setting (90) and change the the right foot to move up, and then down again at frame
scene to the way you want it to appear when the bone is 48.
at its maximum value.
The problem is, the right foot will start to move up at frame
0, and then be fully up at frame 36. In reality, you want the

Chapter 21: Bone Menu

371 Anime Studio Pro 10
Users Manual

right foot to move up from frame 24 through 36, and not

from frame 0 through 36.
Reset All Bones
To accomplish this, you choose the Bone > Freeze Pose Same as above, but moves all bones in the layer back to
command at Frame 24. This sets a keyframe for every their original positions, not just the selected one.
part in your animated character or object so that you are
assured that the pose you want to use is correct for that
portion of your animation. Then you set the keyframe that
moves the right foot up at frame 36, and down again at
frame 48.

Freezing a pose

Reset Bone
Moves the selected bone back to its original position,
adding a new keyframe for it at the current time.

Chapter 21: Bone Menu

372 Anime Studio Pro 10
Users Manual

Chapter 22: Animation

Menu

Animation Menu

Chapter 22: Animation Menu

373 Anime Studio Pro 10
Users Manual

Allow Frame Skipping Align Layer with Camera

Normally when playing back an animation, Anime Studio Allows you to rotate the selected layer to face the camera.
will display each frame one at a time. Depending on the
Select All Keyframes
complexity of your animation, the display quality settings,
and the speed of your computer, the animation may play Selects all the keyframes in the current layer. This is useful if
back slower than its specified speed. Select this command you want to move all the animation in a layer forward or
to force the animation to play back at actual speed. backward.
In order to accomplish this, Anime Studio may have to
skip some frames to keep up to speed, so the animation
will play back at the correct overall speed, but may not Rescale Keyframes...
appear as smooth. The best way to see the animation
With this command you can rescale a group of keyframes
at final speed and quality is of course to use the Export
so that a portion of your animation takes more or less time.
Animation command in the File menu.

Reset All Layer Channels

Resets all channels in the current layer to their initial values,
adding a new keyframe at the current time.

Set Layer Start Time

Offsets the start of an animation within a layer to the
current selected frame.

Chapter 22: Animation Menu

374 Anime Studio Pro 10
Users Manual

• Start Frame: Enter the existing frame number at which

to start scaling.

• End Frame: Enter the existing frame number at which to

end the scaling.

• New Start Frame: Enter the new target frame number

for the start of the scaling.

• New End Frame: Enter the new target frame for the
end of the scaling.

• Rescale the following channels: Check or uncheck the

channels that you want to include or exclude from the
scaling operation. The icons representing the various
animation channels are described in the Timeline
Window section.
Examples:

• To reduce the amount of time the animation takes (in

other words, to speed it up), you could set the start
The Rescale Keyframes dialog.
frame (and new start frame) to 30, the end frame to
60, and the new end frame to 45. (45 - 30 = 15, which is
Options included in this dialog are: half as long as 60 - 30 = 30)

• Rescale entire document: Check this option to rescale • You can shift a section of your animation by changing
all frames in the document. the start time. For example, to shift the range of
keyframes between 30 and 60, you could set the start

Chapter 22: Animation Menu

375 Anime Studio Pro 10
Users Manual

frame to 30, the end frame to 60, the new start frame
to 90, and the new end frame to 120. The duration will
be the same (120 - 90 = 60 - 30), but the animation will
take place between frames 90 and 120, instead of 30
and You can rescale a portion of the entire document
by clicking the “Rescale entire document” checkbox.

• To rescale the current layer, select the animation

channels that you want to be affected. For example,
you may want to rescale the bone animation, but
leave the layer rotation alone.

Copy Current Frame...

With this command you can copy values from the current
frame in the timeline to any other frame in your animation.
For example, if you position some objects in a way that
you really like at frame 243, you can use this command to
copy that position back to frame 0, to make it the starting
position as well.

The Copy Current Frame dialog.

Chapter 22: Animation Menu

376 Anime Studio Pro 10
Users Manual

Add Keyframe • From Layer At Current Frame: Clears the keyframes on

the currently selected layer, only at the current frame.
This command adds a keyframe for all channels in your
• From Document: Clears all animation keyframes from
project, at the currently selected frame.
the entire document.

Clear Animation • From Document After Current Frame: Clears keyframes

from the entire document, beginning with the frame
Several commands allow you to clear keyframes from a after the currently selected frame and including all
single layer, or from all the layers in your project. Use the keyframes to the end.
Animation > Clear Animation commands as follows:
• From Document Before Current Frame: Clears
• From Layer: Clears all animation keyframes from the keyframes from the entire document, beginning with
current layer. A warning appears to notify you that the frame before the currently selected frame and
animation will also be deleted from sublayers and including all keyframes to the beginning.
asks if you want to continue. Choose Yes to clear the
• From Document At Current Frame: Clears the
sublayers, No to keep keyframes in the sublayers, or
keyframes in the entire document, only at the current
Cancel to exit the dialog without making changes.
frame.
• From Layer After Current Frame: Clears keyframes from
the currently selected layer, beginning with the frame
after the currently selected frame and including all
Track Layer to Video
keyframes to the end.
This command allows you to link a layer to tracking points
that have been set up with the video tracking tool. For
• From Layer Before Current Frame: Clears keyframes
a complete description of the process, refer to “Video
from the currently selected layer, beginning with
Tracking” on page 143.
the frame before the currently selected frame and
including all keyframes to the beginning.

Chapter 22: Animation Menu

377 Anime Studio Pro 10
Users Manual

Nudge Physics Object causes the ball to fly off again to the left. Smaller nudge
values cause objects to wobble.
A nudge is an instantaneous force that affects a physics
object in small or large amounts, depending on the setting
in the Physics Nudge dialog. It can be a large force, but Mute Audio
after the nudge keyframe, the object will start falling, or
Mutes the soundtrack when playing back your project
bouncing, or whatever the situation requires. It won’t keep
in Anime Studio, but the soundtrack is still a part of the
going in the nudge direction forever.
project. Just un-mute it to hear it again.

Restart Audio Track

Starts the audio track in the selected track over again from
the beginning. This allows you to add repeats in the audio
track.

Audio Level
Opens a dialog that allows you to enter a numerical value
The Physics Nudge dialog. for the audio level.

For example, assume that when you play your animation

back you see a red ball roll down and bounce to a stop
Restart Movie
against a block. You can position the timeline shortly after Starts the video in the selected track over again from the
it stops, and then apply a large nudge (such as 10) that beginning, allowing you to add repeats in the video track.

Chapter 22: Animation Menu

378 Anime Studio Pro 10
Users Manual

Chapter 23: Scripts The Scripts menu contains commands that are provided by
script files or plug-ins. Anime Studio includes several scripts

Menu for a variety of different tasks, and you can also download
more scripts written by other Anime Studio users. These
scripts are all written in the Lua programming language - if
you’re interested in creating your own scripts, feel free to
examine the scripts in the scripts/menu sub-folder in the
Anime Studio program folder.
The scripts in this menu are divided into several sub-menus,
according to their function:

3D
The scripts in this menu are used to create or manipulate
3D models.

Auto-Scale
When you import a 3D OBJ file into your scene, it may
be way out of scale with the Anime Studio scene. For
example, a building may be so large that the Anime Studio
camera is inside it, or off to one side, and you don’t really
see anything on import. This script centers the object and
Scripts Menu scales it to an appropriate size for the default Anime Studio
camera.

Chapter 23: Scripts Menu

379 Anime Studio Pro 10
Users Manual

Cube Torus
Creates a new 3D layer that contains a simple cube. The Creates a new 3D layer that contains a simple torus
color of the cube is determined by the current fill and line (donut). The color of the torus is determined by the current
colors. fill and line colors.

Rotate X Camera
Rotates the current 3D layer 90 degrees around the X These scripts are used to move the camera around and to
axis. This can be useful when importing a 3D model if the create camera-related effects.
model’s “up” direction is not the same as Anime Studio’s -
just use this command (and the other rotate commands) to
align the model properly. Handheld Camera
Adds noisy interpolation to the camera animation channels
Rotate Y to simulate a handheld camera.

Rotates the current 3D layer 90 degrees around the Y axis.

Orbit Camera...
Rotate Z Adds animation to the camera to cause it to rotate around
the current scene. You can specify how long this should
Rotates the current 3D layer 90 degrees around the Z axis. take, how far out the camera should be, and the direction
of rotation.

Chapter 23: Scripts Menu

380 Anime Studio Pro 10
Users Manual

Draw Simplify Curve

These scripts can be used to create vector objects in Reduces the number of points in a curve by removing
Anime Studio. points which are calculated to be “unnecessary” to
maintain the shape of the object. This makes it easier to
edit your shapes later.
Apply Sketchy Effect
Applies a sketchy effect to the outline of the shape. Split Curve
Automatically inserts points into selected curve segments,
Auto Weld allowing you to modify existing shapes.

Finds vector points that are near each other and welds
them together. Only operates on selected points. This can Star...
be useful if you have accidental gaps in a drawing, or
sometimes when working with imported Adobe Illustrator Draws a star shape in either the current vector layer, or a
files. new layer. Uses the current fill and line colors to color the
star.

Polygon...
Toggle Legacy Curves
Draws a polygon shape in either the current vector layer, or
a new layer. Uses the current fill and line colors to color the Turns on old style curves, which are less smooth than the
polygon. new curve style. However, this is beneficial for use with files
created in older versions of Anime Studio.

Remove Bad Fills

This script fixes “leaky” fill shapes.
Chapter 23: Scripts Menu
381 Anime Studio Pro 10
Users Manual

Zig Zag Spherical Panorama

Creates zig-zagged shading between two selected curves. Converts a spherical panorama image into a 3D sphere
You can control the number of spikes, curviness, and that can be viewed from any angle with the camera tools.
randomness.

Layer Effects
Image
These scripts can be used to generate special layer effects.
These scripts can be used to process image layers.

Layer Trail...
Fisheye
Creates an animated trail effect that follows the origin
Turns a fisheye image into a curved, wide-angle surface point of the current layer.
that can be panned around with the camera tools.

Magic Lines
Import Image Sequence...
Allows you to create a number of curves and apply this
Imports a numbered sequence of images. Each image is script to create an effect. For example, you can use the
imported as its own layer, and the entire group is enclosed Freehand tool to draw several curves that represent smoke
in a switch group. The image files should be named using a or swirly magic lines, and then run the script to create a
numerical sequence. For example, “file0001.jpg”, “file0002. smoky or magical effect.
jpg”, “file0003.jpg”, etc.

Perspective Shadow...
Automatically creates a pseudo-3D shadow effect for the
current layer.
Chapter 23: Scripts Menu
382 Anime Studio Pro 10
Users Manual

RT: Break Apart Shapes Explosion...

Offers a number of different options in how you can break Creates an explosion effect. The explosion starts at the
apart the shapes on a layer. You can put each shape in current frame, and will fade to a smoke cloud over time.
its own layer and group them together or put all shapes
in one layer creating separate geometry for each shape.
Additional options allow you to select filled shapes only,
Rain
and to name layers according to group names or shape
Inserts a falling rain effect.
names. This script is very useful when working with physics.

Smoke...
Particle Effects
Inserts a plume or cloud of smoke.
These scripts can be used to create particle effects like
smoke, fire, or rain. Many of these effects can be time-
consuming to render, so be aware of that if you plan to use Snow
several of them in a single animation. Also, even though
Creates a falling snow effect.
they can be exported to Flash, these effects can be too
complex for the Flash player to play at full speed. Plus,
without the blur effects these scripts use, they won’t look Sparkles...
very good in Flash. These effects are really useful only if you
plan to export to a movie or still image format, not Flash. Inserts a cluster of spiraling sparkles. This effect is very
effective if you bind it to another moving object - for
example, the end of a magic wand.
Energy Cloud...
Creates a blobby glowing cloud effect.

Chapter 23: Scripts Menu

383 Anime Studio Pro 10
Users Manual

Script Writing List Channels

This menu contain utility scripts that can be used as Shows how a script can iterate through all of the animation
examples for writing your own scripts. If you don’t plan channels in a layer. You can access every animateable
to write your own scripts, you can completely ignore this parameter in the layer.
menu.

Load Data File...

Alert Test
This script is a demonstration of how a Lua script can read
Demonstrates how a script can use an alert box to provide data from an external file. It doesn’t do anything useful
some information to the user. itself, but it could be used as a starting point if you wanted
to write a script to import some kind of custom data.

Automation Test
Print Anime Studio API
Shows how you can write a script that will open or save
a document, create a new document, and render a Prints out all functions, constants, and global variables that
document. The script opens all documents in a given Anime Studio provides through its scripting interface. This
directory and renders a frame for each one. is not meant to be the documentation for Anime Studio’s
scripting interface, but some script writers may find it useful.

Error Test The Resources > Support > Extra Files folder in your
Anime Studio Pro installation folder contains Lua scripting
This script intentionally creates a runtime error. The purpose documentation that you might find useful.
is to show how the Lua Console appears to display the
error. When you write your own scripts, the console window
will be very helpful when tracking down errors.

Chapter 23: Scripts Menu

384 Anime Studio Pro 10
Users Manual

Anime Studio merges user scripts and factory If the version is missing or lesser than the factory
scripts internally at runtime. If you name a user default, the factory default will be used and a copy
script in the same corresponding folder (tools, utility, of the factory default will be saved to the user folder
etc) with the same name as a factory script in the with the name _reference_tool_list.txt.
corresponding location, the user script will be
preferred over the factory script. User scripts that do
The _reference_tool_list.txt file is not for
not replace factory scripts are loaded after factory
editing. It is a reference to use when updating
scripts, as previously supported, unless a different
your custom _tool_list.txt for the current version. This
order is specified in the active _tool_list.txt file for tool
allows new tools and other changes to be
scripts.
accounted for when you make your customizations.
When the factory defaults version changes, a new
The _tool_list.txt factory default file now begins with a copy of this file will be saved for you to reference.
line that is similar to this:

/* anime_version 9010000 (9.1.0 Print Globals

rev 0) */
Prints out all global variables currently defined in Lua.

If you have a _tool_list.txt file in the user scripts/tools

location that begins with this line, and the version Print Test
number is the same or higher than the factory
A simple example that shows how you can print output
default version, your user _tool_list.txt will be used
in a Lua script. The printed output will appear in the Lua
instead of the factory file.
Console window. Printing data in the console window is
not generally useful when your script is delivered to regular
Anime Studio users, but can be very helpful when writing a
script to track down bugs.

Chapter 23: Scripts Menu

385 Anime Studio Pro 10
Users Manual

Sound Number Sequence

The scripts in this menu use sound to control some part of Adds a sequence of numbers based on the number of
an animation. frames in your animation.

Bone Audio Wiggle... Spinning Text

This script uses the volume of a sound file that you select to Creates 2D or 3D spining text. Several settings provide
animate the angle of the currently selected bone. Use this control over length, rotation, translation, opacity, and
script to make a character or object move in sync with a scale. Some presets are provided.
sound.

Tiling
Layer Audio Wiggle...
These two scripts allow you to create a repeating texture
Use this script to make a layer move in sync with a sound. pattern to fill the workspace. These tiled surfaces can be
animated.

Text
Visibility
Allows you to add credits or spinning text to your projects.
These scripts affect the visibility of a layer - for example,
causing it to fade in and out.
Credits
Allows you to select a text file that contains your credits.
You can specify font, duration for each screen, delay
between screens, and number of frames for fade.

Chapter 23: Scripts Menu

386 Anime Studio Pro 10
Users Manual

Fade... Wavy...
Causes the current layer to fade in or out over a specified Causes the selected points in a vector layer to move in a
number of frames. If you want a layer to appear or wavy or underwater style.
disappear suddenly, it is better to change the value of
the layer’s visibility channel. However, this script should be
used when you want a layer to appear or disappear more Other Popular Scripts
gradually.
Opens your web browser to www. animestudioscripts.com,
where you can download popular scripts written by other
Wavy Fade... members of the Anime Studio user community.

This script combines the Fade effect above with the Wavy
effect below. It can only be used with vector layers. Scripting Documentation
Opens your web browser to www.animestudioscripting.
Warp com, where you can view the latest scripting
documentation.
This set of scripts is used to distort the contents of a vector
layer, applying various animated warping effects.

Black Hole...
Causes the selected points in a vector layer to swirl around
in an inward spiral motion towards the origin point of the
layer.

Chapter 23: Scripts Menu

387 Anime Studio Pro 10
Users Manual

Chapter 24: View

Menu

View Menu

Chapter 24: View Menu

388 Anime Studio Pro 10
Users Manual

Reset Direction
Resets the view of the working area to the starting pan and This sub-menu lets you select a direction to view your scene
zoom values. Use this command when you want to jump from. The default view is through the camera - however,
back to the original view of the project. sometimes when you’re working on a scene with a 3D
layout, you may want to view the scene from a different
point of view. Options are Camera, Front, Top, Right, Back,
Zoom In Bottom, and Left.

Use the View > Zoom In command, or the keyboard

shortcut Command/Ctrl+= (equal sign) to zoom in closer to Enable Grid
the elements in your scene.
Toggles display of the grid on and off. A checkmark
appears beside the command when the grid is displayed.
Zoom Out
Use the View > Zoom Out command, or the keyboard Grid Settings
shortcut Command/Ctrl+- (minus sign) to zoom out farther
from the elements in your scene. Displays the Grid Settings dialog, which allows you to set
the number of pixels between each grid space. Default is
20 pixels.
Show Output Only
In OpenGL mode, this option will use a semi-transparent fill Disable Grid Snapping
so that you can see what is behind it.
When the grid is turned on, control points will snap to the
nearest grid intersection as you draw them and move
them around. Select this menu command to disable grid

Chapter 24: View Menu

389 Anime Studio Pro 10
Users Manual

snapping - that way you can use the grid as just a visual your final output - it’s just used as a tracing guide to help
guide, without it interfering in your drawing. you draw your artwork in Anime Studio.

Video Safe Zones Show Tracing Image

This command turns on the display of NTSC “safe zones”. Use this command to show or hide the tracing image that
When creating output for video, it is important to keep you have added to the scene using the Select Tracing
important action and titles within the safe zones, because Image command.
most televisions cut off some portion of the outside of the
picture. (The inner rectangle is the safe zone for titles, and
the outer one for important action.) Show Curves
Use this command to globally show or hide the curves in
Show Output Only your scene.

This command will hide all artwork that lies outside the final
output rectangle. This makes it easy to visualize the final Auto Hide Curves
staging for your shot. Of course, it’s hard to edit what you
When checked, Anime Studio will automatically hide
can’t see, so be sure to turn this option off when you need
curves when you use drawing tools that do not affect
to edit an object that lies outside the visible area of the
curves. This helps reduce onscreen clutter while you draw.
project.
Uncheck this option if you prefer to display curves at all
times.
Select Tracing Image
Use this command to select a tracing image to display in
Anime Studio’s editing view. This image will not appear in

Chapter 24: View Menu

390 Anime Studio Pro 10
Users Manual

Fade Unselected Layers Show Document Tabs

This option allows you to easily identify the layers and Open documents appear as tabs in the main window.
objects that you are working on, without having to turn You can show or hide the document tabs with the View >
other layers off. When this option is off, all layers in the Show Document Tabs command, or by using the shortcut
current project will be displayed normally. When this option Command/Ctrl+Shift+J.
is turned on, any layers or children of layers that are not
Open documents also appear as a list at the bottom of the
selected will be grayed out.
View menu. Select a document in the list at it will appear in
the view port area.
Design Mode The following shortcuts allow you to cycle through open
documents:
Returns the project to Frame 0, where you can add new
layers, draw vector shapes, change bone rigging, and • To switch to the next open document, press Ctrl+Tab
so on. Anime Studio will remember the frame that you (Windows) or Alt+Tab (Mac).
were previously on before choosing the command. If you
choose the command again after adding the desired • To switch to the previous open document, press
elements at Frame 0, you will return to the frame that was Ctrl+Shift+Tab (Windows) or Alt+Shift+Tab (Mac).
current before you applied the command the first time.

Stereo
If Enable Stereo (Red/Blue)Rendering is enabled in the
Project Settings dialog (see “Project Settings...” on page
312), this command makes it easier to preview and
reposition your 3D objects for stereo rendering.

Chapter 24: View Menu

391 Anime Studio Pro 10
Users Manual

Chapter 25: Window Layers

Menu Shows/hides the Layers window. The Layers window
is shown by default when you start Anime Studio. See
“Chapter 11: Layers Window” on page 166.

Timeline
Shows/hides the Timeline window. The Timeline window
is shown by default when you start Anime Studio. See
“Chapter 16: The Timeline Window” on page 275.

Style
Shows/hides the Style window. The Style window is shown
by default when you start Anime Studio. See “Chapter 13:
Style Window” on page 210.
Window Menu

Actions
Tools Shows/hides the Actions window. The Actions window
is hidden by default when you start Anime Studio. See
Shows/hides the Tools window. The Tools window is shown
“Actions Window” on page 299.
by default when you start Anime Studio. Tools are discussed
in the section beginning with “Anime Studio Tools” on
page 23.
Chapter 25: Window Menu
392 Anime Studio Pro 10
Users Manual

Library window. Adjust the sliders until you get a combination of

the morphs that you want to keep. Then click OK to set the
Displays the Library window, which is discussed in “Chapter new combination.
14: The Library Window” on page 239.
The Default slider is associated with the
default state of the object at Frame 0. To
Audio Recording blend the other morphs with this default state, check
the Relative Blend option.
Displays the Audio Recording window, which is discussed in
“Audio Recording” on page 298.

Blend Morphs
You can use the Window > Blend Morphs command
to blend poses (or morph targets) together to create a
combination pose or morph. This feature in Anime Studio is
very easy to use.

Anime Studio Pro allows you to both create

and blend poses. See “Creating Morphs” on
page 303.

To blend your morphs, begin by moving to the frame at

which you want the new morph to appear.
Next, choose the Window > Blend Morphs command. The
Blend Morphs dialog appears. The sliders in this dialog are
named the same as the morphs you created in the Actions
Chapter 25: Window Menu
393 Anime Studio Pro 10
Users Manual

You can select which animation channels to copy to a

new frame, or you can copy everything in the document
by selecting the “Copy entire document” checkbox.
There doesn’t need to be a keyframe at the current
frame in order to copy the current value. This command
will copy the current value, whether it is a keyframe or an
interpolated in-between value.

An important note about bones: if you

position a skeleton system during your
animation, and try to copy that pose back to frame
0, the bones themselves will take on that pose at
frame 0, but anything bound to the bones (points in
vector layers, warped images, other sub-layers) will
not take on that pose. This is because frame 0 is a
setup frame - bones are set up at frame 0, but they
have no influence over other objects at frame 0. If
you’re trying to copy a pose back to frame 0 in
Use the Blend Morphs dialog to combine your morphs together order to set up an initial pose, consider copying it
in any combination of values. back to frame 1 instead - frame 1 is actually the
beginning of the animation, and the bones will
You can then advance to other frames in your timeline, influence other objects starting at frame 1.
and use the Blend Morphs command to create new
combinations throughout the timeline. As you scrub
through the timeline, you should then see morphs blend
from one to the other.

Chapter 25: Window Menu

394 Anime Studio Pro 10
Users Manual

Layer Settings
Opens the Layer Settings dialog, discussed in “Chapter 12:
Layer Settings” on page 172.

Poser Parameters
Opens the Poser Parameters dialog, which allows you to
rotate or scale Poser objects that are imported into your
scene. For more information, see “Chapter 8: Special
Tools” on page 139.

Chapter 25: Window Menu

395 Anime Studio Pro 10
Users Manual

Chapter 26: Help Menu Tutorials

Opens the PDF version of the Anime Studio Tutorial Manual,
which is installed on your hard disk.

Help
Opens this document, the Anime Studio User’s Manual.

Online Tutorials
Opens a web browser with Anime Studio online tutorials.
Internet connection will be required.

Welcome Screen
Opens the Welcome Screen.

Register Your Product

Register your product to receive information on updates
and upgrades. Internet connection will be required.

Help Menu

Chapter 26: Help Menu

396 Anime Studio Pro 10
Users Manual

Community Forums is a great place to get inspired and see what others have
created with Anime Studio.
Opens your web browser to the Lost Marble forum, where
you can communicate with your peers and ask for help
on any topic related to Anime Studio and animation. The About Anime Studio Pro
forum is extremely large with over ten thousand registered
Displays some information about Anime Studio, including
members.
which version of Anime Studio you’re running.

Technical Support About Scripts

Opens your web browser to the Smith Micro website where
Displays some information about all the scripts currently
you can access FAQ’s, see answers to common issues, get
loaded by Anime Studio. All of Anime Studio tools, and
help from a customer service representative etc.
all the entries in the Scripts menu are implemented
in a scripting language called Lua. Although some
Download Bonus Content Pack programming/scripting experience is required, Anime
Studio users are welcome to write their own scripts to
Navigates to the Bonus Content Pack page on Content extend Anime Studio’s built-in features.
Paradise. You will need a Content Paradise account and a
valid Anime Studio serial number to obtain the content.
Buy Content
Online Video Gallery Help speed up your animation workflow with ready to
use content. Buy content from Content Paradise. Internet
Opens your browser to a page that displays some of the connection will be required.
animations that have been created with Anime Studio. This

Chapter 26: Help Menu

397 Anime Studio Pro 10
Users Manual

Check For Updates

Check to see if there are any updates for Anime Studio.
Internet connection will be required.

Deactivate License
Choose this command to deactivate the license before
you uninstall Anime Studio, or if you want to activate the
license on another computer.

Edit Keyboard Shortcuts

The Help > Edit Keyboard Shortcuts command opens the
Keyboard Shortcuts dialog shown in the following figure.

The Keyboard Shortcuts Editor.

By default, the shortcuts that are built-in to Anime Studio

are displayed in their default configuration, in three
categories: Menus, Tools, and Windows.
You cannot edit the default configuration. In order to
create your own shortcut configurations, you’ll need to
create a custom settings file.
Chapter 26: Help Menu
398 Anime Studio Pro 10
Users Manual

The following options appear in the dialog: appear in the shortcut list. Select the desired category
to jump to that location.
• Current Settings: Displays the name of the shortcut
configuration that is currently in use. • Shortcut Suggestions: Click this button to have Anime
Studio suggest an unused keyboard shortcut.
• New: Allows you to assign a name to a new shortcut
configuration. Anime Studio will notify you if the • Done: Click the Done button when you are finished
filename is too long. After you assign a name choose editing your shortcuts.
OK. Your new custom file will appear in the Current
Settings list, and you can begin to assign your custom
shortcuts.
Adding Shortcuts
To create a custom keyboard shortcut file, follow these
• Delete: Select a custom shortcut configuration from the
steps:
Current Settings list, and then click this button to delete
it. You cannot delete the Default configuration file.
If a user content folder is defined, Anime will
save custom keyboard shortcuts files to a
• Restore Defaults: Restores all keyboard shortcuts to
Keyboard Shortcuts folder in the user content folder.
the default values assigned with the Anime Studio
If names conflict with custom files saved to the
installation.
default location, the user location will supercede the
• Shortcut List: Displays all shortcuts by category: Menu, default location.
Tools, and Windows. You can use the scrollbar at the
right side of the shortcut list to scroll further down the list. 1. Choose Help > Keyboard Shortcut Editor to open the
The left side of the list displays a menu command, tool Keyboard Shortcut window.
name, or window; and the right side of the list displays
the associated shortcut if one is configured. 2. If a custom configuration file has not yet been
created, click the New button to assign a name for a
• Scroll To: Jumps to a specific shortcut category. The new configuration file. Otherwise, select the custom
categories are named in the order in which they
Chapter 26: Help Menu
399 Anime Studio Pro 10
Users Manual

configuration that you want to edit from the Current

Settings dropdown list.

3. Scroll through the keyboard shortcut list until you find

the menu command, tool, or window item that you
want to modify. Click inside the shortcut field to edit it.

4. With the shortcut field selected, press the associated

keys on your keyboard that you want to assign for the
command. You will receive a warning when the keyboard shortcut that
you enter is already in use.
Customized shortcuts will override default
shortcuts unless there is a conflict with a 5. After you are finished with your keyboard shortcuts,
default. If a conflict with a default shortcut exists, the click Done to save the configuration file.
default shortcut will take precedence over the
custom shortcut. If you change your locale, there may be
localized shortcuts that conflict with your
custom shortcuts. Your settings will be updated to
It is possible to create duplicate shortcuts. The
eliminate conflicts.
editor will warn you when multiple actions
have the same shortcut when you assign a shortcut
that is already used by another action. When Switching from 32-bit to 64-bit or vice versa
multiple actions use the same shortcut, the first could potentially alter the shortcuts available
enabled action found will be triggered. and may lead to a conflict between default settings
and custom settings. Your settings will be updated to
eliminate conflicts.

Chapter 26: Help Menu

400 Anime Studio Pro 10
Users Manual

If shortcuts have changed in the application since the last

time you updated, a dialog will prompt you to update your
custom shortcut list accordingly, or to use the new defaults.

Update Shortcuts dialog.

Set Custom Content Folder

Prompts you to create a content folder, as described in
“Creating a Content Folder” on page 8.

Open Custom Content Folder

Opens your custom content folder in Explorer (Windows) or
Finder (Mac)

Chapter 26: Help Menu

401 Anime Studio Pro 10
Users Manual

Appendix

Chapter 26: Help Menu

402 Anime Studio Pro 10
Users Manual

Appendix A: Product Real-time media connection No Yes

Comparison
Patch Layers Read only Read and
create

3D Video rendering No Yes

Global Rendering Styles No Yes

The differences between Anime Studio Debut and Pro
Scripting No Yes
Feature Comparisons
Layer Outline Yes Yes

Feature Anime Anime 64-bit Architecture No Yes

Studio Debut Studio Pro GPU Acceleration No Yes

Animation Length 2 minutes (3000 Unlimited Wacom Multi-Touch Support Yes Yes
frames)
Character Wizard Yes Yes
Motion Tracking 3 points Unlimited
Render Cache Yes Yes
Audio Tracks 2 tracks Unlimited
Separate Batch Export Process No Yes
Video Tracks 1 track Unlimited
Separate Render Process No Yes
Physics No Yes
Preview Animation No Yes
Poser scene import No Yes
Multiple Document Support Yes Yes
3D layer and object support No Yes (Tabs)

Morph targets Read Only Read and Keyboard Shortcut Editor Yes Yes
create
Automatic Update Checking Yes Yes
Automatic image tracing Black and white Black and
Activation, Serialization, and Yes Yes
only white, color,
License Management
and edges

Particles Read only Read and (1) Layered using Anime Studio script
Create
(2) Import directly through File menu.
Import Photoshop Files Yes (1) Yes (2)

Appendix A: Product Comparison

403 Anime Studio Pro 10
Users Manual

Window Menu Vector Drawing Features

Feature Anime Anime Feature Anime Anime
Studio Studio Pro Studio Studio Pro
Debut Debut
Tools X X Text X X

Beginner Mode Tools X Select Points X X

Layers X X Transform Points X X

Timeline X X Add Point X X

Style X X Hide/Show Points X X

Actions X Delete Edge X X

Library X X Curvature X X

Audio Recording X X Freehand X X

Poser Parameters X Multi-brushes X X

Character Wizard X X (1) Blob Brush X X

(1) Character Wizard in Pro lets you use and create Eraser X X

reusable actions that can be applied to any character Rectangle X X

created with the Wizard. Oval X X

Arrow X X

Shear Points X X

Shear Points Y X

Perspective Points H X

Perspective Points V X

Appendix A: Product Comparison

404 Anime Studio Pro 10
Users Manual

Bend Points H X Fill Features

Bend Points V X

Noise X Feature Anime Anime

Magnet X
Studio Studio Pro
Debut
Snap to Grid X
Select Shape X X
Reset Line Width X
Select Multiple Shapes X X
Random Line Width X
Create Shape X X
Variable Width Curve X X
Paint Bucket X X

Delete Shape X X
Vector Modifiers Line Width X X

Hide Edge X X
Feature Anime Anime
Stroke Exposure X
Studio Studio Pro
Curve Profile X
Debut
Texture Transparency X
Peak X X

Smooth X X

Flip Points Horizontally X X Fill Modifiers

Flip Points Vertically X X
Feature Anime Anime
Studio Studio Pro
Debut
Lower Shape X X

Raise Shape X X

Appendix A: Product Comparison

405 Anime Studio Pro 10
Users Manual

Bone Features Layer Features

Feature Anime Anime
Feature Anime Anime Studio Studio Pro
Studio Studio Pro Debut
Debut
Set Origin X X
Select Bone X X
Transformation X X
Transform Bone Tool (Translate, X X
Switch Layer X X
Scale, and Rotate)
Rotate Layer X X
Add Bone X X
Rotate Layer Y X
Hide/Show Bones X X
Shear Layer X X
Reparent Bone X X
Shear Layer Y X
Bone Strength X X
Particle Layer X
Manipulate Bones X X
Follow Path X X
Bind Layer X X
Poser X (1)
Bind Points X X
Image Masking X X
Offset Bone X X
Video Tracking X (2) X
Bone Physics X
Audio Layers X (3) X
Bone Constraints X
Layer Selector X X
Smart Bones X
Undo/Redo Layers X X
Smart Bones Setup X
Layer Comps X
Color Bones X X
Layer Colors X X
Bone Labels X
Flexi Binding X X
Nested Layer Controls X X

Appendix A: Product Comparison

406 Anime Studio Pro 10
Users Manual

Depth Shifting X Image X X

Fade Unselected Layers X Bone X X

Multiple Layer Editing X X Switch X X

Colorize Layer X X Group X

Particle X
(1) Requires Poser 7 or newer
3D X
(2) Limited to 3 tracking points Physics (Layer property) X
(3) Limited to 2 audio layers Note X

2D to 3D Layer Conversion X

Layer Modifiers Patch X

Text Layer X X

Feature Anime Anime

Studio Studio Pro
Debut
Camera Features
Flip Layer Horizontally X X
Feature Anime Anime
Flip Layer Vertically X X
Studio Studio Pro
Debut

Layer Types Track Camera X X

Zoom Camera X X

Feature Anime Anime Roll Camera X X

Studio Studio Pro Pan/Tilt Camera X

Debut
Vector X X

Appendix A: Product Comparison

407 Anime Studio Pro 10
Users Manual

Workspace Features Linear Interpolation X

Ease In/Out Interpolation X

Feature Anime Anime Bezier Interpolation X
Studio Studio Pro Step Interpolation X
Debut
Noisy Interpolation X
Pan Workspace X X
Bounce Interpolation X
Zoom Workspace X X
Elastic Interpolation X
Rotate Workspace X
Stagger Interpolation X
Orbit Workspace X
Sequencer X X
Depth of Field X
Keyframe Hold Duration X X

Colored Keyframes X X

Timeline Features
Feature Anime Anime
Action Features
Studio Studio Pro
Feature Anime Anime
Debut
Studio Studio Pro
Keyframes X X
Debut
Playback Controls X X
Store Reusable Animation X
Animation Channels X X
Edit Reusable Animation X
Ruler X X
Delete Reusable Animation X
Onionskins X

Graph Mode X

Smooth Interpolation X

Appendix A: Product Comparison

408 Anime Studio Pro 10
Users Manual

Style Features Project Settings

Feature Anime Anime Feature Anime Anime
Studio Studio Pro Studio Studio Pro
Debut Debut
Save Style X Save Project Settings X X

Pattern Brush X (1) X Edit Dimensions X X

Blur X X Background Color X X

Threshold X X Depth of Field X

(1) Pro version contains more brushes 3D Camera X

Stereo Rendering X

Sort Layers by Depth X X

Preferences Sort by True Distance X X

Noise Grain X
Feature Anime Anime
Up to 120 Frames/Second X X
Studio Studio Pro
Maximum
Debut
Maximum export size (pixels) 900 x 900 9000 x 9000
Options X X
Maximum number of frames 3000 Unlimited
Editor Colors X X

GUI Colors X X

GUI Color Themes X X

Appendix A: Product Comparison

409 Anime Studio Pro 10
Users Manual

Content Visibility X

Script Writing X
Feature Anime Anime
Studio Studio Pro
Debut View
Built in Content X X
Feature Anime Anime
Third Party Content X X
Studio Studio Pro
3D Object X
Debut
Character Wizard X X
Grid X

Adjust Grid Size X

Scripts Side by Side View X

Over Under View X

Feature Anime Anime Four-Way View X
Studio Studio Pro Display Quality X
Debut
Advanced Current Layer View X
3D X

Camera X

Draw X Import
Image Sequences X
Feature Anime Anime
Layer Effects X
Studio Studio Pro
Particle Effects X
Debut
Sound X
2D FORMATS
Warp X

Appendix A: Product Comparison

410 Anime Studio Pro 10
Users Manual

JPEG X X
(2) Directly through File menu.

BMP X X (3) AVI Import works on Windows, and on Macintosh

PSD X (1) X (2)
systems depending on codecs. If you can play the AVI file
in QuickTime on a Mac, you should be able to import it into
PNG X X
Anime Studio.
TGA X X

EPS, AI, Tracing Image X

3D FORMATS Export Formats

OBJ X
Feature Anime Anime
Poser Files and Scenes (Poser 7 X
and newer)
Studio Studio Pro
Debut
SOUND FORMATS
IMAGE FORMATS
WAV (Windows & Mac) X X
JPEG X X
AIFF (Windows & Mac) X X
BMP X X
MP3 (Windows & Mac) X X
PSD (Layered) X
M4A (MPEG-4) X X
PNG X X
MOVIE FORMATS
TGA X X
MOV (Mac and Windows) X X
Batch Image Export X
AVI (3) X X
MOVIE FORMATS
MP4 Video X X
SWF (1) X X
MOHO FORMAT
MOV (Macintosh and Windows) X X
MOHO File Format X X (2)

(1) Layered using Anime Studio script. AVI (Windows) X X

Appendix A: Product Comparison

411 Anime Studio Pro 10
Users Manual

MP4 X X Upload to Facebook® X X

Sequential JPEG X Upload to YouTube™ X X

Sequential BMP X

Sequential PSD X
Optimization Features
Sequential PNG X

Sequential TGA X Feature Anime Anime

Batch Movie Export X Studio Studio Pro
TV FORMATS Debut
NTSC Format X X 64-bit Architecture X

PAL X X GPU Acceleration X

HD movies X Render Cache X X

Separate Batch Export Process X

(1) SWF: Vector animations only; image layers can be used
as long as they are not warped by bones. See “Exporting Separate Render Process X

Flash” on page 338 for more information. Preview Animation X

(2) MOV: If you are using a 64-bit Windows operating Multiple Document Support X X
(Tabs)
system, you will need to use the 32-bit version of Anime
Keyboard Shortcut Editor X X
Studio Pro to export in MOV format.
Automatic Update Checking X X

Activation, Serialization, and X X

Upload Features License Management

Feature Anime Anime

Studio Studio Pro
Debut

Appendix A: Product Comparison

412 Anime Studio Pro 10
Users Manual

Appendix B: Technical information and a variety of tutorials. We plan to keep this

updated with questions and answers and new sample files.

Support To view in-depth product descriptions, online video gallery,

and more, visit http://anime.smithmicro.com.

User Manual Anime Studio Discussion Forum

The first source of help when using Anime Studio is the Share tips and tricks with other Anime Studio users on the
manual that you are reading now. We have also included online discussion forum: http://www.lostmarble.com/
a Tutorial Manual that you can view by choosing Help > forum/. Smith Micro staff members also participate in this
Tutorials from the Anime Studio menus. If you’re just getting online group, and are happy to share techniques and
started and need some basic tips on how to use Anime answer questions. News about the latest Anime Studio
Studio, begin with “Quick Start” on page 3 in your updates is first posted to the online forum.
Anime Studio Tutorial Manual.
For more in-depth instructions on using Anime Studio, the Email Support
sections “Anime Studio Windows” on page 158 and
“Anime Studio Menus” on page 307 go into great detail You can also get your questions answered by email. If you
about performing specific tasks in Anime Studio and what have a question, feature request, or would like to report a
all the user interface elements are used for, respectively. bug, contact us at [email protected]. Please provide us
with as much detail about your problem as possible, so that
we can understand exactly what’s happening and more
Anime Studio on the Web quickly come up with a solution for you.

Another good source is the Smith Micro web site at http://

anime.smithmicro.com. There you will find product

Appendix B: Technical Support

413 Anime Studio Pro 10
Users Manual

Appendix C: • Ming http://www.libming.org/ Copyright © 2001

Opaque Industries.

Acknowledgements • PortAudio http://www.portaudio.com Copyright ©

1999-2000 Ross Bencina and Phil Burk
Some parts of Anime Studio are based on libraries written
• zlib http://www.zlib.net Copyright © 1995-2002 Jean-
by third party organizations. Below is a list of libraries used
loup Gailly and Mark Adler.
by Anime Studio.

• Anti-Grain Geometry http://www.antigrain.com

Copyright © 2002-2004 Maxim Shemanarev (McSeem).
Artist Acknowledgements
Smith Micro and Lost Marble would like to thank the
• FreeType http://www.freetype.org Portions of this
following artists for contributing to the content section. To
software are copyright © 1996-2002 The FreeType
access these files, open Window > Library and navigate to
Project. All rights reserved.
a “Partners” Folder. Their creations will be displayed within
• libjpeg http://www.ijg.org This software is based in a folder with their name as the title.
part on the work of the Independent JPEG Group.
• DK Toons http://www.contentparadise.com/Search.
Copyright © 1991-1998, Thomas G. Lane.
aspx?searchText=DKToons
• libpng http://www.libpng.org Copyright © 1998, 1999,
• Cartoon Solutions http://www.cartoonsolutions.com
2000 Glenn Randers-Pehrson.
• ToonProps http://www.toonprops.com
• libsndfile http://www.mega-nerd.com/libsndfile/
Copyright © 1999-2005 Erik de Castro Lopo. • Víctor Paredes (Studio: Taza Triste): http://www.
youtube.com/tazatriste
• Lua http://www.lua.org Copyright © 2004 Tecgraf,
PUC-Rio.

Appendix C: Acknowledgements
414 Anime Studio Pro 10
Users Manual

• Hubumedia http://www.hubumedia.com (tweet: • Cartoon Workshop Sdn Bhd: http://www.

www.twitter.com/hubumedia) cartoonworkshop.com.my

• Alexander Roach (Rudiger): http:// • ToonProps http://www.toonprops.com

www.contentparadise.com/Search.
aspx?searchText=Rudiger) • Hubumedia http://www.hubumedia.com (tweet:
www.twitter.com/hubumedia)
• Charles Kenway (Studio: Square Brush): http://
squarebrush.com/ • TUI Studios http://www.tuistudios.com

• The Pirate, Monster, Monster and Rabbit was Illustrated • Freakish kid http://www.freakishkid.com
by Óscar Chávez: http://www.flickr.com/chavezonico
• Naive: http://www.naive.se
• The Carnivorous Plant was illustrated by Alfredo
• Mike Scott Animation http://www.909pop.com
Cáceres: http://Alfredocaceres.tumblr.com
• Curious Projects: http://www.curiousprojects.com
• The Pirate, Monster, Monster, Rabbit and Carnivorous
Plant rigging and animation was made by Víctor • Dave Cockburn’s Squeaky Pictures: http://www.
Paredes: http://www.youtube.com/tazatriste squeakypics.co.uk/

• The Smith Micro Content Team • Charles Kenway (Studio: Square Brush): http://
Smith Micro would like to thank the following artists for squarebrush.com/
imagery used in collateral and Promos.
• Víctor Paredes (Studio: Taza Triste): http://www.
• DK Toons http://www.contentparadise.com/Search. youtube.com/tazatriste
aspx?searchText=DKToons

• Cartoon Solutions http://www.cartoonsolutions.com

Appendix C: Acknowledgements
415 Anime Studio Pro 10
Users Manual

Content Acknowledgements • Misha Margolis: barnstory

• Shi Yang: A1, A5

Library > Characters > Version 5> User Samples • Vladimir O. (Studio: StudioSvet): otkritka

• Nate Greenwall: knight Master • Víctor Paredes (Studio: Taza Triste): dragón pulento
Direction, script, animation:
• Burt Abreu: Jeremy
VENT_ErikvanSchaaik, Erik van Schaaik, www.
• Philippe Cizaire: frog, stampel erikvanschaaik.com, [email protected]

• Shi Yang: A2, A3, A4, A6, A7 Production:

• Víctor Paredes (Studio: Taza Triste): african elephant • Il Luster Productions, www.illuster.nl, [email protected]
Library > Characters > Version 5 > User Samples
• Vladimir O. (Studio: StudioSvet): golova, Kati, KISSKI, kot,
Kozel, lef, sc, slon, tigr, volk, zaiac, zebr • Burt Abreu: blurtest, bumpy1, curvetest1, epidea1,
Library >Video > Animated Samples > Version 5 User hair1, hand1, leaf1, man1, mouth, myfish2, myfish3,
Samples oldman1, rasbora_maculata, robohead1, sparkdraw,
weedy1
• Burt Abreu: fishtank1
• Christian -Samb- Wasser (Studio: By Samb): people
• Christian -Samb- Wasser (Studio: By Samb): sunscene
• Erik Svensson: Fire, Tree, Water ripple
• Dave Cockburn (Studio: Squeaky Pics): Squeaky_10sec
• Philippe Cizaire: collection
• Erik Svensson: Ghost
• Vladimir O.: flag, glaz1, glaz2, glaz3, glaz4, glaz5,
• Mike Scott (Studio: Red Pepper): COOL_CATZ_INTRO_1 gudok, noga, palec
Appendix C: Acknowledgements
416 Anime Studio Pro 10
Users Manual

Library > Props > Partners> DK Toons

• David Knight (Studio: Knight animations): Acoustic

Guitar by D.K, Aliens Dance and Walk by D.K, Anime
girl frightened - by D.K, Builders - by D.K, Cartoon Fruit -
by D.K, Cow with Guitar - by D.K, Cupboard with doors
- by D.K, Funny guy - by D.K, Mobile Phone - by D.K,
Modern Dude - by D.K, Running Heart - by D.K, Slick
Salesman by - D.K, Two simple boys - by D.K

Appendix C: Acknowledgements
417 Anime Studio Pro 10
Users Manual

Appendix D: Anime Ctrl+S Cmd+S File > Save

Studio Shortcuts
Ctrl+Shift+S Shift+Cmd+S File > Save As

Ctrl+Alt+G File > Gather Media

Shift+Ctrl+P Shift+Cmd+P File > Project Settings

Shift+Ctrl+M Shift+Cmd+M File > Refresh Media

How to Work Quickly in Anime Ctrl+R Cmd+R File > Preview

Studio Ctrl+Shift+R

Ctrl+E
Shift+Cmd+R

Cmd+E
File > Preview Animation

File > Export Animation

Once you’ve been using Anime Studio for a while, you’ll Ctrl+Alt+E File > Export OBJ
probably want to find ways to speed up certain operations. Ctrl+B Cmd+B File > Batch Export
Luckily, Anime Studio provides several shortcuts for
Ctrl+Q Cmd+Q File > Quit
common operations, such as activating tools, navigating
the workspace, and entering data.
Edit Menu
Menu Shortcuts
Windows Mac Command

File Menu Ctrl+Z Cmd+Z Edit > Undo

Shift+Ctrl+Z Shift+Cmd+Z Edit > Redo

Windows Mac Command Ctrl+X Cmd+X Edit > Cut

Ctrl+C Cmd+C Edit > Copy

Ctrl+N Cmd+N File > New Ctrl+V Cmd+V Edit > Paste
Ctrl+O Cmd+O File > Open Ctrl+A Cmd+A Edit > Select All
Ctrl+W Cmd+W File > Close

Appendix D: Anime Studio Shortcuts

418 Anime Studio Pro 10
Users Manual

Ctrl+I Cmd+I Edit > Select Inverse Animation Menu

Windows Mac Command

Draw Menu Shift+Ctrl+N Shift+Cmd+N Animation > Nudge Physics
Object

Windows Mac Command

View Menu
Ctrl+T Cmd+T Draw > Insert Text

Ctrl+L Cmd+L Draw > Reset Line Width

Windows Mac Command
Ctrl+D Cmd+D Draw > Random Line Width
Ctrl+=(equal) Cmd+=(equal) View > Zoom In
Ctrl+P Cmd+P Draw > Peak
Ctrl+-(minus) Cmd+-(minus) View > Zoom Out
Ctrl+M Cmd+M Draw > Smooth
Ctrl+G Cmd+G View > Enable Grid
Shift+Ctrl+H Shift+Cmd+H Draw > Hide Shape
Shift+Ctrl+G Shift+Cmd+G View > Grid Settings
Shift+Ctrl+S Shift+Cmd+S Draw > Show All Shapes
Shift+Ctrl+V Shift+Cmd+V View > Video Safe Zones
Ctrl+F Cmd+F Draw > Freeze Points
Ctrl+J Cmd+J View > Show Output Only

Ctrl+Y Cmd+Y View > Select Tracing Image

Bone Menu Ctrl+U Cmd+U View > Show Tracing Image

Ctrl+Shift+C Shift+Cmd+C View > Show Curves

Windows Mac Command Ctrl+Shift+A Shift+Cmd+A View > Fade Unselected

Layers
Ctrl+Shift+F Shift+Cmd+F Bone > Use Selected Bones
for Flexi-Binding Shift+Ctrl+D Shift+Cmd+D View > Design Mode

Ctrl+Shift+Y Shift+Cmd+Y Bone > Freeze Pose Shift+Ctrl+2 Shift+Cmd+2 View > Stereo

Ctrl+Shift+J Shift+Cmd+J View > Show Document Tabs

Appendix D: Anime Studio Shortcuts

419 Anime Studio Pro 10
Users Manual

Window Menu These shortcuts are not the same as “menu

shortcuts” listed above.

Windows Mac Command

Ctrl+Shift+E Shift+Cmd+E Window > Tools Main Window
Ctrl+Shift+K Shift+Cmd+K Window > Layers
Windows Mac Function
Ctrl+[ Cmd+[ Window > Timeline
Alt+Shift+Ctrl+E Alt+Shift+Cmd+E Open/Close Tools Palette
Ctrl+] Cmd+] Window > Style
Alt+Shift+Ctrl+K Alt+Shift+Cmd+K Open/Close Layers Palette
Ctrl+K Cmd+K Window > Actions
Alt+Ctrl+[ Alt+Cmd+[ Open/Close Timeline
Shift+Ctrl+L Shift+Cmd+L Window > Library
Alt+Ctrl+] Alt+Cmd+] Open/Close Style Window
Shift+Ctrl+B Shift+Cmd+B Window > Blend Morphs
Alt+Shift+Ctrl+L Alt+Shift+Cmd+L Reload Tools and Brushes
Shift+Ctrl+I Shift_Cmd+I Layer Settings
Shift+Z Shift+Z Activate Previous Tool

Keyboard Shortcuts Main/Current Editing View

Many tools and features in Anime Studio can be accessed
quickly by pressing a single key. These shortcuts make Windows Mac Function
working with Anime Studio much faster than the regular Alt+Shift+{ Alt+Shift+{ Rotate View Left

method of moving the mouse to a toolbar and clicking Alt+Shift+} Alt+Shift+} Rotate View Right
a button, and are worth learning to reduce your drawing
and animation time. However, all these features are
also available through standard user interface elements Style Window
(buttons and menus), so learning these shortcuts isn’t a
requirement to using Anime Studio. Windows Mac Function

Appendix D: Anime Studio Shortcuts

420 Anime Studio Pro 10
Users Manual

] ] Decrease Line Width Shift+Ctrl+=(equal) Shift+Cmd+=(equal) Pan Up

[ [ Increase Line Width

Shift+Ctrl+-(minus) Shift+Cmd+-(minus) Pan Down

Shift+~(tilde) Shift+-(tilde) Auto Zoom

Timeline Shortcuts

Windows Mac Function Tool Shortcuts

Ctrl+1 Cmd+1 Set Interpolation Linear
Many of the keyboard shortcuts in Anime Studio are used
Ctrl+2 Cmd+2 Set Interpolation to activate a tool in a toolbar. If you want to know whether
Smooth
a tool has a shortcut, hold the mouse over the tool, and
Ctrl+3 Cmd+3 Set Interpolation Ease watch the tooltip that appears. If the tooltip has a single
In/Out
letter at the end (ex: “Transform Points (T)”), then that key
Ctrl+4 Cmd+4 Set Interpolation Ease In can be used as a shortcut to activate the tool.
Ctrl+5 Cmd+5 Set Interpolation Ease
Out The keyboard shortcut of Shift-Z toggles
Ctrl+6 Cmd+6 Set Interpolation Bezier between the currently selected tool and the
Ctrl+7 Cmd+7 Set Interpolation Step previous tool selection.

Ctrl+8 Cmd+8 Set Interpolation Noisy

Ctrl+9 Cmd+9 Set Interpolation Cycle Anime Studio auto-reverts to the previous tool
Shift+{ Shift+{ Previous Selected Key
selection when a shortcut for a different tool is
selected and held for two or more seconds, or if held
Shift+} Shift+} Next Selected Key
and a mouse click occurs on the canvas before the
Alt+Shift++(plus) Alt+Shift++(plus) Zoom In
shortcut is released.
Alt+Shift+_ Alt+Shift+_ Zoom Out
(underscore) (underscore)

Appendix D: Anime Studio Shortcuts

421 Anime Studio Pro 10
Users Manual

Fill Tools

Tool Tool
Shortcut
Q Select Shape

U Create Shape

P Paint Bucket
Press the T key to activate the Transform Points tool.
W Line Width

H Hide Edge
Draw Tools
Special Tools
Tool Tool
Shortcut Tool Tool
G Select Points Shortcut
T Transform Points A Video Tracking
A Add Point

F Freehand
Bone Tools
J Blob Brush
Tool Tool
S Draw Shape
Shortcut
E Eraser
B Select Bone
R Point Reduction
T Transform Bone
D Delete Edge
A Add Bone
C Curvature
P Reparent Bone
X Magnet

Appendix D: Anime Studio Shortcuts

422 Anime Studio Pro 10
Users Manual

S Bone Strength 8 Rotate Workspace

Z Manipulate Bones 9 Orbit Workspace

I Bind Points

Layer Tools Common Shortcuts

Some keyboard shortcuts work all the time, and some
Tool Tool only apply in while using certain tools in Anime Studio: the
Shortcut sections below lists all the shortcuts and when they can be
M Transformation used.
0 (number) Set Origin The following keyboard shortcuts can be used at any time:
L Eyedropper
Keyboard Function
Camera Tools Shortcut
Escape Automatically adjust the view to see everything in
Tool Tool the active layer - hold the shift key to zoom in on
the currently selected points
Shortcut
Home Reset the view to see the overall project
4 Track Camera
Enter/Return De-select all points
5 Zoom Camera
Tab Select all points that are connected to the current
6 Roll Camera
selection
7 Pan/Tilt Camera
Left Arrow Step back one frame in the timeline - hold shift
to rewind
Workspace Tools
Right Arrow Step forward one frame in the timeline - hold shift
to advance to end of animation
Tool Tool Left Bracket [ Decreases the line width setting in the Style
Shortcut window

Appendix D: Anime Studio Shortcuts

423 Anime Studio Pro 10
Users Manual

Right Bracket ] Increases the line width setting in the Style window Working with Bone Tools

Keyboard Function
Working with Vector Layers Shortcut
Delete/ Delete the selected bone (and any child bones)
Keyboard Function Backspace
Shortcut Spacebar Bind points to selected bone
Delete/ Delete the currently selected points Up Arrow Select parent of current bone
Backspace
Down Arrow Select child of current bone (only works if current
Spacebar Weld two points together - usually used with the bone has just one child)
Translate or Add Point tools

Working with the Timeline Window

Working with Fill Tools
Keyboard Function
Keyboard Function
Shortcut
Shortcut
Alt/ Delete the selected keyframe(s)
Delete/ Delete the selected shape Option+Backspace
Backspace
Alt/Option+C Copy the selected keyframe(s)
Spacebar Define a shape based on current selection
Alt/Option+V Paste the previously copied keyframe(s)
Up Arrow Raise selected shape up one level - hold shift to
raise to top Spacebar Play/stop the animation

Down Arrow Lower selected shape down one level - hold shift Page Up When in graph mode, zoom in on the timeline
to lower to bottom - hold shift to move the graph up

Page Down When in graph mode, zoom out from the

timeline - hold shift to move the graph down

End: Auto-zoom the timeline, based on the active

animation channel (when in graph mode)

Appendix D: Anime Studio Shortcuts

424 Anime Studio Pro 10
Users Manual

Working in the Layers WIndow navigation in Photoshop and other graphics

applications.
Keyboard Function
• To zoom the workspace, hold the shift key while
Shortcut
dragging left or right with the right mouse button. You
Alt-Click If you Alt-Click a layer in the Layers window, can also zoom the workspace by rolling the mouse
it will hide all of the other layers and keep the
layer that you clicked visible. Alt-Click again to wheel back and forth over the workspace.
display all layers again.
• To rotate the workspace, hold down the control key
while dragging with the right mouse button.
Mouse Shortcuts
• To fit the view to a selected layer, select the layer that
There are a few shortcuts that take advantage of the you want to view in the Layers window. Then press the
mouse, making work in Anime Studio more convenient Esc key to fit the selected layer into the view.
once you learn them.

Timeline Scrubbing
Workspace Navigation
To scrub the timeline in small increments, press Alt and roll
The right mouse button can be used to navigate the main the mouse wheel back and forth.
Anime Studio workspace.
To pan the workspace, click and drag with the right mouse Numeric Fields and Angle Knobs
button.
An easy way to make small adjustments in numeric text
• If you hold down the spacebar while you click fields and angle knobs is to hold the mouse over the control
and drag any tool with the mouse, it will let you and spin the mouse wheel back and forth. Of course, you
pan the workspace. This is similar to the panning can still enter values into a text field by typing them, but

Appendix D: Anime Studio Shortcuts

425 Anime Studio Pro 10
Users Manual

this method lets you make small adjustments and view the right-dragging allows you to adjust the value of a text field
changes immediately. without having to switch back to the keyboard.

• On a Windows PC, when using the mouse wheel

to modify the value in a text field, holding the Ctrl Multi-touch Support
key halves the increment, holding Shift doubles the
increment. Certain tools support Wacom multi-touch tablets and allow
you to use multi-touch gestures to perform tasks in Anime
• On a Macintosh, when using the mouse wheel to Studio. Red screen dots on screen identify the location
modify the value in a text field, holding the Cmd of your fingers on the tablet. The following general notes
key halves the increment, holding Alt doubles the apply to multi-touch features:
increment.
Use the Multitouch checkbox (located above
This feature may seem cute but unimportant. However,
the Timeline on the left side) to enable or
it’s actually very useful when working with the tool info
disable Multitouch support.
panels in Anime Studio. By using the mouse wheel, you can
see your changes take effect immediately. If you enter
the number by hand, the change won’t take effect until If you experience problems accessing
you press tab or enter. An especially helpful place to use Wacom touch support, you should make sure
this feature is when setting bone angle constraints - these you have the latest drivers installed, and restart
numbers can be tricky to figure out, but spinning the mouse Anime Studio or your computer if needed.
wheel you can see exactly what’s happening.
Finally, you can adjust the value of a text field by dragging If the currently selected tool does not support multi-
in it side-to-side with the right mouse button. With a regular touch, then the multi-touch events will be used to
mouse, the mouse wheel is probably more convenient, but navigate the workspace.
this feature was added specifically for animators working
with tablets. A drawing pen usually has no mouse wheel, so

Appendix D: Anime Studio Shortcuts

426 Anime Studio Pro 10
Users Manual

• Multi-touch events can be used for workspace Layer Tools

navigation, regardless of whether or not the current
tool supports multi-touch events. Hold down the The Transform Layer tool supports multi-touch actions.
spacebar while using the multi-touch tablet to use it for
workspace navigation. Multi-touch Function
action
• Multi-touch support is accessible through scripting, One finger gesture Translates selected layer
allowing users to write their own multi-touch scripts. Two-finger gesture Scales or rotates selected layer

• Smoothing and zooming support has been enhanced More than two Behaves similarly to two-finger gestures
fingers
to support multi-touch actions, and should also work
Four-finger drag Allows you to rotate an object in 3D
better with the touch ring on Wacom tablets.
The following tables outline the tools that offer this support. Camera Tools
Draw Tools Camera tools that support multi-touch actions are Track
Camera, Roll Camera, Zoom Camera, and Pan Camera.
Draw tools that support multi-touch actions are Transform
Points, Transform Points, Transform Points, Select Points, Multi-touch Function
Freehand, and Draw Shape. action
One finger gesture Tracks or Pan/Tilts camera
Multi-touch Function
Two-finger gesture Rolls or zooms camera
action
More than two Behaves similarly to two-finger gestures
One finger gesture Translates selected points
fingers
Two-finger gesture Scales or rotates selected points

More than two Behaves similarly to two-finger gestures Workspace Tools

fingers
Workspace tools that support multi-touch actions are Pan
canvas, Scale canvas, and Rotate canvas.
Appendix D: Anime Studio Shortcuts
427 Anime Studio Pro 10
Users Manual

Multi-touch Function
action
One finger gesture Pans the canvas

Two-finger gesture Scales or rotates the canvas

More than two Behaves similarly to two-finger gestures

fingers

Five fingers down Resets the canvas.

on tablet

Other Actions

Multi-touch Function
action
Two-finger Resets whatever property you are currently
double-tap editing.

Appendix D: Anime Studio Shortcuts

428 Anime Studio Pro 10
Users Manual

Index Clear Animation 376

Copy Current Frame 375
Mute Audio 377
Bone Layers 107
Bone Menu Commands 364
Flexi-Bind Layer 365
Nudge Physics Object 377 Flexi-Bind Points 365
Rescale Keyframes 373 Freeze Pose 370
Symbols Reset All Layer Channels 373 Hide Controlled Bones 368
Restart Audio Track 377 Release Layer 365
3D Conversion Thickness 236 Select All Keyframes 373 Release Points 365
3D Layers 116, 117 Set Layer Start Time 373 Reset All Bones 371
3D Shadows 186 Track Layer to Video 376 Reset Bone 371
Animations Track Bone to Video 368
A Exporting 333 Bone-Only Channels 288
Anime Studio Discussion Forum Bone Physics Tool 86
Acknowledgements 413 412 Bone Strength Tool 82
Actions Anime Studio Web Support 412 Bone Tools 73
Creating new 300 Applied Styles 235 Bonus Content 7
Deleting 303 Arrows 40 Downloading 396
Editing 301
Audio Layers 116 Brush Tool 42
Using 302
Audio Recording 298
Actions Window 299
Add Bone Tool 80
Audio Sync Sources 202 C
Auto shading 177
Add Point Tool 32 Camera Channels 288
Ambient occlusion 177
Animation channels 286
B Camera movements
Layers immune to 181
Animation Menu Commands Background color 314 Camera Tools 154
372 Bend Points Tool 50 Category Icons 240
Align Layer with Camera 373
Bind Layer Tool 84 Character Wizard 248
Allow Frame Skipping 373
Bind Points Tool 84 Arms 253
Audio Level 377
Bone Constraints 75 Body Tab 251
Blend Morphs 392
Changing character views 249

Index
429 Anime Studio Pro 10
Users Manual

Clothing Tab 259 Create Shape Tool 55 Draw Shape Tool 38

Creating content for 272 Credits 385 Draw Tools 24
Designing actions 270 Curvature Tool 35 Drop Shadow 222
Exporting views 250
Curve Profile Tool 67
Eyes 256
Face Tab 254 E
Head 255 D
Head props 257 Edit Menu Commands 347
Legs 253 Delete Edge Tool 41 Clear 348
Making a character walk 264 Delete Shape Tool 62 Copy 347
Cut 347
Mouth 256 Depth of field 314
Movement Tab 257 Paste 347
Layers immune to 181
Nose 256 Preferences 348
Display Quality 162 Editor Colors 353
Pants 260 Draw Menu Commands 355
Presets 249 GUI Colors 353
Freeze Points 363 Options Tab 349
Proportions 252 Freeze Selected Points 363
Randomizing characters 251 Web Uploads 352
Hide Shape 363 Redo 347
Rotating character views 266 Insert Text 356
Shirt 260 Select All 348
Lower Shape 357 Select Connected 348
Style Tab 261 Lower to Back 357
Walk Cycles 262 Select Inverse 348
Peak 356 Select None 348
Checker Selection 238 Raise Shape 357 Undo 347
Colorizing 180 Raise to Front 357
Effects Tutorials 248
Color Swatch 236, 237 Random Line Width 356
Reset All Points 363
Email Support 412
Compositing Effects 176
Reset Line Width 356 Embedded script files 181
Content Folder
Reset Points 363 Eraser Tool 44
Creating 8
Maintaining 243 Show All Shapes 363 Exporting
Smooth 356 Still images 343
Content Paradise 8
Snap to Grid 356 Eyedropper 138
Crayon Trace Image 357
Fill effects 223 Eyedropper Tool 63

Index
430 Anime Studio Pro 10
Users Manual

F Fill Tools 52 Hold Durations 292

Flash HSV modifier images 181
Facing a camera 182 Exporting 338
File Menu Commands 308 Flip horizontally 178 I
Batch Export 344 Flip vertically 178
Close 310 Follow Curve Tool 126 Image Layers 105
Export OBJ 343 Image Masking Tool 142
Following a path 181
Export POV 343
Freehand Tool 35 Image Texture Fill Effects 221
Gather Media 311
Import 320
Insert Text Tool 131
New 309 G Interpolation Method 278
New from Template 309 Introductory Tutorials 7
Open 309 Gradient Fill Effects 220
Open Recent 310 Group Layers 106 K
Preview 331
Quit 346 H Keyboard Shortcuts
Save 310 Bone Tools 423
Save As 311 Halo Fill Effects 219 Common 422
Upload to Facebook 343 Fill Tools 423
Help Menu Commands 395
Upload to YouTube 343 Timeline Window 423
Fill Color Override 216 Welcome Screen 9
Vector Layers 423
Fill Color Selector 215 About Anime Studio Pro 396 Keyframes 289
Fill effects 216 About Scripts 396 Adding 289
Fill Effect Settings 225 Buy Content 396 Coloring 291
Check for Updates 397 Deleting 290
Fill Enable 214
Help 395 Editing multiple 291
Fill Properties 214 Hold durations 292
Online Tutorials 395
Fills Moving 291
Register Your Product 395
Picking colors 70 Selecting 290
Tutorials 395
Using two 71 Transitions 292
Welcome Screen 395
Working with 70
Hide Edge Tool 64

Index
431 Anime Studio Pro 10
Users Manual

L Masking Tab 189 Expanded folders 240

Motion Blur Tab 188 Favorites Tab 246
Layer blending 183 Note Tab 205 Loading items 241
Layer blur radius 177 Particles Tab 203 Saving items to library 241
Physics Tab 206 Saving items to Library 240
Layer Colors 170 Shadows Tab 184 Searching 245
Layer Comps 169 Switch Tab 202 Selected item 240
Layer Effect Channels 287 Vectors Tab 195 Line Width Tool 63
Layer List 166 Layer Shading 185
Layer Motion Channels 287 Layer Shadows 185 M
Layer opacity 177 Layers Window 166
Layers Shortcuts 424 Magnet Tool 41
3D 117 Layer Toolbar 168 Manipulate Bones Tool 83
Aligning 103 Layer Tools 121 Markers
Animated effects 175 Fine-tuning 145
Layer Types 101
Colorizing 180
Legacy Effects 224 Masking
Creating new 168
Library Tabs 240 Tips and Tricks 191
Deleting 168
Duplicating 168 Library Window 239 Morphs
Hiding 175 Adding an item to Favorites 240 Creating 303
Naming 175 Adding items to Favorites 241 Motion Graph 295
Patch 118 Adding items to scene 240, 241 Mouse Shortcuts 424
Rendering off 175 Adding items to the Library 244 In Angle knobs 424
Settings 169 Categories 242 In numeric fields 424
Layer Selector 131 Collapsed folders 240 Timeline Scrubbing 424
Layer Settings Content previews 240 Workspace Navigation 424
3D Options Tab 204 Creating new folders 241 Move Layer Tool 121, 125, 129
Bones Tab 207 Creating subfolders 243 Multi-Brushes 229
Depth Sort Tab 197 Deleting items 244 Creating 230
Deleting items from library 241
General Tab 172, 174 Multiple layers
Image Tab 198 Displaying and hiding 240
Editing 172

Index
432 Anime Studio Pro 10
Users Manual

Multi-touch support 425 Importing files 327 Scale Points Tool 31

Playback Buttons 162 Scatter Brush Tool 47
N Point Reduction Tool 46 Scripts Menu Command
Points Other Popular Scripts 386
Noise Tool 50 Translating 29 Scripts Menu Commands 378
Note Layers 116 Poser Integration 323 3D 378
Poser tool 139 Auto-Scale 378
O Preferences 348 Cube 379
Rotate X 379
Product Comparison 402
Offset Bone Tool 85 Rotate Y 379
Project Settings 312 Rotate Z 379
Onion Skins 284
Torus 379
Orbit Workspace Tool 157 R Camera 379
Origins Handheld Camera 379
Offsetting 152 Real-time Media connection 323 Orbit Camera 379
Outline 178 Rectangles 39 Draw
Ovals 39 Registration 7 380
Render styles 314 Apply Sketchy Effect 380
P Reparent Bone Tool 81
Auto Weld 380
Polygon 380
Roll Camera Tool 155 Simplify Curve 380
Paint Bucket Tool 58
Rotate Points Tool 32 Split Curve 380
Pan/Tilt Camera Tool 155
Rotate Workspace Tool 157 Star 380
Pan Workspace Tool 156
Rotating to face camera 182 Toggle Legacy Curves 380
Particle Layers 113 Image 381
Rotating to follow path 181
Particle Layer Tool 141 Import Image Sequence 381
Round End Caps 234
Particle-Only Channels 289 Layer Effects 381
Patch Layers 118 Layer Trail 381
S Magic Lines 381
Perspective Points Tool 48
Perspective Shadow 381
Photoshop Scale compensation 181 RT: Break Apart Shapes 382
Exporting from 331

Index
433 Anime Studio Pro 10
Users Manual

Particle Effects 382 Shaded fill effects 217 Swatches 236

Energy Cloud 382 Shapes 212 Switch Layers 109
Explosion 382 Shape Selection 212 Switch Layer Tool 141
Rain 382 Shear Layer Tool 130 Switch-Only Channels 289
Smoke 382
Shear Points Tool 49 System requirements 6
Snow 382
Sparkles 382 Shortcuts 417
Scripting Documentation 386 Smart Bones 88 T
Script Writing 383 and Binding 99
Alert Test 383 Creating an action 90 Technical Support 412
Automation Test 383 Creating a second action 93 Discussion Forum 412
Error Test 383 Editing actions 94 Email 412
List Channels 383 Fixing transitions 95 Online Manual 412
Load Data File 383 Other uses 99 Web sites 412
Print Globals 384 Soft Edge Fill Effects 218 Text 131
Print Moho API 383 Special tools 139 Threshold 178
Print Test 384 Spinning Text 385 Through Transparency 222
Sound 385 Spirals 40 Timeline
Bone Audio Wiggle 385
Stars 40 Animation channels 286
Layer Audio Wiggle 385
Status Bar 162 Controlling time 277
Visibility 385
Stroke Brush Selector 227 Navigating with mouse 278
Fade 386
Playing partial segments 286
Wavy Fade 386 Stroke Color 226
Warp 386 Stroke Effect 232 Timeline Window 299
Black Hole 386 Stroke Effect Settings 234 Toolbar 160
Wavy 386 Stroke Enable 226 Toon Settings 200
Select Bone Tool 73 Stroke Exposure Tool 65 Track Camera Tool 154
Select Points Tool 25 Stroke Line Width 232 Tracked Layers
Select Shape Tool 52 Assigning 150
Stroke properties 226
Sequencer 293 Tracking Points
Style Management 213 Adding 144
Set Origin Tool 125 Style Window 210

Index
434 Anime Studio Pro 10
Users Manual

Adjusting sensitivity 150 Stereo 390

Re-syncing 146 Video Safe Zones 389
Transformation Visibility in rendering 176
Moving 124
Rotating 124 W
Scaling 124
Transform Bone 78 Window Menu Commands 391
Translate Points Tool 28 Actions 391
Triangles 40 Audio Recording 392
Layers 391
Library 392
U Poser Parameters 394
Style 391
User Manual 412
Timeline 391
Tools 391
V Window Mode Indication 214
Vector Layers 104 Windows
Docking and undocking 164
Vector-Only Channels 288 Main Window 159
Video Tracking Tool 143 Word Balloons
View Menu Commands 387 Creating 137
Working area 159
Fade Unselected Layers 390
Workspace Tools 156
Design Mode 390
Direction 388
Disable Grid Snapping 388 Z
Enable Grid 388
Grid Settings 388 Zig Zag 381
Reset 388 Zoom Camera Tool 155
Select Tracing Image 389 Zoom Workspace Tool 156
Show Output Only 389

Index